VersaLink C7030f.sm
VersaLink C7030f.sm
VersaLink C7030f.sm
December 2017
© 2017 Xerox Corporation. All rights reserved. Xerox®, Xerox, Design® and VersaLink® are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Other company trademarks are also acknowledged.
While every care has been taken in the preparation of this manual, no liability will be accepted by Xerox Europe arising out of any inaccuracies or omissions.
All service documentation is supplied to Xerox external customers for informational purposes only. Xerox service documentation is intended for use by certified, product trained service per-
sonnel only. Xerox does not warrant or represent that it will notify or provide to such customer any future change to this documentation. Customer performed service of equipment, or
modules, components or parts of such equipment may affect whether Xerox is responsible to fix machine defects under the warranty offered by Xerox with respect to such equipment. You
should consult the applicable warranty for its terms regarding customer or third-party provided service.
Introduction
About This Manual .......................................................................................................... iii
How To Use This Manual ................................................................................................ iii
Change History ............................................................................................................... iv
Mod/Tag Identification ..................................................................................................... v
Voltages Resistances and Tolerances ............................................................................ v
Safety Information ........................................................................................................... vi
Health and Safety Incident reporting ............................................................................... vii
Translation of Warnings .................................................................................................. viii
This page gives information on major changes to the service manual. Go to the relevant • 116-355, 363, 367, 370, 373, 376 Fatal Error RAP
update. • 116-378, 379, 395 MCR/MCC Soft Fail RAP
• BUS Update December 2017 • 116-399 Initialization RAP
BUS Update December 2017 • 116-714 HP-GL/2 Command Error RAP
The following procedures are updated: • 124-312, 124-357 DC132 Error 12 RAP
• SCP 4 Subsystem Maintenance • 124-315, 317, 355 DC132 Error 02, 04 and 14 RAP
• 005-122 DADF Simplex/Side 1 Pre Registration Sensor On Jam RAP • 124-319 DC132 Error 08 RAP
• 005-123 DADF Simplex/Side 1 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP • 124-323 DC132 06 RAP
• 005-125, 005-145 DADF Registration Sensor Off Jam RAP • 124-325 Billing Restoration Fail RAP
• 005-131, 005-132 DADF Invert Sensor On Jam During Inverting RAP • IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP
• 005-134, 005-139 DADF Invert Sensor Off Jam RAP • REP 13.13 Stack Height Sensors 1 and 2
• 005-135 DADF Side 2 Pre Registration Sensor On Jam RAP • dC945 IIT Calibration
• 005-136 DADF Side 2 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP • GP 1 Diagnostics Entry
• 005-147 DADF Pre Registration Sensor Off Jam During Inverting RAP • GP 4 Machine Software
• 005-288 Home Position Sensor Fail RAP • GP 10 How to Switch Off the Machine or Switch On the Machine
• 016-210, 506, 777, 780, 798 HDD Error RAP • GP 13 Network Clone Procedure
• 016-513 SMTP Server Reception Error RAP • GP 15 Paper and Media Size Specifications
• 016-574 FTP Host Name Solution Error RAP • GP 25 Ethernet Crossover Cable Setup
• 016-579 FTP Scanning Picture Preservation Place Error RAP • GP 29 System Administrator Password Reset
• 016-580 FTP File Name Acquisition Failure RAP • GP 41 Foreign Device Interface Setup
• 016-583, 016-584 FTP Folder Creation Failure RAP • Change Tags TAG:002
• 016-748, 774, 775, 778, 981 HD Full RAP • PTO - System Overview
• 016-759 Auditron Limit Reached RAP • PTO - Paper Supply and Feed
• 016-767 Invalid Email Address RAP • PTO - Bypass tray, revised Figure 18
• 016-768 Invalid Sender Address RAP • PTO - Drum Cartridge (Overview)
• 016-770 Direct Fax Function Canceled RAP • PTO - Fuser Life
• 016-781 Server Connect Error RAP • PTO - Tray APS Sensors and Size Sensors
• 017-714 SMTP Over SSL Fail RAP • PTO - Print Transportation Overview
• 018-406 Setting Status of IP Address (IPv4) RAP • GP 1 Diagnostics Video added to service manual interface
• 018-407 Setting Status of IP Address (IPv6) RAP • GP 4 Software Video added to service manual interface
• 018-427 Duplicate IP Address Range WiFi and WiFi Direct RAP
• 018-500, 501, 503, 504, 506, 507, 508 CA Server Error RAP
• 018-502 SMB Login Failure RAP
• 018-505 SMB-DOS Protocol Error RAP
• 018-590 Same Name Exists RAP
• 018-592, 018-593 Lock Folder Fail RAP
• 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP
• 116-314 Ethernet Address Fail RAP
• 116-324 Exception Fail RAP
These with tag symbols are used to identify the components Table 1 DC Voltage Levels
or configurations that are part of a machine change covered
Nominal Voltage Voltage Tolerance Range
by this tag number.
0V 0.00 to 0.10V
+3.3V standby +3.23V to +3.43V
+3.3V +3.23V to +3.43V
+5V and +5V standby +4.75V to +5.25V
+12V +11.4V to +12.6V
These without tag symbols are used to identify the +24V +23.28V to +25.73V
components or configurations that are used when this
tag is not fitted.
Non-standard voltage levels will be quoted on the relevant wiring diagram or BSD. All other
voltage levels are plus or minus 10%.
Resistance Tolerances
All resistance measurement tolerances are plus or minus 10%, unless otherwise stated in the
procedure.
Figure 1 Mod/Tag identification symbols
DC Signal Nomenclature
Figure 1 shows the signal nomenclature used in the BSDs.
Non standard signal tolerances will be quoted on the relevant circuit diagram. Safety Icons
The safety icons that follow are displayed on the machine:
NOTE: The logic level shown with the signal name will be the actual signal as measured with a
service meter. This will not necessarily be the same as the logic state shown on the diagnostic ESD Caution Symbol
screen.
CAUTION
Certain components in this product are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
Location Arrow Symbol
The location arrow symbol points to the location to install, to gain access to, or to release an
object.
II. Scope
Xerox Corporation and subsidiaries worldwide.
III. Objective
To enable prompt resolution of health and safety incidents involving Xerox products and to
ensure Xerox regulatory compliance.
Toner Cartridge
IV. Definitions
The product contains a toner cartridge that is recyclable. Under various state and local laws, it
may be illegal to dispose of the cartridge into the municipal waste. Check with the local waste Incident:
officials for details on recycling options or the proper disposal procedures.
An event or condition occurring in a customer account that has resulted in injury, illness or
property damage. Examples of incidents include machine fires, smoke generation, physical
Fuses
injury to an operator or service representative. Alleged events and product conditions are
included in this definition.
WARNING
V. Requirements
Do not install a fuse of a different type or rating. Installing the wrong type or rating of
fuse can cause overheating and a risk of fire. Initial Report:
1. Xerox organizations shall establish a process for individuals to report product incidents to
Part Replacement Xerox Environment Health and Safety within 24 hours of becoming aware of the event.
Only use genuine Xerox approved spare parts or components to maintain compliance with leg-
2. The information to be provided at the time of reporting is contained in Appendix A (Health
islation and safety certification. Also refer to GP 21 Restriction of Hazardous Substances
and Safety Incident Report involving a Xerox product).
(RoHS).
3. The initial notification may be made by the method that follows:
Disassembly Precautions • Email Xerox EH&S at: usa.product.incident@xerox.com.
Do not leave the machine with any covers removed at a customer location. • Fax Xerox EH&S at: 1-585-422-8217 (intelnet 8*222-8217).
NOTE: If sending a fax, please also send the original via internal mail.
Reassembly Precautions
Responsibilities for resolution:
Use extreme care during assembly. Check all harnesses to ensure they do not contact moving
1. Business Groups/Product Design Teams responsible for the product involved in the inci-
parts and do not get trapped between components.
dent shall:
General Procedures a. Manage field bulletins, customer correspondence, product recalls, safety retrofits.
Observe all warnings displayed on the machine and written in the service procedures. Do not b. Fund all field retrofits.
attempt to perform any task that is not specified in the service procedures. 2. Field Service Operations shall:
a. Preserve the Xerox product involved and the scene of the incident inclusive of any
associated equipment located in the vicinity of the incident.
b. Return any affected equipment/part(s) to the location designated by Xerox EH&S
and/or the Business Division.
c. Implement all safety retrofits.
3. Xerox EH&S shall:
a. Manage and report all incident investigation activities.
b. Review and approve proposed product corrective actions and retrofits, if necessary.
c. Manage all communications and correspondence with government agencies.
d. Define actions to correct confirmed incidents.
WARNING
Do not work in a confined space. 1 m (39 inches) space is needed for safe working.
DANGER : Ne pas travailler dans un espace restreint. 1 mètre d'espace est nécessaire
pour un dépannage en toute sécurité.
AVVERTENZA: Non lavorare in uno spazio limitato; è necessario uno spazio di almeno
un metro attorno alla macchina per la sicurezza dell'operatore.
VORSICHT: Nur mit ausreichendem Bewegungsspielraum (1 m) arbeiten.
AVISO: No trabaje en un espacio reducido. Se necesita 1 metro de espacio para trabajar
con seguridad.
WARNING
Do not install a fuse of a different type or rating. Installing the wrong type or rating of
fuse can cause overheating and a risk of fire.
DANGER : Ne pas installer de fusible de type ou de calibre différent. Il existe un risque
de surchauffe voire d'incendie.
AVVERTENZA: per evitare rischi di surriscaldamento o d'incendio, non installare un fus-
ibile di tipo o carica diversi da quelli esistenti.
VORSICHT: Keine Sicherungen anderer Art oder anderer Leistung auf dem IOT-PWB
installieren - Überhitzungs- und Brandgefahr.
AVISO: No instale un fusible de potencia o tipo distinto. Un fusible de potencia o tipo
distinto puede producir sobrecalentamiento y el riesgo de incendio.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP XX. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Use Fault Analysis to identify the appropriate RAP to perform based on the machine fault or • GP 10 How to Switch Off the Machine or Switch On the Machine.
symptoms. • GP 11 How to Safely Lift or Move Heavy Modules.
• GP 12 Machine Lubrication.
Procedure • GP 13 Network Clone Procedure.
• GP 14 Printing Reports.
CAUTION • GP 15 Paper and Media Size Specifications.
Do not expose the drum cartridges, PL 90.20 to light for more than 30 minutes. If necessary, • GP 16 Installation Space Requirements.
remove the drum cartridges, then place in a black bag. • GP 17 Electrical Power Requirements.
Fault Codes • GP 18 Environmental Data.
If a fault code is displayed, go to the relevant RAP. Also refer to Unresolved Faults. • GP 19 Obtaining Audit and Device Logs.
• GP 20 First Copy/Print Out Time and Power On Time.
Image Quality Defects • GP 21 Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS).
If the image quality is defective, go to the IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP. • GP 22 Special Boot Modes.
• GP 23 Customer Administration Tools.
Unresolved Faults
• GP 24 How to Set the Date and Time.
If a fault cannot be resolved using the appropriate RAP, and only if instructed by 2nd level sup-
port, obtain a device log. Refer to GP 19 Obtaining Audit and Device Logs. Escalate the prob- • GP 25 Ethernet Crossover Cable Setup.
lem to 2nd level support. • GP 26 Replacement Dongle Process.
• GP 27 Billing Plan/Region Conversion Process.
Other Problems • GP 28 Billing Impression Mode Change Process.
• For suspected power distribution faults, refer to the following: • GP 29 System Administrator Password Reset.
– 01A AC Power RAP. • GP 30 How to Print the Fax Reports.
– 01B +5VDC Power Fault RAP. • GP 31 Print/Copy Orientation Definitions.
– 01C +24VDC Power Fault RAP. • GP 40 Glossary of Terms, Acronyms and Abbreviations.
– Wiring Diagrams • GP 41 Foreign Device Interface Setup.
• Scan to file failure when using FTP or SMP protocols. Perform the 016A Scan to Network
Error Entry RAP.
• For unresolved faults that occur during start up of the device, perform the OF1 POST
Error RAP.
• For fax faults without a fault code, perform the 020A Fax Entry RAP.
• If the customer requires a billing plan or region change, go to GP 27 Billing Plan/Region
Conversion Process.
• If the customer requires a billing impression mode change, go to GP 28 Billing Impression
Mode Change Process.
Additional Information
If necessary, refer to the general procedures and information that follow:
• GP 1 Diagnostics Entry.
• GP 2 Fault Codes and History Files.
• GP 3 Device Information.
• GP 4 Machine Software.
• GP 5 Miscellaneous Checks.
• GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
• GP 8 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch.
Use Subsystem Maintenance to identify potentially worn components that should be replaced Service
to prevent further faults, and to perform routine cleaning and lubrication of the machine. Servicing Items Service Details Interval
Safety Check Ensure that the power cords are not cracked and no Every visit
Procedure wires are exposed.
Ensure that an extension cord with insufficient length
or power cord outside the specification, such as an off-
WARNING the-shelf power strip, is being used.
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 10. Disconnect the power lead from the Ensure that a single socket does not have multiple
customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can power plugs plugged into it.
cause the death or injury. Moving components can cause the injury.
Go to the correct procedure: Installation of New Parts
• Service Checks The design life of the major components is shown in Table 2.
• Installation of New Parts
Table 2 Design life
• HFSI
• How to Clean the Machine Part Life PL Ref.
• Drum Cartridge Handling DADF feed, nudger and retard rolls 200K feeds PL 5.25 Item 2 and
PL 5.65 Item 4
Service Checks
Fuser 100K prints or when IOT power PL 10.05 Item 2
Perform the actions in Table 1 at the indicated service interval.
on time exceeds 18,000,000
seconds.
Table 1 Service actions
IBT unit 20000K prints PL 90.45 Item 3
Service
2nd BTR unit 20000K prints PL 90.40 Item 5
Servicing Items Service Details Interval
Drum cartridges (Y, M,C,K) 80K pages PL 90.20
IQ check Check the overall copy quality using a test chart. Every visit
Developer Units (Y, M,C,K) 20/25ppm = 400K Prints PL 90.30 Item 1
Check for uneven density, blank areas, drum
30/35ppm = 480K prints
scratches, heat roll scratches, etc. in A3 halftone.
Tray 1 feed, nudger and retard rolls 300K feeds PL 80.11
Clean the machine Check and clean the paper transport roller (including 300K feeds
interior the bypass tray). Bypass tray feed and nudger rolls and 50K feeds PL 70.40
Clean any toner residue in the paper transport path. retard pad
Clean any contamination and paper dust from the jam Tray 2 feed, nudger and retard rolls 300K feeds PL 80.25
sensors. Tray 3 feed, nudger and retard rolls 300K feeds PL 80.25
Clean the operating parts around the toner cartridges, Every visit Tray 4 feed, nudger and retard rolls 300K feeds PL 80.25
PL 90.05 and drum cartridges, PL 90.20.
Use the cleaning assembly, PL 28.05 Item 4, stored in
HFSI
the front cover, PL 28.05 Item 5, to clean each of the 4
print head assemblies, PL 60.35 Item 1. For High Frequency Service Items (HFSI), refer to dC135 CRU/HFSI Status.
Clean the optics 1. Clean the document cushion, PL 5.05 Item 1. 1. Every visit
and DADF Use an optical cleaning cloth to clean the surface 2. How to Clean the Machine
10K feeds
of the document glass, PL 60.10 Item 9 and the Use a dry lint free cloth or a lint free cloth moistened with water for all cleaning unless directed
CVT glass, PL 60.10 Item 8. otherwise. Wipe with a dry lint free cloth if a moistened cloth is used.
2. Clean the DADF nudger and feed rolls, PL 5.25
Item 2 and the retard roll, PL 5.65 Item 4. 1. Feed Components (Rolls and Pads)
Use a dry lint free cloth or a lint free cloth moistened with water. Wipe with a dry lint free
cloth if a moistened cloth is used.
2. Toner Dispense Units
Vacuum the toner dispense units.
BSD-ON: BSD 1.2 Main Power On (2 of 2) BSD-ON: BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (1 of 2)
Use this procedure to identify AC power input and output failures. Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
WARNING not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Take care when measuring AC mains (line) voltage. Electricity can cause death or injury.
WARNING Check the voltage between the LVPS ( P/J501 pin 8) and ground. +5VDC is measured.
Take care when measuring AC mains (line) voltage. Electricity can cause death or injury. Y N
Switch off the main power switch, GP 10. Check the voltage between J10 and J18 on the inlet Check the voltage between P1 pin 1 and pin 3 on the LVPS. The AC power supply is
GFI breaker. The voltage measured is within electrical power requirements, GP 17. within specification, GP 17.
Y N Y N
Disconnect the power cord from the outlet. Check the AC mains (line) voltage at the cus- Perform the 01A AC Power RAP.
tomers power outlet. The voltage measured is within electrical power requirements,
GP 17. Switch off the machine, GP 10. Disconnect P/J501 from the LVPS. Wait 15 seconds,
Y N then switch on the machine, GP 10. Check the voltage between the LVPS ( P/J501 pin 8)
If the voltage is incorrect, or the wiring of the main supply is found to be defective, and ground. +5VDC is measured.
inform your technical manager and the customer. Do not attempt to repair or adjust Y N
the customer supply. Install a new LVPS, PL 1.10 Item 3.
Check the power cord for open circuit and poor contact. The main power cord is good. Check the +5VDC circuit for a short circuit to frame. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data.
Y N
Install a new power cord. Check the wiring of the suspect component for an open circuit or poor contact. Refer to Chap-
ter 7 Wiring Data.
Install a new inlet GFI breaker, PL 1.15 Item 7.
Switch on the main power switch, GP 10. Check the voltage between P1 pin 1 and pin 3 on the
LVPS. The AC power supply is within specification, GP 17.
Y N
Switch off the power, then unplug the power cord from the outlet. Check the wiring:
• Between the GFI breaker (J10 pin 1) and the main power switch (P/J12 pin 1).
• Between the main power switch (P/J14 pin 1) and the LVPS (P1 pin 3).
• Between the inlet GFI breaker (J18 pin 1) and the LVPS (P1 pin 1).
Install new components as necessary:
• Main power switch, PL 1.05 Item 3.
• LVPS, PL 1.10 Item 3.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Take care when measuring AC mains (line) voltage. Electricity can cause death or injury.
Check the voltage between the LVPS ( P/J501 pin 1) and ground. +24VDC is measured.
Y N
Check the voltage between P1 pin 1 and pin 3 on the LVPS. The AC power supply is
within specification, GP 17.
Y N
Perform the 01A AC Power RAP.
Switch off the machine, GP 10. Disconnect P/J501 from the LVPS. Wait 15 seconds,
then switch on the machine, GP 10. Check the voltage between the LVPS ( P/J501 pin 1)
and ground. +24VDC is measured.
Y N
Install a new LVPS, PL 1.10 Item 3.
Check the +24VDC circuit for a short circuit to frame. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data.
Check the wiring of the suspect component for an open circuit or poor contact. Refer to Chap-
ter 7 Wiring Data.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the UI assembly, PL 2.05 Item 7 (C7030F) or PL 2.10 Item
1 (C7000) and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure that all sur-
face mounted modules on the ESS PWB are securely connected.
3. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB and the UI assembly.
4. Reload the software, GP 4.
5. If the fault persists, install a new components as necessary:
• UI assembly, PL 2.05 Item 7 (C7030F) or PL 2.10 Item 1 (C7000).
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
003-321 IISS sending error detected by the controller. After commands were sent twice from
003-339 Transmission establishing error for sending.
the controller, the controller could not receive acknowledgment from the IISS.
003-340 Synchronous send error.
003-322 IISS sending error detected by the controller. After commands were sent twice from
the controller, the controller could not receive acknowledgment from the IISS.
003-341 Transmission error for sending.
003-323 IISS sending error detected by the controller. After commands were sent twice from
003-342 Incorrect argument error for receiving.
the controller, the controller could not receive acknowledgment from the IISS.
003-343 Synchronous receive error.
003-324 IISS sending error detected by the controller. After commands were sent twice from
the controller, the controller could not receive acknowledgment from the IISS.
Procedure
003-325 IISS sending error detected by the controller. After commands were sent twice from
the controller, the controller could not receive acknowledgment from the IISS.
WARNING
003-326 IISS sending error detected by the controller. After commands were sent twice from Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
the controller, the controller could not receive acknowledgment from the IISS. not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
003-327 IISS sending error detected by the controller. After commands were sent twice from Perform the steps that follow:
the controller, the controller could not receive acknowledgment from the IISS. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
003-328 IISS sending error detected by the controller. After commands were sent twice from
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
the controller, the controller could not receive acknowledgment from the IISS.
securely connected.
003-329 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence 3. Reload the software, GP 4.
of a transmission failure is received. 4. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
003-330 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
of a transmission failure is received.
003-331 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
of a transmission failure is received.
003-332 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
of a transmission failure is received.
003-333 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
of a transmission failure is received.
003-334 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
of a transmission failure is received.
003-335 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
of a transmission failure is received.
003-336 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
of a transmission failure is received.
Procedure 003-345 When IIT image delivered was received from the IISS, an error of the X hot line was
detected.
WARNING Procedure
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. WARNING
Perform the steps that follow: Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Perform the steps that follow:
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
3. Reload the software, GP 4. 2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
4. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP. Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
Procedure 003-704 Color correction color difference error during 2 sided simultaneous scan.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to correct the magnification settings.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
1. Advise the customer to load the 2 sided simultaneous scan correction chart correctly.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to cancel the job, then retry the job. 1. Advise the customer to change the parameters, then retry the job.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
003-930 For scanning in the DADF mix duplex mode, 300dpi, 400dpi and 600dpi are not avail- 003-755 Command error returned from the PWB.
able.
003-756 All scanned documents were detected as blank.
003-933 For scanning in the DADF mix duplex mode, 300dpi, 400dpi and 600dpi are not avail-
able (when the next document exists). Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
Procedure 1. Advise the customer to cancel the job, then retry the job.
Perform the steps that follow:
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
1. Advise the customer to perform scanning below 200 dpi resolution or perform scanning in
other than mixed mode.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
003-931 For scanning in the DADF mix duplex mode, 400dpi and 600dpi are not available. 003-761 Tray selection error.
003-934 For scanning in the DADF mix duplex mode, 400dpi and 600dpi are not available 003-763 The adjustment chart patch could not be detected.
(when the next document exists).
Procedure
Procedure Perform the steps that follow:
Perform the steps that follow: 1. Advise the customer to correct the job properties.
1. Advise the customer to perform scanning below 300 dpi resolution or perform scanning in 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
other than mixed mode.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to cancel the job. 1. Advise the customer to cancel the job then to change the scan resolution parameter and
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4. then retry the job.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to cancel the job then to clear the B/W setting for color mode or the
side 2 cover image setting, then retry the job.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure 003-956 Undefined document size was detected when platen is selected and only APS
requires document size selection.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to change the job parameters, then retry the job.
Procedure
2. Ensure the memory SD card, PL 3.10 Item 11 is installed.
Perform the steps that follow:
3. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
1. Advise the customer to input an appropriate value for the document size, then retry the
job.
2. Perform the procedures that follow as necessary:
• 005-194 Size Mismatch Jam on SS Mix-Size RAP
• 005-196, 198, 199, 946, 948, 949, 950 Size Mismatch Jam RAP
3. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to reload the correct number and size of documents, and to correctly
program the job on the UI. Retry the job.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
003-965 There was no paper in the tray that can be selected for APS. Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
003-966 There is no APS tray that is set to a specific size selected.
1. Advise the customer to specify an appropriate punch position or cancel punch, then retry
the job.
Procedure
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to select a tray that has the correct size of paper, then retry the job.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Ask the customer to load a correct size document, then retry the job. 1. Advise the customer to reload the correct size paper, then retry the job.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
003-981 Staple could not be done for the selected paper size.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to specify a staple position again or cancel staple, then retry the job.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
005-122 After pre-feed started for the first sheet (DADF feed motor on (CCW)) in simplex and 005-123 The DADF registration sensor does not turn on within the specified time after the
duplex, the DADF pre registration sensor did not turn on within the specified time. DADF pre registration sensor on.
After pre-feed started for the second sheet onwards (DADF feed motor on (CCW)) in duplex, Procedure
the DADF pre registration sensor did not turn on within the specified time.
Procedure WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
WARNING death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause • GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
• GP 8 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch.
• GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
Perform the steps that follow:
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
1. Check for a foreign substance in the document path.
• GP 8 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch.
2. Check the surface of the takeaway roll and registration roll for foreign substances or wear.
Perform the steps that follow:
Clean or install new components as necessary, PL 5.50.
1. Check for a foreign substance in the document path.
3. Enter dC330, code 005-110. Check the DADF registration sensor, PL 5.70 Item 3.
2. Check the surface of the feed roll and nudger roll for foreign substances or wear. Clean or
4. Enter dC330, code 005-206. Check the DADF pre registration sensor, PL 5.70 Item 3.
install new components as necessary, PL 5.25.
5. Enter dC330, code 005-098. Check the DADF takeaway clutch, (W/O TAG 002, PL 5.35
3. Enter dC330, code 005-206. Check the DADF pre registration sensor, PL 5.70 Item 3.
Item 2), (W/TAG 002, PL 5.36 Item 2).
4. Enter dC330, code 005-062. Check the DADF feed clutch, (W/O TAG 002, PL 5.35 Item
6. Enter dC330, code 005-008. Check the DADF feed motor, PL 5.30 Item 3.
2), (W/TAG 002, PL 5.36 Item 2 ).
7. Check the drive gears, (W/OTAG 002, PL 5.35), (W/TAG 002, PL 5.36) for wear or dam-
5. Enter dC330, code 005-004. Check the DADF feed motor, PL 5.30 Item 3. age. Install new components as necessary.
6. Check the drive gears, (W/OTAG 002, PL 5.35), (W/TAG 002, PL 5.36) for wear or dam- 8. If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.10 Item 11.
age. Install new components as necessary.
7. If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.10 Item 11.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
• GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
• GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Perform the steps that follow:
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check for a foreign substance in the document path.
1. Check for a foreign substance in the document path.
2. Check the surface of the registration roll, out roll and exit roll for foreign substances or
2. Check the surface of the out roll for foreign substances or wear. Clean or install new com-
wear. Clean or install new components as necessary, PL 5.50. ponents as necessary, PL 5.50.
3. Enter dC330, code 005-110. Check the DADF registration sensor, PL 5.70 Item 3. 3. Enter dC330, code 005-211. Check the DADF invert sensor, PL 5.50 Item 8.
4. Enter dC330, code 005-206. Check the DADF pre registration sensor, PL 5.70 Item 3. 4. Enter dC330, code 005-110. Check the DADF registration sensor, PL 5.70 Item 3.
5. Enter dC330, code 005-008. Check the DADF feed motor, PL 5.30 Item 3. 5. Enter dC330, code 005-008. Check the DADF feed motor, PL 5.30 Item 3.
6. Check the drive gears, (W/OTAG 002, PL 5.35), (W/TAG 002, PL 5.36) for wear or dam- 6. Check the drive gears, (W/OTAG 002, PL 5.35), (W/TAG 002, PL 5.36) for wear or dam-
age. Install new components as necessary.
age. Install new components as necessary.
7. If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.10 Item 11.
7. If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.10 Item 11.
005-134 During invert when there is another document, after the DADF registration sensor 005-135 After the DADF feed motor started the reverse rotation at invert operation, the DADF
turned off, the DADF invert sensor did not turn off within the specified time. pre registration sensor did not turn on within the specified time.
005-139 During a scan, after the DADF registration sensor turned off, the DADF invert sensor Procedure
did not turn off within the specified time.
Procedure WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
WARNING death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
• GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
• GP 8 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch.
• GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
Perform the steps that follow:
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
1. Check for a foreign substance in the document path.
• GP 8 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch.
2. Check the surface of the exit roll for foreign substances or wear. Clean or install new com-
Perform the steps that follow:
ponents as necessary, PL 5.50.
1. Check for a foreign substance in the document path.
3. Enter dC330, code 005-206. Check the DADF pre registration sensor, PL 5.70 Item 3.
2. Check the surface of the out roll and exit roll for foreign substances or wear. Clean or
4. Enter dC330, code 005-008. Check the DADF feed motor, PL 5.30 Item 3.
install new components as necessary, PL 5.50.
5. Check the exit nip roll, PL 5.65 Item 17. Enter dC330, code 005-072. Check the exit nip
3. Enter dC330, code 005-211. Check the DADF invert sensor, PL 5.50 Item 8. release solenoid, (W/O TAG 002, PL 5.35 Item 8), (W/TAG 002, PL 5.36 Item 8).
4. Enter dC330, code 005-110. Check the DADF registration sensor, PL 5.70 Item 3. 6. Check the drive gears, (W/OTAG 002, PL 5.35), (W/TAG 002, PL 5.36) for wear or dam-
5. Enter dC330, code 005-008. Check the DADF feed motor, PL 5.30 Item 3. age. Install new components as necessary.
6. Check the exit nip roll, PL 5.65 Item 17. Enter dC330, code 005-072. Check the exit nip 7. If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.10 Item 11.
release solenoid, (W/OTAG 002, PL 5.35 Item 8), (W/TAG 002, PL 5.36 Item 8).
7. Check the drive gears, (W/OTAG 002, PL 5.35), (W/TAG 002, PL 5.36) for wear or dam-
age. Install new components as necessary.
8. If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.10 Item 11.
Procedure 005-198 The length of the vertical scanning direction is less than the specified value, simplex
85mm (3.3 inches), duplex 110mm (4.3 inches).
WARNING 005-199 The length of vertical scanning direction is the specified value or more, simplex
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do 1275mm (50.1 inches), duplex 480.1mm (18.9 inches).
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. 005-946 In no mix mode, a document with a shorter size in slow scan (SS) direction was fed.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
005-948 In no mix mode, a document with a shorter size in slow scan (SS) direction was fed.
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Perform the steps that follow: 005-949 In no mix mode, a document with a longer size in slow scan (SS) direction was fed.
1. Check the size of the document that was fed by the user.
2. Enter dC330. Check the sensors that follow: 005-950 In no mix mode, a document with a longer size in slow scan (SS) direction was fed.
• Code 005-215, tray APS sensor 1, PL 5.55 Item 6.
• Code 005-216, tray APS sensor 2, PL 5.55 Item 6. Procedure
• Code 005-217, tray APS sensor 3, PL 5.55 Item 6.
• Code 005-218, DADF APS sensor 1, PL 5.50 Item 8. WARNING
• Code 005-219, DADF APS sensor 2, PL 5.50 Item 8.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
• Code 005-220, DADF APS sensor 3, PL 5.50 Item 8. not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
3. If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.10 Item 11. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check the size of the document that was fed by the user.
2. Enter dC330. Check the sensors that follow:
• Code 005-206, DADF pre registration sensor, PL 5.70 Item 3.
• Code 005-221, tray size sensor 1, PL 5.55 Item 6.
• Code 005-222, tray size sensor 2, PL 5.55 Item 6.
3. If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.10 Item 11.
005-197 A prohibited size combination was detected. 005-210 When the IISS starts up (including at power on and sleep recovery), it was detected
that the DADF is in download mode. There was an error in DADF download, the ROM is cor-
Procedure rupted.
Refer the customer to the user documentation regarding document size combinations.
Procedure
Reload the software, GP 4.
005-275 RAM failure on the DADF PWB was detected at power on. 005-288 The invert mechanism failed to return to the home position.
005-280 Write failure to the DADF EEPROM or communication failure with EEPROM was Procedure
detected.
Procedure WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
WARNING death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause • GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• GP 8 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch.
Perform the steps that follow:
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
1. Check the operation of the driven link between the cams.
2. If the problem persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.10 Item 11.
2. Enter dC330, code 005-234. Check the DADF home position sensor, (W/OTAG 002, PL
5.35 Item 20), W/TAG 002, PL 5.36 Item 10).
3. Check the exit nip roll, PL 5.65 Item 17. Enter dC330, code 005-072. Check the exit nip
release solenoid, (W/OTAG 002, PL 5.35 Item 8), (W/TAG 002, PL 5.36 Item 8).
4. Enter dC330, code 005-110. Check the DADF registration sensor, PL 5.70 Item 3.
5. If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.10 Item 11.
005-305 The DADF feeder cover was opened during DADF operation. Procedure
Resubmit the job.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check the actuator on the upper feeder assembly, PL 5.10 Item 10. If the actuator is dam-
aged, install a new upper feeder assembly, PL 5.10 Item 10.
2. Enter dC330, code 005-212. Check the CVT feeder cover sensor, PL 5.10 Item 14.
3. If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.10 Item 11.
005-907 DADF pre registration sensor detected paper when powering on, closing the feeder 005-908 DADF registration sensor detected paper when powering on, closing the feeder cover
cover or closing the DADF. or closing the DADF.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary: Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor. • GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Enter dC330, code 005-206. Check the DADF pre registration sensor, PL 5.70 Item 3. 1. Enter dC330, code 005-110. Check the DADF registration sensor, PL 5.70 Item 3.
2. If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.10 Item 11 2. If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.10 Item 11.
005-913 DADF invert sensor detected paper when powering on, closing the feeder cover or 005-915 DADF APS sensor 1 detected paper when powering on, closing the feeder cover or
closing the DADF. closing the DADF.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary: Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor. • GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Enter dC330, code 005-211. Check the DADF invert sensor, PL 5.50 Item 8. 1. Enter dC330, code 005-218. Check the DADF APS sensor 1, PL 5.50 Item 8.
2. If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.10 Item 11. 2. If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.10 Item 11.
005-916 DADF APS sensor 2 detected paper when powering on, closing the feeder cover or 005-917 DADF APS sensor 3 detected paper when powering on, closing the feeder cover or
closing the DADF. closing the DADF.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary: Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor. • GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Enter dC330, code 005-219. Check the DADF APS sensor 2, PL 5.50 Item 8. 1. Enter dC330, code 005-220. Check the DADF APS sensor 3, PL 5.50 Item 8.
2. If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.10 Item 11. 2. If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.10 Item 11.
005-921 The DADF document guide width detected a letter SEF width. 005-940 A document was pulled out during document feed.
Procedure
WARNING Reload the document.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check the size of the document that was fed by the user.
2. Enter dC330. Check the sensors that follow:
• Code 005-215, tray APS sensor 1, PL 5.55 Item 6.
• Code 005-216, tray APS sensor 2, PL 5.55 Item 6.
• Code 005-217, tray APS sensor 3, PL 5.55 Item 6.
3. If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.10 Item 11.
005-945 Fast scan direction (width) size mismatch was detected during CVT no-mix, or CVT
slow scan.
005-947 Fast scan direction (width) size mismatch was detected during CVT no-mix, or CVT
slow scan.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check the size of the document that was fed by the user.
2. Enter dC330. Check the sensors that follow:
• Code 005-218, DADF APS sensor 1,PL 5.50 Item 8.
• Code 005-219, DADF APS sensor 2, PL 5.50 Item 8.
• Code 005-220, DADF APS sensor 3, PL 5.50 Item 8.
3. If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.10 Item 11.
BSD-ON: BSD 10.2 Fusing Heat Control (2 of 2) 010-329 After installation of a new fuser, the fuse (F1) for detection is not open within the cor-
rect time.
010-327 The main lamp or sub lamp has been on continuously for longer than the setting time.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Perform the steps that follow:
Perform the steps that follow: 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. 2. Ensure that the fuser is installed correctly.
2. Ensure that the fuser is installed correctly. 3. Check the drawer connector between the fuser and the main unit ( DP612) for damage.
3. Ensure that the power supply voltage is within specification, refer to GP 17 Electrical 4. Check the connections and wiring between the fuser fuse PWB ( P/J567) and the drive
Power Requirements. PWB ( P/J416 for an open circuit, short circuit or poor contact.
4. Check the drawer connector between the fuser and the main unit ( DP612) for damage. 5. Check the connection between the fuser ( DP612) and the drive PWB ( P/J416) for an
5. Check the connections and wiring between the fuser ( DP612) and the LVPS ( P2) for an open circuit, short circuit or poor contact.
open circuit, short circuit or poor contact. 6. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
6. Check the connections and wiring between the fuser ( DP612) and the drive PWB ( P/ • Fuser, PL 10.05 Item 2.
J416) for an open circuit, short circuit or poor contact. • Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
7. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary: • ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
• Fuser, PL 10.05 Item 2.
• LVPS, PL 1.10 Item 3.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
010-331 Fuser thermistor detected temperature monitor AD value that is the specified value or 010-332 Fuser NC Sensor compensation AD value or detection AD value was 1020 or more 10
more 10 consecutive times. consecutive times.
010-333 Fuser NC sensor detected a temperature that is the specified value or more 10 con- 010-379 The time taken to recover from a high temperature not ready state has exceeded the
secutive times. specified time.
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Remove the fuser. Check whether foreign substances or paper is wound around the heat Perform the steps that follow:
roll. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
• Ensure J416 on the drive PWB is securely connected. 2. Ensure that the fuser is installed correctly.
3. Check the drawer connector between the fuser and the main unit ( DP612) for damage.
Procedure 4. Check the connections and wiring between the fuser ( DP612) and the drive PWB ( P/
Perform the steps that follow: J416) for an open circuit, short circuit or poor contact.
1. Install new components as necessary: 5. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• LVPS, PL 1.10 Item 3. • Fuser, PL 10.05 Item 2.
• Fuser, PL 10.05 Item 2. • Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4. • ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
2. To clear this fault, first remove the cause, then reset the value of NVM location 744-002
(Error Detection Flag) to 0. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
NOTE: The relationship between the displayed value and the sensor that detected the high
temperature error is as follows:
• 0: Normal.
• 1: High temperature error of heat roll nc sensor.
• 2: High temperature error of heat roll thermistor.
• 3: Abnormal temperature increase of heat roll NC sensor, heat roll thermistor.
• 4: Hardware high temperature error of heat roll thermistor.
010-334 Heat roll NC sensor temperature - heat roll thermistor temperature was detected at 90 010-337 From the value of the fuser thermistor and NC sensor, paper was wrapped around the
(NVM) degrees or higher 10 consecutive times or more. Heat roll thermistor temperature - heat heat roll.
roll NC sensor temperature was detected at 70 (NVM) degrees or higher 10 consecutive times
or more. Procedure
010-335 Fuser NC sensor compensation output AD value was detected below 130 degrees for
10 consecutive times or more. Fuser NC sensor detection output AD value was detected below WARNING
150 degrees for 10 consecutive times or more.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Procedure death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
WARNING 1. Remove any jammed paper from the fuser. Ensure the customer is using paper within
specification, GP 15.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause 2. If no jammed paper was found, install a new fuser, PL 10.05 Item 2.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. 3. Reset the value of NVM location 744-002 (Error Detection Flag) to 0. Switch off, then
switch on the machine, GP 10.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. NOTE: The relationship between the displayed value and the sensor that detected the high
2. Ensure that the fuser is installed correctly. temperature error is as follows:
3. Check the drawer connector between the fuser and the main unit ( DP612) for damage. • 0: Normal.
4. Check the connections and wiring between the heat roll sensor ( P/J124) and the drive • 1: High temperature error of heat roll nc sensor.
PWB ( P/J416) for an open circuit, short circuit or poor contact. • 2: High temperature error of heat roll thermistor.
5. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary: • 3: Abnormal temperature increase of heat roll NC sensor, heat roll thermistor.
• Fuser, PL 10.05 Item 2. • 4: Hardware high temperature error of heat roll thermistor.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure
Check the specifications of paper, GP 15. Paper is in specification.
Y N
Load paper that is in specification.
Check the condition of the paper. The paper is in normal condition without any problem
that causes the paper to be bent or caught.
Y N
Resolve any problem that causes the paper to be bent or caught.
Check the transport path for a foreign object, deformed part or paper dust. The transport
path is good.
Y N
Repair the deformed part(s) or remove the foreign object(s) and paper dust.
Check that the finisher is installed correctly. The finisher is correctly installed and correctly
connected to the IOT.
Y N
Reinstall the finisher correctly.
Enter dC330 code 012-140. Actuate the finisher entrance sensor. The display changes.
Y N
Check the connections of P/J8709 and P/J8729. The connectors are good.
Y N
Secure the connections.
Check for an open or short circuit between P/J8709 and P/J8729. The wiring is good.
Y N
Repair the open or short circuit.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8709 pin 6 (+) and ground (-). The
voltage is approximately +5VDC.
Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault persists,
install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Initial Actions Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8709 pin 3 (+) and ground (-). The
voltage is approximately +5VDC.
NOTE: Ensure the correct RAP is performed, refer to the 012-151 Compiler Exit Sensor Off
Jam Entry RAP Y N
Check the +5VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8709 pin 2 (+) and ground (-). Actuate
WARNING the compiler exit sensor. The voltage changes.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Y N
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Install a new compiler exit sensor, PL 12.12 Item 16.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Check the compiler exit sensor, PL 12.12 Item 16 is correctly installed and free from for- Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault per-
eign objects and that the actuator is not binding. sists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Enter dC330 code 012-095. The finisher transport motor runs.
Y N
Procedure Check the connections of P/J8706 and P/J8739. The connectors are good.
Check the specifications of paper, GP 15. Paper is in specification. Y N
Y N Secure the connections.
Load paper that is in specification.
Check for an open or short circuit between P/J8706 and P/J8739. The wiring is good.
Check the condition of the paper. The paper is in normal condition without any problem Y N
that causes the paper to be bent or caught. Repair the open or short circuit.
Y N
Resolve any problem that causes the paper to be bent or caught. Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8706 pin 5 (+) and ground (-), and P/
J8706 pin 7 (+) and ground (-). Each voltage is approximately +24VDC.
Check the transport path for a foreign object, deformed part or paper dust. The transport Y N
path is good. Check the +24VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data.
Y N
Repair the deformed part(s) or remove the foreign object(s) and paper dust. Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault per-
sists, install a new components as necessary:
Check the exit roll, PL 12.11 Item 10 for wear, deterioration or paper dust. The exit roll is • Finisher transport motor, PL 12.12 Item 17.
good. • Finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Y N
Remove the paper dust or install a new exit roll, PL 12.11 Item 10. Enter dC330 code 012-013. The sub paddle solenoid energizes and the sub paddle shaft
assembly moves vertically.
Check the drive mechanism to the exit roll for a deformed, broken part, and/or belt damage. Y N
The drive mechanism is free of defects. Check the sub paddle mechanism for damage The sub paddle mechanism is good.
Y N Y N
Repair defects or damage to the drive mechanism. Install new components as necessary, Repair defects, or install new components as necessary, PL 12.10.
PL 12.11.
Check the connections of P/J8705 and P/J8734. The connectors are good.
Enter dC330 code 012-150. Actuate the compiler exit sensor. The display changes. Y N
Y N Secure the connections.
Check the connections of P/J8709 and P/J8728. The connectors are good.
Y N Check for an open or short circuit between P/J8705 and P/J8734. The wiring is good.
Secure the connections. Y N
Repair the open or short circuit.
A B C D
Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault persists,
install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8709 pin 3 (+) and ground (-). The
WARNING voltage is approximately +5VDC.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Y N
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Check the +5VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Check the compiler exit sensor, PL 12.12 Item 16 is correctly installed and free from for- Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8709 pin 2 (+) and ground (-). Actuate
eign objects and that the actuator is not broken. the compiler exit sensor. The voltage changes.
Y N
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Install a new compiler exit sensor, PL 12.12 Item 16.
Procedure Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault per-
Check the specifications of paper, GP 15. Paper is in specification. sists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Y N
Load paper that is in specification. Enter dC330 code 012-095. The finisher transport motor runs.
Y N
Check the condition of the paper. The paper is in normal condition without any problem Check the connections of P/J8706 and P/J8739. The connectors are good.
that causes the paper to be bent or caught. Y N
Y N Secure the connections.
Resolve any problem that causes the paper to be bent or caught.
Check for an open or short circuit between P/J8706 and P/J8739. The wiring is good.
Check the transport path for a foreign object, deformed part, and paper dust. The transport Y N
path is good. Repair the open or short circuit.
Y N
Repair the deformed part(s) and remove the foreign object(s) and paper dust. Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8706 pin 5 (+) and ground (-), and P/
J8706 pin 7 (+) and ground (-). Each voltage is approximately +24VDC.
Check the exit roll, PL 12.11 Item 10 for wear, deterioration or paper dust. The exit roll is Y N
good. Check the +24VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data.
Y N
Remove the paper dust or install a new exit roll, PL 12.11 Item 10. Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault per-
sists, install a new components as necessary:
Check the drive mechanism to the transport roll for a deformed parts, broken parts, and/or belt • Finisher transport motor, PL 12.12 Item 17.
damage. The drive mechanism is good. • Finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Y N
Repair defects or damage to the drive mechanism. Install new components as necessary, Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault persists,
PL 12.11. install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Check that the finisher is installed correctly. The finisher is correctly installed and correctly
connected to the IOT.
Y N
Reinstall the finisher correctly.
Enter dC330 code 012-150. Actuate the compiler exit sensor. The display changes.
Procedure
Check the specification of the paper, GP 15. The paper is in specification.
Y N
Load paper that is in specification.
Check the condition of the paper. The paper is in normal condition without any problem
that causes the paper to be bent or caught.
Y N
Resolve any problem that causes the paper to be bent or caught.
Check the eject mechanism, PL 12.25 for deformed parts, broken parts, and/or belt damage.
The eject mechanism is good.
Y N
Repair the eject mechanism or install new components as necessary, PL 12.25.
Enter dC330 code 012-252. Use a piece of paper to actuate the eject home sensor. The dis-
play changes.
Y N
Check the connections of P/J8700 and P/J8725. The connectors are good.
Y N
Secure the connections.
Check for an open or short circuit between P/J8700 and P/J8725. The wiring is good.
Y N
Repair the open or short circuit.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8700 pin 9 (+) and ground (-). The
voltage is approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Check the +5VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8700 pin 2 (+) and ground (-). Use a
piece of paper to actuate the eject home sensor. The voltage changes.
A
Status Indicator RAPs December 2017
012-161, 012-161A 2-60 Xerox® VersaLink® C7000 Color Printer & C7030 Family Color Multifunction
A
Y N 012-189 Finisher Jam Entry RAP
Install a new eject home sensor, PL 12.26 Item 9.
012-189 The finisher entry sensor was detected on before the previous sheet had left the fin-
isher.
Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault per-
sists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 012-054 and 012-056 alternately. The eject motor runs. Go to the relevant procedure:
Y N • Integrated office finisher installed, 012-210A NVM Fail RAP.
Check the connections of P/J8706 and P/J8741. The connectors are good.
• Office finisher LX installed, 012-210B NVM Fail RAP.
Y N
Secure the connections.
Check for an open or short circuit between P/J8706 and P/J8741. The wiring is good.
Y N
Repair the open or short circuit.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8706 pin 13 (+) and ground (-), and
between P/J8706 pin 15 (+) and ground (-). The voltage is approximately +24VDC.
Y N
Check the +24VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data.
Check the eject motor drive mechanism for deformed parts, broken parts, and/or belt
damage The drive mechanism is good.
Y N
Repair defects or damage to the drive mechanism. Install new components as nec-
essary, PL 12.25.
Install a new eject motor, PL 12.25 Item 15. If the fault persists, install a new finisher
PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault persists,
install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
A B
Status Indicator RAPs December 2017
012-211A 2-64 Xerox® VersaLink® C7000 Color Printer & C7030 Family Color Multifunction
B
Y N 012-221, 012-223 Front Tamper Home Sensor Fail Entry
Secure the connections.
RAP
Check for an open or short circuit between P/J8711 and P/J8736. The wiring is good. 012-221 The front tamper home sensor failed to actuate within the specified time.
Y N
Repair the open or short circuit. 012-223 The front tamper home sensor failed to deactuate within the specified time.
Enter dC330 code 012-060. Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8711 pin Procedure
1 (+) and ground (-). The voltage changes.
Go to the relevant procedure:
Y N
Check the +24VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data. If the fault persists, • Integrated office finisher installed, 012-221A, 012-223A Front Tamper Home Sensor Fail.
RAP
install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
• Office finisher LX installed, 012-221B, 012-223B Front Tamper Home Sensor Fail RAP.
Enter dC330 code 012-061. Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8711 pin
2 (+) and ground (-). The voltage changes.
Y N
Check the +24VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data. If the fault persists,
install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open and short circuit. If the fault per-
sists, install a new stacker motor, PL 12.20 Item 9.
Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault persists,
install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Enter dC330 code 012-220. Manually move the front tamper to actuate the front tamper home
sensor. The display changes.
Y N
Check the connections of P/J8700 and P/J8724. The connectors are good.
Y N
Secure the connections.
Check for an open or short circuit between P/J8700 and P/J8724. The wiring is good.
Y N
Repair the open wire or short circuit.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8700 pin 6 (+) and ground (-). The
voltage is approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Check the +5VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8700 pin 5 (+) and ground (-). Manu-
ally move the front tamper to actuate the front tamper home sensor. The voltage
changes.
A
Status Indicator RAPs December 2017
012-221A, 012-223A 2-66 Xerox® VersaLink® C7000 Color Printer & C7030 Family Color Multifunction
012-224, 012-263 Rear Tamper Home Sensor Fail Entry 012-224A, 012-263A Rear Tamper Home Sensor Fail RAP
RAP BSD-ON: BSD 12.4 Integrated Office Finisher Tamping and Offset
012-224 The rear tamper home sensor failed to actuate within the specified time.
Initial Actions
012-263 The rear tamper home sensor failed to deactuate within the specified time.
NOTE: Ensure the correct RAP is performed, refer to the 012-224, 012-263 Rear Tamper
Home Sensor Fail Entry RAP.
Procedure
Go to the relevant procedure:
• Integrated office finisher installed, 012-224A, 012-263A Rear Tamper Home Sensor Fail WARNING
RAP.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
• Office finisher LX installed, 012-224B, 012-263B Rear Tamper Home Sensor Fail RAP. not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Check the rear tamper home sensor, PL 12.25 Item 9 is correctly installed and has no for-
eign object and that the actuator is not broken.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Procedure
Check the rear tamper for any foreign object, deformation and binding that prevents it from
moving. The rear tamper is good.
Y N
Repair the deformation and remove the foreign object(s) and the binding. Install new com-
ponents as necessary, PL 12.26.
Check the drive mechanism to the rear tamper for a deformed or broken part and not-seated
gears. The drive mechanism is good.
Y N
Repair the rear tamper drive mechanism. Install new components as necessary, PL
12.26.
Enter dC330 code 012-221. Manually move the rear tamper to actuate the front tamper home
sensor. The display of changes.
Y N
Check the connections of P/J8700 and P/J8726. The connectors are good.
Y N
Secure the connections.
Check for an open or short circuit between P/J8700 and P/J8726. The wiring is good.
Y N
Repair the open wire or short circuit.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8700 pin 12 (+) and ground (-). The
voltage is approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Check the +5VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8700 pin 11 (+) and ground (-). Manu-
ally move the rear tamper to actuate the front tamper home sensor. The voltage
changes.
012-280 The eject home sensor failed to deactuate within the specified time.
Enter dC330 code 012-026 and 012-029 alternately. The rear tamper motor runs.
Y N
Check the connections of P/J8710 and J8737. The connectors are good. Initial Actions
Y N
Secure the connections.
WARNING
Check for an open wire or short circuit between P/J8710 and J8737. The wiring is Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
good. not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Y N death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Repair the open or short circuit. • Check the eject home sensor, PL 12.26 Item 9 is correctly installed, not broken and has
no foreign object.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8710 pin 1 (+) and ground (-), and
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
between P/J8710 pin 3 (+) and ground (-). The voltage is approximately +24VDC.
Y N
Check the +24VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data. If the fault persists, Procedure
install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1. Check the eject mechanism, PL 12.25 for a deformed or broken part and not-seated belts.
The mechanism is good.
Install a new rear tamper motor, PL 12.26 Item 15. If the fault persists, install a new fin- Y N
isher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1. Repair the mechanism. Install new components as necessary, PL 12.25.
Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault persists, Enter dC330 code 012-252. Actuate the eject home sensor. The display changes.
install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1. Y N
Check the connections of P/J8700 and P/J8725. The connectors are good.
Y N
Secure the connections.
Check for an open wire or short circuit between P/J8700 and P/J8725. The wiring is
good.
Y N
Repair the open wire or short circuit.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8700 pin 9 (+) and ground (-). The
voltage is approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Check the +5VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8700 pin 2 (+) and ground (-). Actuate
the eject home sensor. The voltage changes
Y N
Install a new eject home sensor, PL 12.26 Item 9.
Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault per-
sists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Enter dC330 code 012-054 and 012-056 alternately. The eject motor runs.
Install a new eject motor, PL 12.25 Item 15. If the fault persists, install a new finisher
PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault persists,
install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
WARNING Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8708 pin 9 (+) and ground (-), and
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do between P/J8708 pin 11 (+) and ground (-). Each voltage is approximately +24VDC.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Y N
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Check the +24VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data. If the fault persists,
• Check the set clamp home sensor, PL 12.11 Item 7 is correctly installed and has no for- install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
eign object and that the actuator is not broken.
Install a new set clamp motor, PL 12.25 Item 15. If the fault persists, install a new finisher
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Procedure Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault persists,
Check the set clamp mechanism, PL 12.25 for a deformed or broken part and not-seated install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
belts. The mechanism is good.
Y N
Repair the set clamp mechanism. Install new components as necessary, PL 12.25.
Enter dC330 code 012-251. Manually rotate the set clamp shaft to actuate the set clamp home
sensor. The display changes.
Y N
Check the connections of P/J8707, J8742B, J8742A and P/J8723. The connectors
are good.
Y N
Secure the connections.
Check for an open or short circuit between P/J8707 and J8742B, and between J8742A
and P/J8723. The wiring is good.
Y N
Repair the open or short circuit.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8707 pin 9 (+) and ground (-). The
voltage is approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Check the +5VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8707 pin 8 (+) and ground (-). Manu-
ally rotate the set clamp shaft to actuate the set clamp home sensor. The voltage
changes.
Y N
Install a new set clamp home sensor, PL 12.11 Item 7.
Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault per-
sists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
A
Status Indicator RAPs December 2017
012-283A, 012-284A 2-70 Xerox® VersaLink® C7000 Color Printer & C7030 Family Color Multifunction
012-291 Stapler Fail Entry RAP 012-291A Stapler Fail RAP
012-291 Within a specified time after the staple motor started rotating in reverse direction, the BSD-ON: BSD 12.5 Integrated Office Finisher Staple Control
staple head home sensor was not detected turning on.
Initial Actions
Procedure
NOTE: Ensure the correct RAP is performed, refer to the 012-291 Stapler Fail Entry RAP.
Go to the relevant procedure:
• Integrated office finisher installed, 012-291A Stapler Fail RAP.
• Office finisher LX installed, 012-291B Stapler Fail RAP.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Check that the staple assembly and cartridge are correctly installed, not broken and
include no foreign objects.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-046 and 012-047 alternately. The staple motor runs.
Y N
Check the connections of P/J8705 and P/J8735. The connectors are good.
Y N
Connect P/J8705 and P/J8735 securely.
Check for an open or short circuit between P/J8705 and P/J8735. The wiring is good.
Y N
Repair the open wire or short circuit.
Enter dC330 012-046 and 012-047 alternately. Measure the voltages between finisher
PWB P/J8705 pins 3, 4, 5, 6 (+) and ground (-). Each voltage changes.
Y N
Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault
persists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Enter again dC330 code 012-046 and 012-047 alternately. The display changes.
Y N
Check the connections of P/J8701 and P/J8731. The connectors are good.
Y N
Secure the connections.
Check for an open or short circuit between P/J8701 and P/J8731. The wiring is good.
Y N
Repair the open or short circuit.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8701 pin 9 (+) and ground (-). The
voltage is approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Check the +5VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data.
A B
Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault per- Initial Actions
sists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault persists, WARNING
install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Check that the top cover can be opened and closed.
• Check the finisher top cover interlock sensor and the finisher top cover interlock +24V
switch, PL 12.10 are correctly installed and undamaged.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 012-300. Open, then close the top cover to actuate the finisher top cover
interlock sensor. The display changes.
Y N
Check the connections of P/J8701 and P/J8730. The connectors are good.
Y N
Secure the connections.
Check for an open or short circuit between P/J8701 and P/J8730. The wiring is good.
Y N
Repair the open or short circuit.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8701 pin 3 (+) and ground (-). The
voltage is approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Check the +5VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8701 pin 2 (+) and ground (-). Open,
then close the top cover to actuate the finisher top cover interlock sensor. The voltage
changes.
Y N
Install a new finisher top cover interlock sensor, PL 12.10 Item 20.
Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault per-
sists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8702 pin 1 (+) and ground (-). The volt-
age is approximately +24VDC.
Y N
Check the +24VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data. If the fault persists, install a
new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault persists,
install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Check that the front cover can be opened and closed.
• Check that the finisher front door interlock switch, PL 12.14 Item 12 is correctly installed
and undamaged.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 012-302. Open, then close the front cover to actuate the finisher front inter-
lock switch. The display changes.
Y N
Check the connections of P/J8702 and P/J8733. The connectors are good.
Y N
Secure the connections.
Check for an open or short circuit between P/J8702 and P/J8733. The wiring is good.
Y N
Repair the open or short circuit.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8702 pin 4 (+) and ground (-). Open,
then close the front cover to actuate the finisher front interlock switch. The voltage
changes.
Y N
Install a new finisher front door interlock switch, PL 12.14 Item 12.
Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault per-
sists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8702 pin 1 (+) and (-). The voltage is
approximately +24VDC.
Y N
Check the +24VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data.
Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault persists,
install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Procedure Procedure
Go to the relevant procedure:
NOTE: Ensure the correct RAP is performed, refer to the 012-334 Download Fail Entry RAP.
• Integrated office finisher installed, 012-334A Download Fail RAP.
• Office finisher LX installed, 012-334B Download Fail RAP.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check the wiring between the finisher and the IOT.
2. Reload the software, GP 4
3. If the fault persists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Check the power supply voltage at the customer site for a drop.
• Check the compiler exit sensor, PL 12.12 Item 16 is correctly installed and free from for-
eign objects and that the actuator is not binding.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 012-150. Actuate the compiler exit sensor. The display changes.
Y N
Check the connections of P/J8709 and P/J8728. The connectors are good.
Y N
Secure the connections.
Check for an open or short circuit between P/J8709 and P/J8728. The wiring is good.
Y N
Repair the open or short circuit.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8709 pin 3 (+) and ground (-). The
voltage is approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Check the +5VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data.
Measure the voltage between the finisher PWB P/J8709 pin 2 (+) and ground (-). Actuate
the compiler exit sensor. The voltage changes.
Y N
Install a new compiler exit sensor, PL 12.12 Item 16.
Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault per-
sists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault persists,
install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 012-140. Actuate the finisher entrance sensor. The display changes.
Y N
Check the connections of P/J8709 and P/J8729. The connectors are good.
Y N
Secure the connections.
Check for an open or short circuit between P/J8709 and P/J8729. The wiring is good.
Y N
Repair the open or short circuit.
Measure the voltage between P/J8709 pin 6 (+) on the finisher PWB and ground (-).
The voltage is approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Check the +5VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data.
Measure the voltage between P/J8709 pin 5 (+) on the finisher PWB and ground (-).
Actuate the Finisher Entrance Sensor. The voltage changes.
Y N
Install a new finisher entrance sensor, PL 12.12 Item 19.
Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault per-
sists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Check the wires and connectors for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the fault persists,
install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
012-112 After the fuser exit sensor was actuated, the horizontal transport entrance sensor did Measure the resistance of the horizontal transport motor between P/J8862 pins 1, 2, 5
not deatuate within the specified time. and 6. The resistance is approximately 20 Ohms.
Y N
012-126 After the horizontal transport entrance sensor was actuated, the horizontal transport Install a new horizontal transport motor, PL 13.08 Item 13.
entrance sensor did not deactuate within the specified time.
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2. If the fault persists, install a new horizontal
012-131 After the fuser exit sensor was actuated, the horizontal transport entrance sensor did transport motor, PL 13.08 Item 13.
not deatuate within the specified time.
Check the horizontal transport entrance sensor and horizontal transport Motor circuits for an
Procedure intermittent condition. If the fault persists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Check the horizontal transport drive rolls, PL 13.08 and nip rolls, PL 13.07 for wear or contam-
ination. Check for obstructions or damage in the paper path. The paper path is good.
Y N
Clean or install new components as necessary.
Enter dC330 code 012-190. Actuate the horizontal transport entrance sensor, PL 13.08 Item
6. The display changes.
Y N
Check the wiring between J8861 pin 2 and P8987 pin 6 for an open or short circuit, or a
loose or damaged connector. The wiring is good.
Y N
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Measure the voltage between P8987 pins 4 and 5 on the finisher PWB. The voltage is
approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Measure the voltage between P8987 pin 6 on the finisher PWB and ground. Actuate the
horizontal transport entrance sensor. The voltage changes.
Y N
Install a new horizontal transport entrance sensor, PL 13.08 Item 6.
Switch off the machine, GP 10. Open the horizontal transport top cover. Cheat the horizontal
transport interlock sensor. Switch on the machine, GP 10. The horizontal transport belt is
driven.
BSD-ON: BSD 13.7 Office Finisher LX Transportation • The entrance roller, paddle shaft and eject belt, PL 13.29 for wear, damage or contamina-
tion.
Procedure • The finisher entrance sensor and transport motor circuits for an intermittent condition.
If the fault persists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
NOTE: Ensure the correct RAP is performed, refer to the 012-132 Entrance Sensor On Jam
Entry RAP.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Enter dC330 code 012-100. Actuate the finisher transport entrance sensor, PL 13.35 Item 10.
The display changes.
Y N
Check the wiring between J8868 pin 2 and P/J8988 pin 2 for an open or short circuit, or
a loose or damaged connector. The wiring is good.
Y N
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pins 1 and 3 on the finisher PWB. The voltage is
approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pin 2 on the finisher PWB and ground. Actuate
the finisher entrance sensor. The voltage changes.
Y N
Install a new finisher transport entrance sensor, PL 13.35 Item 10.
Measure the resistance of the transport motor between P/J8879 pins 1, 2, 5 and 6. The
resistance is approximately 20 Ohms.
Y N
Install a new transport motor, PL 13.08 Item 13.
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2. If the fault persists, install a new transport
motor, PL 13.08 Item 13.
A
Status Indicator RAPs December 2017
012-132B 2-78 Xerox® VersaLink® C7000 Color Printer & C7030 Family Color Multifunction
A B
012-151B, 012-152B Compiler Exit Sensor Jam RAP Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2. If the fault persists, install a new transport
motor, PL 13.08 Item 13.
BSD-ON: BSD 13.7 Office Finisher LX Transportation
Check the components that follow:
Initial Actions • The exit roller, paddle shaft and eject belt for wear, damage or contamination, PL 13.29.
NOTE: Ensure the correct RAP is performed, refer to the 012-151 Compiler Exit Sensor Off • The compiler exit sensor and transport motor circuits for an intermittent condition.
Jam Entry RAP or the 012-152 Compiler Exit Sensor On Jam Entry RAP. If the fault persists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• (012-152 Only) Ensure that the chute assembly, PL 13.35 Item 16 is installed correctly.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 012-150. Actuate the compiler exit sensor, PL 13.35 Item 10. The display
changes.
Y N
Check the wiring between J8869 pin 2 and P/J8988 pin 5 for an open or short circuit, or
a loose or damaged connector. The wiring is good.
Y N
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pins 4 and 6 on the finisher PWB. The voltage is
approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pin 5 on the finisher PWB and ground. Actuate
the compiler exit sensor. The voltage changes.
Y N
Install a new compiler exit sensor, PL 13.35 Item 10.
Measure the resistance of the transport motor between P/J8879 pin 1, 2, 5 and 6. The
resistance is approximately 20 Ohms.
Y N
Install a new transport motor, PL 13.08 Item 13.
A B
BSD-ON:BSD 13.10 Office Finisher LX Tamping and Offset (2 of 2) • The exit roller, entrance roller, paddle shaft and eject belt for wear, damage or contamina-
tion, PL 13.29.
BSD-ON: BSD 13.13 Office Finisher LX Eject Control (1 of 2) • The compiler tray no paper sensor and eject motor circuits for an intermittent condition.
If the fault persists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Procedure
NOTE: Ensure the correct RAP is performed, refer to the 012-161 Set Eject Jam Entry RAP.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Enter dC330 012-151. Actuate the compiler tray no paper sensor, PL 13.28 Item 9. The dis-
play changes.
Y N
Check the wiring between J8880 pin 2 and P/J8994 pin 2 on the finisher PWB for an
open or short circuit, or a loose or damaged connector. The wiring is good.
Y N
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Measure the voltage between P/J8994 pins 1 and 3 on the finisher PWB. The voltage is
approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Measure the voltage between P/J8994 pin 2 on the finisher PWB and ground. Actuate the
compiler tray no paper sensor. The voltage changes.
Y N
Install a new compiler tray no paper sensor, PL 13.28 Item 9.
Measure the resistance of the eject motor between P/J8878 pins 1, 3, 4 and 6. The
resistance is approximately 20 Ohms.
Y N
Install a new eject motor, PL 13.27 Item 4.
Install a new eject motor, PL 13.27 Item 4. If the fault persists, install a new finisher PWB,
PL 13.45 Item 2.
A
Status Indicator RAPs December 2017
012-161B 2-80 Xerox® VersaLink® C7000 Color Printer & C7030 Family Color Multifunction
012-189B Finisher Jam RAP 012-210B NVM Fail RAP
Procedure BSD-ON: BSD 3.6 PWB Communications (ESS PWB/Drive PWB to Finisher)
Clear the paper jam and repeat the job.
Procedure
NOTE: Ensure the correct RAP is performed, refer to the 012-210 NVM Fail Entry RAP.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check the wiring between the finisher and the IOT.
2. If the fault persists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Enter dC330 code 012-060 and 012-061 alternatively. The stacker motor runs.
WARNING Y N
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Measure the voltage between P/J8986 pin 12 and ground. The voltage is approxi-
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause mately +24 VDC.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Y N
• Check for obstructions under the tray. Check the +24VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data.
• Check the operation of the stack height sensor 1, PL 13.27 Item 16 actuator.
Check the wiring between P/J8986 pins 11 and 12 and the stacker motor for an open or
• Check the tray raise/lower mechanism for damage or contamination. short circuit, or a loose or damaged connector. The wiring is good.
Y N
Procedure Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Enter dC330 code 012-264. Actuate the stack height sensor 1, PL 13.27 Item 16. The dis-
play changes. Install a new stacker motor, PL 13.15 Item 29. If the fault persists, install a new finisher
Y N PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Check the wiring between J8873 pin 2 and P/J8988 pin 17 for an open or short circuit, or
a loose or damaged connector. The wiring is good. Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Y N
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pins 16 and 18 on the finisher PWB. The voltage
is approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pin 17 on the finisher PWB and ground. Actuate
the stacker height sensor 1. The voltage changes.
Y N
Install a new stack height sensor 1, PL 13.27 Item 16.
Enter dC330 code 012-263. Manually rotate the encoder, PL 13.15 Item 19 to actuate the
stacker encoder sensor. The display changes.
Y N
Check the wiring between J8875 pin 2 and P/J8988 pin 23 for an open or short circuit, or
a loose or damaged connector. The wiring is good.
Y N
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pins 22 and 24 on the finisher PWB. The voltage
is approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
A B
Status Indicator RAPs December 2017
012-211B 2-82 Xerox® VersaLink® C7000 Color Printer & C7030 Family Color Multifunction
A B
012-212 Stacker Tray Upper Limit Failure RAP Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pin 20 on the finisher PWB and ground. Actuate
the stack height sensor 2. The voltage changes.
BSD-ON: BSD 13.15 Office Finisher LX Stacker Tray Control
Y N
Install a new stack height sensor 2, PL 13.27 Item 16.
012-212 The stacker has continued to elevate after the defined period of time has passed
since stacker no paper sensor is on during stacker elevation.
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Initial Actions Enter dC330 code 012-263. Manually rotate the encoder, PL 13.15 Item 19 to actuate the
stacker encoder sensor. The display changes.
Y N
WARNING Check the wiring between J8875 pin 2 and P/J8988 pin 23 for an open or short circuit, or
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do a loose or damaged connector. The wiring is good.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Y N
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Reconnect or repair as necessary.
• Check for obstructions under the tray.
Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pins 22 and 24 on the finisher PWB. The voltage
• Check the operation of the stack height sensor, PL 13.27 actuators.
is approximately +5VDC.
• Check the tray raise/lower mechanism for damage or contamination. Y N
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 012-264. Actuate stack height sensor 1. The display changes. Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pin 23 on the finisher PWB and ground. Manually
Y N rotate the encoder, PL 13.15 Item 19 to actuate the stacker encoder sensor. The voltage
Check the wiring between J8873 pin 2 and P/J8988 pin 17 for an open or short circuit, or changes.
a loose or damaged connector. The wiring is good. Y N
Y N Install a new stacker encoder sensor, PL 13.15 Item 32.
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pins 16 and 18 on the finisher PWB. The voltage
is approximately +5VDC. Enter dC330 code 012-262. Actuate the stacker paper sensor, PL 13.15 Item 32. The dis-
Y N play changes.
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2. Y N
Check the wiring between J8872 pin 2 and P/J8988 pin 14 for an open or short circuit, or
Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pin 17 on the finisher PWB and ground. Actuate a loose or damaged connector. The wiring is good.
the stack height sensor 1. The voltage changes. Y N
Y N Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Install a new stack height sensor 1, PL 13.27 Item 16.
Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pins 13 and 15 on the finisher PWB. The voltage
Install a new finisher PWB,PL 13.45 Item 2. is approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Enter dC330 code 012-265. Actuate the stack height sensor 2. The display changes. Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Y N
Check the wiring between J8874 pin 2 and P/J8988 pin 20 for an open or short circuit, or Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pin 14 on the finisher PWB and ground. Actuate
a loose or damaged connector. The wiring is good. the stacker paper sensor The voltage changes.
Y N Y N
Reconnect or repair as necessary. Install a new stacker paper sensor, PL 13.15 Item 32.
Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pins 19 and 21 on the finisher PWB. The voltage Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
is approximately +5VDC.
Y N Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
A B
Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pins 19 and 21 on the finisher PWB. The voltage Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
is approximately +5VDC.
Y N Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pin 20 on the finisher PWB and ground. Actuate
the stack height sensor 2. The voltage changes.
Y N
Install a new stack height sensor 2, PL 13.27 Item 16.
A
Status Indicator RAPs December 2017
012-213 2-84 Xerox® VersaLink® C7000 Color Printer & C7030 Family Color Multifunction
A B
012-221B, 012-223B Front Tamper Home Sensor Fail RAP Y N
Check the +24VDC circuit. Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Data. If the fault persists,
BSD-ON: BSD 13.3 Office Finisher LX Interlock Switching
install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
BSD-ON: BSD 13.9 Office Finisher LX Tamping and Offset (1 of 2) Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Install a new front tamper motor, PL 13.28 Item 6. If the fault persists, install a new fin-
isher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Manually operate the tamper mechanism. The tamper mechanism moves smoothly.
Y N
Install a new components as necessary, PL 13.28.
Enter dC330 code 012-220 front tamper home sensor. Manually operate the tamper mecha-
nism to actuate the front tamper home sensor. The display changes.
Y N
Check the wiring between J8881 pin 2 and J8984 pin 5 for an open or short circuit, or a
loose or damaged connector. The wiring is good.
Y N
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Measure the voltage between J8984 pins 6 and 4 on the finisher PWB. The voltage is
approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Measure the voltage between J8984 pin 5 on the finisher PWB and ground. Manually
operate the tamper mechanism to actuate the front tamper home sensor. The voltage
changes.
Y N
Install a new front tamper home sensor, PL 13.28 Item 8.
Enter dC330 012-020 and 012-023 alternately. The front tamper motor runs.
Y N
Measure the voltage between J8984 pin 19 on the finisher PWB and ground. The volt-
age is approximately +24VDC.
Y N
Measure the voltage between J8982 pin 4 on the finisher PWB and ground. The
voltage is approximately +24VDC.
A B
BSD-ON: BSD 13.9 Office Finisher LX Tamping and Offset (1 of 2) Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Install a new rear tamper motor, PL 13.28 Item 6. If the fault persists, install a new finisher
PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Manually operate the tamper mechanism. The tamper mechanism moves smoothly.
Y N
Install a new components as necessary, PL 13.28.
Enter dC330 code 012-221. Manually operate the tamper mechanism to actuate the rear tam-
per home sensor. The display changes.
Y N
Check the wiring between J8882 pin 2 and J8984 pin 8 for an open or short circuit, or a
loose or damaged connector. The wiring is good.
Y N
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Measure the voltage between J8984 pins 9 and 7 on the finisher PWB. The voltage is
approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Measure the voltage between J8984 pin 8 on the finisher PWB and ground. Manually
operate the tamper mechanism to actuate the rear tamper home sensor. The voltage
changes.
Y N
Install a new rear tamper home sensor, PL 13.28 Item 8.
Enter dC330 012-026 and 012-029. The rear tamper motor runs.
Y N
Measure the voltage between J8984 pin 14 on the finisher PWB and ground. The volt-
age is approximately +24VDC.
Y N
Measure the voltage between J8984 pin 4 on the finisher PWB and ground. The
voltage is approximately +24VDC.
A B
Status Indicator RAPs December 2017
012-224B, 012-263B 2-86 Xerox® VersaLink® C7000 Color Printer & C7030 Family Color Multifunction
012-231 Punch Home Sensor Fail RAP 012-243, 012-265 Booklet Folder Home Sensor Fail RAP
BSD-ON: BSD 13.6 Office Finisher LX Punch BSD-ON: BSD 13.8 Office Finisher LX Folding
012-243 Folder home sensor is not actuated after the lapse of 500ms from motor on while
012-231 The punch home sensor did not turn on within the specified time after the punch motor
folder knife is returning to home.
started running.
012-265 When the booklet home moves from home position, the folder home sensor did not
Initial Actions turn off within the specified time.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do WARNING
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
• Check the punch home actuator for deformation. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Check the punch home sensor, PL 13.09 Item 5 for proper installation. • Check the folder home sensor, PL 13.40 Item 16 for improper installation.
• Check the knife drive mechanism, PL 13.40 for a foreign substance.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 12-074 and 12-078 alternately to run the punch motor. The punch motor
Procedure
runs. Enter dC330 code 013-022 and 013-023 alternately to run the folder knife motor. The fold
Y N knife motor runs.
Check the wiring to the punch motor. Install new components as necessary: Y N
Check the wiring between P/J8905 and P/J8990 on the finisher PWB and between P/
• Punch motor, PL 13.09 Item 1.
J8994 on the booklet PWB and J8985 on the finisher PWB for an open or short circuit, or
• Finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
a loose or damaged connector. The wiring is good.
Y N
Enter dC330 code 12-271. Use a piece of paper to actuate the punch home sensor. The dis-
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
play changes.
Y N Install a new booklet folder knife motor, PL 13.40 Item 15. If the fault persists, install a
Check the wiring to the punch motor. Install new components as necessary:
new booklet PWB, PL 13.70 Item 4.
• Punch home sensor, PL 13.09 Item 5.
• Finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2. Enter dC330 code 013-101. Actuate the folder home sensor. The display changes.
Y N
If the fault persists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2. Check the wiring between J8904 pin 2 and P/J8990 pin 2 on the finisher PWB for an
open or short circuit, or a loose or damaged connector. The wiring is good.
Y N
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Measure the voltage between P/J8990 pins 3 and 1 on the finisher PWB. The voltage is
approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Measure the voltage between P/J8990 pin 2 on the finisher PWB and ground. Actuate
the folder home sensor. The voltage changes.
Y N
Install a new folder home sensor, PL 13.40 Item 16.
BSD-ON: BSD 13.17 Office Finisher LX Booklet Staple Control (1 of 2 - Front) 012-260 After the eject clamp started ascending, the eject clamp home sensor did not turn on
within 500ms.
012-249 The booklet front staple home switch is not on (does not return to home position)
within the specified time after the booklet front staple motor starts to reverse. 012-282 After the eject clamp started descending, the eject clamp home sensor did not turn off
within 200ms.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do WARNING
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Check the booklet front stapler for jammed staples or an incorrectly installed staple cartridge. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Manually operate the eject mechanism. Check for binding, a dirty sensor, or damage.
Procedure • Check the actuator for the eject clamp home sensor, PL 13.27 Item 16 for damage
Enter dC330 code 12-024 then 12-025 to cycle the front booklet stapler. The front booklet
stapler cycles normally. Procedure
Y N Enter dC330 code 012-250. Actuate the eject clamp home sensor. The display changes.
Measure the voltage between P/J8993 pin 5 on the booklet PWB and ground. The volt- Y N
age is approximately +24VDC. Check the wiring between J8870 pin 2 on the eject clamp home sensor and P/J8988 pin
Y N 8 on the finisher PWB for an open or short circuit, or loose or damaged connectors. The
Check the circuit from the booklet PWB to the booklet stapler cover switch. Repair wiring is good.
the wiring or install new components as necessary, PL 13.70. Y N
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Switch off the machine, GP 10. Check the wiring between P/J8995 on the booklet PWB
and J8894 on the front booklet stapler for a loose or damaged connector, or an open or Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pins 9 and 7 on the finisher PWB. The voltage is
short circuit. If the wiring is good, install a new front booklet stapler assembly, PL 13.60 approximately +5VDC.
Item 13. If the problem persists, install a new booklet PWB, PL 13.70 Item 4. Y N
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Switch off the machine, GP 10. Check the wiring between P/J8995 pin 5 on the booklet PWB
and P/J8994 pin 3 on the front booklet stapler for a loose or damaged connector, or an open Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pin 8 on the finisher PWB and ground. Actuate
or short circuit. If the wiring is good, install a new front booklet stapler assembly, PL 13.60 Item the eject clamp home sensor. The voltage changes.
13. If the problem persists, install a new booklet PWB, PL 13.70 Item 4. Y N
Install a new eject clamp home sensor, PL 13.27 Item 16.
Enter dC330 code 012-052 and 012-053 alternately. The eject motor runs.
Y N
Check the wiring between P/J8878 pins 1 to 6 on the eject motor and P/J8983 pins 5 to
8 on the finisher PWB for an open or short circuit, or loose or damaged connectors. The
wiring is good.
Y N
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
A B
Status Indicator RAPs December 2017
012-249, 012-260, 012-282 2-88 Xerox® VersaLink® C7000 Color Printer & C7030 Family Color Multifunction
A B
Measure the resistance of the eject motor between each pin of P/J8878 pins 1, 3, 4 and 012-268 Booklet Rear Stapler Fail RAP
6. The resistance is approximately 2 Ohm.
BSD-ON: BSD 13.4 Office Finisher LX Booklet Interlock Switching
Y N
Install a new eject motor, PL 13.27 Item 4.
BSD-ON: BSD 13.18 Office Finisher LX Booklet Staple Control (2 of 2 - Rear)
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2. If the problem persists, install a new eject
012-268 The booklet rear staple home switch is not on (does not return to home position)
motor, PL PL 13.27 Item 4.
within the specified time after the booklet rear staple motor starts to reverse.
Check for an intermittent circuit or intermittent mechanical problem. If the check is good, install
a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2. Initial Actions
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Check the booklet rear stapler for jammed staples or an incorrectly installed staple cartridge.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 12-026 then 12-027 to cycle the front booklet stapler. The rear booklet
stapler cycles normally
Y N
Measure the voltage between P/J8993 pin 5 on the booklet PWB and ground. The volt-
age is approximately +24VDC.
Y N
Check the circuit from the booklet PWB to the booklet stapler cover switch. Repair
the wiring or install new components as necessary, PL 13.70.
Switch off the machine, GP 10. Check the wiring between P/J8995 on the booklet PWB
and J8895 on the rear booklet stapler for a loose or damaged connector, or an open or
short circuit. If the wiring is good, install a new rear booklet stapler assembly, PL 13.65
Item 13. If the problem persists, install a new booklet PWB, PL 13.70 Item 4.
Switch off the machine, GP 10. Check the wiring between P/J8995 pin 12 on the booklet PWB
and J8895 pin 3 on the rear booklet stapler for a loose or damaged connector, or an open or
short circuit. If the wiring is good, install a new rear booklet stapler assembly, PL 13.65 Item
13. If the problem persists, install a new booklet PWB, PL 13.70 Item 4.
Initial Actions
WARNING
NOTE: Ensure the correct RAP is performed, refer to the 012-283, 012-284 Set Clamp Home
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Sensor Fail Entry RAP.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Check the connectors at the finisher PWB and the booklet PWB are connected or seated
correctly
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
• Check the wiring between the finisher PWB and the booklet PWB for damage.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Procedure • Manually operate the eject mechanism. Check for binding, a dirty sensor, or damage.
Switch off, then on switch on the machine, GP 10. Enter dC330 code 013-161 to detect the • Check the actuator for the set clamp home sensor, PL 13.27 Item 16 for damage
booklet maker. The fault is resolved.
Y N
Reload the software, GP 4. The fault is resolved. Procedure
Y N Enter dC330 code 012-251. Actuate the set clamp home sensor. The display changes.
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2. If the fault persists, install a new booklet Y N
PWB, PL 13.70 Item 4. Check the wiring between J8871 pin 2 on the set clamp home sensor and P/J8988 pin
11 on the finisher PWB for an open or short circuit, or loose or damaged connectors. The
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. wiring is good.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pins 12 and 10 on the finisher PWB. The voltage
is approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Measure the voltage between the P/J8988 pin 11 on the finisher PWB and ground. Actu-
ate the eject clamp home sensor. The voltage changes.
Y N
Install a new eject clamp home sensor, PL 13.27 Item 16.
Enter dC330 code 012-052 then 012-053 alternately. The eject motor, PL 13.27 Item 4 runs.
Y N
Check the wiring between P/J8878 pins 1 to 6 on the eject motor and P/J8983 pins 5 to
8 on the finisher PWB for an open or short circuit, or loose or damaged connectors. The
wiring is good.
Y N
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the eject motor between each pin of P/J8878-1, 3, 4 and 6.
The resistance is approximately 2 Ohm.
A
Status Indicator RAPs December 2017
012-269, 012-283B, 012-284B 2-90 Xerox® VersaLink® C7000 Color Printer & C7030 Family Color Multifunction
A
Y N 012-291B Stapler Fail RAP
Install a new eject motor, PL 13.27 Item 4.
BSD-ON: BSD 13.12 Office Finisher LX Staple Control
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2. If the problem persists, install a new eject
motor, PL 13.27 Item 4. Initial Actions
NOTE: Ensure the correct RAP is performed, refer to the 012-291 Stapler Fail Entry RAP.
Enter dC330 code 012-050. The set clamp clutch energizes.
Y N
Check the wiring between P/J8877 pins 1 and 2 on the set clamp clutch and P/J8983
pins 3 and 4 on the finisher PWB for an open or short circuit, or loose or damaged con- WARNING
nectors. The wiring is good. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Y N not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Reconnect or repair as necessary. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Check the stapler for jammed staples or an incorrectly installed staple cartridge.
Measure the voltage between the Finisher PWB P/J8983 pin 4 (+) and ground (-). The
voltage is approximately +24VDC.
Y N Procedure
Install a new set clamp clutch, PL 13.27 Item 12. If the fault persists, install a new fin- Enter dC330 code 012-046 then 012-047. The stapler cycles.
isher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2. Y N
Check the wiring between J8887 pins 1 to 4 on the stapler assembly and P/J8981 pins 9
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2. to 12 on the finisher PWB for an open or short circuit, or loose or damaged connectors. If
the wires are good, install a new stapler assembly, PL 13.20 Item 4. If the fault persists,
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2. install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Enter dC330 code 012-244 to check the staple home sensor. The value is L.
Y N
Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pins 1 to 5 on the stapler assembly. The voltage
is approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Check the wirings from P/J8981 pins 4 and 8 to J8886 pins 5 and 1 for an open cir-
cuit. If the wires are good, install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Check the wiring from J8886 pin 4 to P/J8981 pin 5 for an open circuit. If the wiring is
good, install a new stapler assembly, PL 13.20 Item 4.
Check for an intermittent connection. If the check is good, install a new stapler assembly, PL
13.20 Item 4. If the fault persists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Check the stapler, base frame and rail, PL 13.20 for freedom of movement.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 012-241. Manually move the stapler from the home position to the staple
position and back to actuate the stapler move position sensor, PL 13.20 Item 8. The display
changes.
Y N
Check the wiring between J8885 pin 2 on the stapler move position sensor and P/J8981
pin 2 on the finisher PWB for an open or short circuit, or loose or damaged connectors.
The wiring is good.
Y N
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Measure the voltage between P/J8981 pins 3 and 1 on the finisher PWB. The voltage is
approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Measure the voltage between P/J8981 pin 2 on the finisher PWB and ground. Manually
move the stapler from the home position to the staple position and back. The voltage
changes.
Y N
Install a new stapler move position sensor, PL 13.20 Item 8.
A
Status Indicator RAPs December 2017
012-295, 012-296 2-92 Xerox® VersaLink® C7000 Color Printer & C7030 Family Color Multifunction
012-300 Eject Cover Open RAP 012-302B Front Cover Interlock Open RAP
BSD-ON: BSD 13.3 Office Finisher LX Interlock Switching BSD-ON: BSD 13.3 Office Finisher LX Interlock Switching
Initial Actions NOTE: Ensure the correct RAP is performed, refer to the 012-302 Front Cover Interlock Open
Entry RAP.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do WARNING
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
• Ensure that the eject cover, PL 13.25 Item 1 is closed. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Check the eject cover switch, PL 13.27 Item 19 for improper installation. • Check the installation of the front door interlock switch, PL 13.45 Item 19.
• Check eject cover switch connectors for connection failure. • Check that the front cover can be opened and closed.
• Check the switch actuator for damage.
Procedure
Procedure Enter dC330 code 012-302. Open then close the finisher front cover to actuate the front door
Enter dC330 code 012-300. Actuate the eject cover switch. The display changes interlock switch. The display changes.
Y N
Y N
Cheat the front door interlock switch. The display changes.
Check the wiring between J8889 pin 1 and 2 for an open or short circuit, or loose or dam-
aged connectors. The wiring is good. Y N
Check the wiring between J8982 pin 3 and J8891 pin 2B, and from J8891 pin 2A to
Y N
J8982 pin 2 for an open or short circuit, or a loose or damaged connector. The wir-
Install a new eject cover switch, PL 13.27 Item 19.
ing is good.
Y N
Check the wiring between J8889 on the eject cover switch and J8982 on the finisher for
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
an open or short circuit, or loose or damaged connectors. If the check is good, install a
new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2. The wiring is good.
Remove the cheater. Measure the voltage between J8891 pin 2A on the front door
Y N
interlock switch and ground. The voltage is approximately +5VDC.
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Y N
Check the wiring from J8891 pin 2A to J8982 pin 3 for an open or short circuit,
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
or a loose or damaged connector. If the wires are good, install a new finisher
PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Check the interlock circuit for an intermittent condition. If the fault persists, install a new finisher
PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Initial Actions NOTE: Ensure the correct RAP is performed, refer to the 012-334 Download Fail Entry RAP.
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Check the installation of the horizontal transport open sensor, PL 13.08 Item 3. Perform the steps that follow:
• Check that the finisher horizontal transport cover can be opened and closed 1. Check the wiring between the finisher and the IOT.
2. Reload the software, GP 4
Procedure 3. If the fault persists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Enter dC330 code 012-303. Actuate the horizontal transport open sensor. The display
changes.
Y N
Check the wiring between J8860 pin 2 and J8897 pin 2 for an open or short circuit, or a
loose or damaged connector. The wiring is good.
Y N
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Measure the voltage between J8897 pins 3 and 1 on the finisher PWB. The voltage is
approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Measure the voltage between J8897 pin 2 on the finisher PWB and ground. Actuate the
horizontal transport open sensor. The voltage changes.
Y N
Install a new horizontal transport open sensor, PL 13.08 Item 3.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Check the paper path for jammed pieces paper.
• Clean the compiler exit sensor, PL 13.35 Item 10.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 012-150. Actuate the compiler exit sensor. The display changes.
Y N
Check the wiring between J8869 pin 2 and P/J8988 pin 5 for an open or short circuit, or
a loose or damaged connector. The wiring is good.
Y N
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pins 6 and 4 on the finisher PWB. The voltage is
approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pin 5 on the finisher PWB and ground. Actuate
the compiler exit sensor. The voltage changes.
Y N
Install a new compiler exit sensor, PL 13.35 Item 10.
012-905 Paper remains on the compiler tray no paper sensor. Initial Actions
Initial Actions NOTE: Ensure the correct RAP is performed, refer to the 012-935 Entrance Sensor Entry RAP.
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Check the paper path for jammed pieces paper. • Check for obstructions in the paper path
• Clean the compiler tray no paper sensor, PL 13.28 Item 9. • Check that the finisher is docked correctly to ensure proper transport gate operation.
Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 code 012-151. Actuate the compiler tray no paper sensor. The display Enter dC330 code 012-100. Actuate the transport entrance sensor, PL 13.35 Item 10. The
changes. display changes.
Y N Y N
Check the wiring between J8880 pin 2 and P/J8994 pin 2 on the finisher PWB for an Check the wiring between J8868 pin 2 and P/J8988 pin 2 for an open or short circuit, or
open or short circuit, or a loose or damaged connector. The wiring is good. a loose or damaged connector. The wiring is good.
Y N Y N
Reconnect or repair as necessary. Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Measure the voltage between P/J8994 pins 3 and 1 on the finisher PWB. The voltage is Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pins 3 and 1 on the finisher PWB. The voltage is
approximately +5VDC. approximately +5VDC.
Y N Y N
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2. Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Measure the voltage between P/J8994 pin 2 on the finisher PWB and ground. Actuate Measure the voltage between P/J8988 pin 2 on the finisher PWB and ground. Actuate the
the compiler tray no paper sensor. The voltage changes. finisher entrance sensor. The voltage changes.
Y N Y N
Install a new compiler tray no paper sensor, PL 13.28 Item 9. Install a new transport entrance sensor, PL 13.35 Item 10
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2. Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
If the fault persists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2. Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Ensure the staple head is free from obstructions.
• Check dC122 Fault History for 013-306 or 013-307 faults. If either fault is listed, first per-
form the relevant procedure:
– 013-306 Booklet Safety Switches Open RAP.
– 013-307 Booklet Left Cover Open RAP.
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 013-143. Move the booklet staplers to actuate the booklet staple move
home sensor, PL 13.55 Item 13. The display changes.
Y N
Check the wiring between J8897 pin 2 and P/J8991 pin 2 for an open or short circuit, or
a loose or damaged connector. The wiring is good.
Y N
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Measure the voltage between P/J8991 pins 3 and 1 on the booklet PWB. The voltage is
approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Install a new booklet PWB, PL 13.70 Item 4.
Measure the voltage between P/J8991 pin 2 on the booklet PWB and ground. Move the
booklet staplers to actuate the booklet staple move home sensor. The voltage changes.
Y N
Install a new booklet staple move home sensor, PL 13.55 Item 13.
Enter dC330 code 013-028 and 013-029 alternately. The stapler move motor runs.
Y N
Check the wiring between P/J8992 pins 1 to 6 on the booklet PWB and P/J8906 on the
booklet stapler move motor for an open or short circuit, or loose or damaged connectors.
The wiring is good.
Y N
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
A B
Procedure
Enter dC330 code 013-144. Move the booklet stapler to actuate the booklet staple move posi-
tion sensor, PL 13.55 Item 13. The display changes.
Y N
Check the wiring between J8898 pin 2 and P/J8991 pin 5 and between J8904 pin 5 and
J8985 pin 5 for an open or short circuit, or a loose or damaged connector. The wiring is
good.
Y N
Reconnect or repair as necessary.
Measure the voltage between P/J8991 pins 4 and 6 on the booklet PWB. The voltage is
approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Install a new booklet PWB, PL 13.70 Item 4.
Measure the voltage between P/J8991 pin 5 on the booklet PWB and ground. Actuate
the booklet staple move position sensor. The voltage changes.
Y N
Install a new booklet staple move position sensor, PL 13.55 Item 13.
Measure the voltage between J8895 pin 5 on the finisher PWB and ground. Actuate the
booklet staple move position sensor. The voltage changes.
Y N
Install a new booklet PWB, PL 13.70 Item 4. If the fault persists, install a new finisher
PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
013-220 Control logic cannot detect the folder assembly. 013-306 Control logic senses that one or more booklet safety switch is open.
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Enter dC330 code 013-160 to detect the folder. The displayed state is Low. Check dC122 Fault History for a 013-307 fault. If the fault is listed, perform the 013-307 Book-
Y N let Left Cover Open RAP.
Measure the voltage at P/J8990 pin 4. Less than +1VDC is measured.
Y N Procedure
Check the wiring between P/J8990 pins 4 and 5. Also ensure that P8903 is
Measure the voltage between P/J8993 pin 3 on the booklet PWB and ground. +24VDC is
securely fastened.
measured.
Y N
Install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Measure the voltage between P/J8993 pin 6 on the booklet PWB and ground. +24VDC
Check the wiring for an intermittent fault. is measured.
Y N
Perform the 013-307 Booklet Left Cover Open RAP.
Check the circuit through the booklet safety switches, PL 13.70 Item 2.
013-307 Control logic senses that the booklet left cover is open.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Ensure the left cover, PL 13.50 Item 8 is closed.
Procedure
Measure the voltage between P/J8993 pin 5 on the booklet PWB and ground. +24VDC is
measured.
Y N
Check the circuit from P/J8993 to and from J8899 on the booklet stapler cover switch,
PL 13.70 Item 10.
016-210 One of the SW option functions cannot be executed due to a HDD error or HDD not 016-212 Insufficient Page Memory was detected.
installed.
Procedure
016-506 The log image storage area on the disk is full, a job cannot be continued. Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
016-777 An error other than disk full was detected when opening/reading/writing file for com-
pression conversion/image processing operation. 2. Refer the customer to the User Guide to check memory usage.
016-780 An error other than HDD full was detected when opening/writing file for operation.
016-798 A HDD unavailable error was returned when the decomposer called the S-image
library.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 and the hard disk. Ensure that
all surface mounted modules on the ESS PWB are securely connected.
3. Initialise the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics.
4. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
5. Install a new hard disk, PL 3.10 Item 2.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
WARNING
2. Reload the software, GP 4.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure all fax PWBs are correctly installed, PL 20.05.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Advise the customer that the postscript kit is required. 2. Set the printer kit SW key to ‘Enabled’.
016-224 The S2X PWB has failed to access to the internal PCI space.
016-225 The S2X PWB failed the ROM check sum test.
016-226 The S2X PWB failed to detect the video clocks sent from the IIT.
016-227 The S2X PWB failed the write/read test of the internal DDR memory.
016-228 The S2X PWB failed the desired value comparison of the high-compression process
results using the internal test patterns.
016-240 The high compression PDF board (S2X) failed the NVM checksum
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Reload the software, GP 4.
3. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Reload the software, GP 4. 2. Reload the software, GP 4.
3. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6. 3. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
016-235 Another internal error causes the XCP function to stop. Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
WARNING not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Perform the steps that follow:
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Perform the steps that follow:
2. Reload the software, GP 4.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
3. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
2. Initialise the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause WARNING
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Perform the steps that follow: not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Disconnect the invalid accessory.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
016-313 The hybrid watermark detection H/W was detected but the SW option (secure water- 016-317 The system detected an error in the Page Memory (standard) of the scanner.
mark kit) was not enabled.
016-318 The system detected an error in the Page Memory (option) of the scanner.
016-314 The board for detecting the back (side 2) of a document is not installed. Therefore
(paper security) is unavailable. 016-329 Long boot diag page memory not detected fail.
Procedure 016-333 Long boot diag page memory broken standard fail.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Advise the customer to perform a manual retrieval of machine data from their accounting
server.
3. Initialise the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics. Advise the customer to
push the user accounts to the machine from their accounting server.
4. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
5. Reload the software, GP 4.
6. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
7. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure Procedure
For information only, no service action necessary. Wait until the Scheduled Image Overwrite to
complete.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
Procedure 016-326 The controller has detected a failure at its cable connection with the UI.
Perform the steps that follow:
016-607 Cont-UI Cable Connection Fail
1. Enter dC131. Set NVM value 790-389 to 0.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB and the UI
2. Install new components as necessary:
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
• UI assembly (C7030F), PL 2.05 Item 7.
• UI assembly (C7000), PL 2.10 Item 1.
016-328 The controller has detected a failure at its cable connection with the drive PWB. 016-331 Cont system memory diagnostic fail 2.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause WARNING
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Perform the steps that follow: not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected. Perform the steps that follow:
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
3. Reload the software, GP 4. 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
016-354 Communication cannot be established between the IIT and the controller. 016-356 Cont video ASIC diagnostic fail.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected.
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
securely connected. 3. Reload the software, GP 4.
3. Reload the software, GP 4. 4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
4. If the fault persists, install a new components as necessary:
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected. 2. Reload the software, GP 4.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected. 3. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
016-361 Cont USB 3.0 device diagnostic fail. 016-362 Cont UI diagnostic fail 2.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB and the UI
3. Install new components as necessary:
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
• UI assembly, PL 2.05 Item 7.
• UI assembly (C7000), PL 2.10 Item 1.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause WARNING
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Perform the steps that follow: not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Perform the steps that follow:
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
3. Reload the software, GP 4. 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
016-366 Cont HDD diagnostic fail 1. 016-369 Cont S2X board diagnostic fail.
016-367 Cont HDD diagnostic fail 2. 016-370 Cont rendering engine diagnosed as having a failure.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 and the hard disk. 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4. Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
4. Install new components as necessary: 3. Reload the software, GP 4.
• ESS PWB,PL 3.10 Item 6. 4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
• Hard disk, PL 3.10 Item 2.
WARNING
WARNING Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Perform the steps that follow:
Perform the steps that follow: 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the fax PWBs, PL 20.05 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4. 3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. Install new components as necessary:. 4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
• Line 1 fax PWB, PL 20.05 Item 10.
• Line 2 fax PWB, PL 20.05 Item 15.
• Line 3 fax PWB, PL 20.05 Item 15.
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure
Advise the customer to:
1. Enter the correct user name or password for 802.1x authentication from the machine
panel.
2. Check the switch settings and network connections of the authentication device switch
that is physically connected to the machine via the network and connect it correctly.
3. Check the settings in the Authentication Device switch that is physically connected to the
machine via the network.
016-430 The route certificate of the server certificate (for network 2) of the authentication 016-431 An internal error has occurred in the 802.1x supplicant function of the machine. An
server is not stored in the machine or it does not match. incorrect protocol signal was received from the authentication server in network 2.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to repeat the operation.
1. Store the root server certificate for the authentication server in the machine.
2. If the root certificate of the server certificate cannot be obtained, disable the 802.1x set-
ting item ‘Verify Server Certificate’ in the device.
016-408 The package management function has detected the damaged JAR file. Procedure
Ensure all network settings are correct.
016-409 The package management function has detected a version mismatch.
016-410 The package management function has detected the invalid definition file.
016-411 The package management function has detected an unsupported class file version.
016-412 The package management function has detected the plug-in has caused an error that
is included in a miscellaneous group of errors.
Procedure
Advise the customer to modify the plug-in, then re-install.
Procedure WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
WARNING death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Perform the steps that follow:
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause 1. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
Perform the steps that follow: 2. Reload the software, GP 4.
1. Reload the software, GP 4. 3. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
2. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to specify the correct SMTP server name or specify the IP address. 1. Advise the customer to specify the correct POP server name or specify the IP address.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP. 2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
016-510 Rules for log image transfer are not registered. 016-512 Rules for log image transfer are illegal.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to register rules for transfer from the destination image log control 1. Advise the customer to overwrite rules for transfer from the destination image log control
server to the device. server to the device.
2. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 and the hard disk. 2. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 and the hard disk.
3. Initialise the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics. 3. Initialise the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics.
4. Install a new hard disk, PL 3.10 Item 2. 4. Install a new hard disk, PL 3.10 Item 2.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check the print mode. If print mode is set to High Resolution, 1. Advise the customer to check whether the application that sends a print job and the print
change it to Standard. If print mode is set to Standard, change it to High Speed. instructions has a problem.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 and hard disk, PL 3.10 Item 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 and hard disk, PL 3.10 Item
2 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected. 2 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4. 3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to resubmit the job with corrected parameters. Rewrite the Post- 1. PS booklet and watermark/UUID cannot be specified at the same time. Advise the cus-
Script file so that the page device and process color model cannot be changed in the pro- tomer to cancel either one.
cess. 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 and hard disk, PL 3.10 Item
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 and hard disk, PL 3.10 Item 2 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
2 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected. 3. Reload the software, GP 4.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Ask the System Administrator to increase the limit of printable sides.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to repeat the operation or change the output file format/color mode.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 and hard disk, PL 3.10 Item
2 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to install the SSL client certificate into the device as the LDAP server will
request it.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to insert the smart card into the reader then recheck the PIN before
performing the personal signature scan.
2. Check the wiring between the card reader and the machine.
Procedure 016-525 LDAP-SSL authentication error 115 has occurred (the server certificate has expired).
The device cannot trust the SSL certificate of the LDAP server. Advise the customer to register
the root certificate of the LDAP server SSL certificate in the device. Procedure
Advise the customer to change the LADP server SSL certificate to one that is valid.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to ensure that the address of the LDAP server set in the device matches For information only, an internal error has occurred in the program.
the address of the LDAP server defined in the SSL certificate.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check the PIN, then perform the personal signature scan. Check the network connection. Advise the customer to check that the remote download server
is correctly configured and operating on the network.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 and the hard disk.
3. Initialise the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics.
4. Install a new hard disk, PL 3.10 Item 2.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to register the device in the ApeosWare Authentication Agent. The version of the ApeosWare Authentication Agent needs to be upgraded. Advise the cus-
tomer to check that the machine is a product that is supported by the upgraded version of the
ApeosWare Authentication Agent.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to correctly set the domain user reference login name or the reference Advise the customer to check that the ApeosWare Authentication Agent can connect to the
password of the ApeosWare Authentication Agent domain. database or the active directory.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check that all system data that must be set to perform the remote Advise the customer to:
download are correct. 1. Check that the network cable is connected and check the settings of the authentication
agent function.
2. If DNS address of the server is set as the server name/IP address of the ApeosWare
Authentication Agent in the printer function settings list, check that DNS is enabled.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to:
1. For USB backup, check that the USB memory is correctly installed. If the fault persists, 1. During backup, save the FW download file into the ‘dwld’ directory in the USB memory,
use a PC to check the USB memory for a ‘backup’ directory. If it is not there, create it. connect it the machine, then perform the backup.
2. When performing restore or deletion of backup files from the USB backup file, check that 2. During restore, use the same IOT and IIT ROM versions as those during backup. When
the USB memory is correctly installed. performing restore using a USB backup file, also use the same HDD configuration.
3. If there is no HDD, use the same ESS ROM versions as well. If the same configuration
cannot be attained, delete the backup file from the panel.
4. If the problem occurred at an attempt to restore a backed-up file from an external place,
check that the ESS/IIT/IOT/fax ROM version is still the same as the version used when
the backed-up file was created. Furthermore, check the device is the same as the one
that generated the backed-up file.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Before performing the HDD backup, delete existing backup files through to increase the 1. Format the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics.
capacity. 2. Before performing the restore using the HDD backup file, delete backup files.
2. Before performing USB backup, delete the backup files in the USB memory, or use a PC 3. For USB backup, check that the USB memory is correctly installed. If the fault persists,
to delete unnecessary files on the USB memory to increase the capacity. use a PC to format the USB Memory.
4. When performing restore using USB backup files, check that the USB memory is correctly
installed. If the fault persists, delete the backup files.
5. If the problem still persists, use a PC to format the USB memory.
Procedure Procedure
Increase memory size for job ticket on UI Panel. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP Advise the customer to check for a mismatch between parameters specified by the job ticket.
10. Run the job. Correct the parameters, then resend the job.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check that the device that receives data can print it onto paper whose Advise the customer to ensure the that software is correctly installed on client that generates
properties (size/type/weight/color/punched) are specified by job ticket. job ticket; operational requirements are met; and software version matches device version.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer to check the connection to the DNS and whether the destination Advise the customer to set the DNS address or set the destination server address using IP
server name has been registered in the DNS. address.
2. Ask the customer to verify the FTP server host name is correct.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check that the network communication between the transfer destination Advise the customer to:
FTP server and the machine is available. For example: 1. Check that the server IP address is correct.
• Check that the server IP address is correct. 2. Check the connection of the network cables.
• Check the connection of network cables.
NOTE: Ensure the FTP user has proper permissions to the image storage destination.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer to check the access rights to the FTP scan server. Advise the customer to change the file name/destination folder or move or delete the files in
2. Advise the customer to check the image storage destination folder name. the destination folder.
016-588 Failed to write data into the server after connecting to the FTP server. 016-584 When creating a folder in the server after connecting to the FTP server, the folder cre-
ation has failed.
Procedure
Advise the customer to: Procedure
1. Check that the specified name is a file name that can be created in the storage destina- Advise the customer to:
tion. 1. If a lock directory (*.LCK) remains in the transfer destination, delete it then retry the job.
2. Check that the storage destination has enough free space. 2. Check that the specified name is a folder name that can be created in the storage desti-
nation.
3. Check whether a folder with the same name as the specified name already exists.
4. Check that the storage destination has enough free space.
5. Confirm that the FTP user has correct permissions for the scanned image destination.
016-587 When deleting a folder in the server after connecting to the FTP server, the deletion Procedure
has failed.
Advise the customer to:
016-589 Failed to read data from the FTP server after connecting to the FTP server during 1. Check the access right to the server.
scanner (save to PC) FTP transfer. 2. If a lock directory (*.LCK) remains in the transfer destination, delete it then retry the job.
Procedure
Advise the customer to check whether there is access right to the FTP server and grant the
proper rights.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to set ‘File Name Conflict’ to other than ‘Cancel Job’. When ‘Add’ is selected for ‘File Name Conflict’, Advise the customer to check that the file for-
mat is not set to Multi-page.
Procedure
Advise the customer to repeat the operation.
Procedure Procedure
If required, refer to GP 19 to reset password to 1111 (default) if the System Administrator ID is If required, refer to GP 19 to reset password to 1111 (default) if the System Administrator ID is
unavailable. unavailable.
NOTE: Default is 5 events. NVM value 700-563 can be set between 1 to 10 events. NOTE: Default is 10 users. NVM value 700-564 can be set between 1 to 600 users.
With this feature enabled, the machine denies access when an incorrect System Administrator
ID is entered the selected number of times.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. If the fault persists, install a new components as necessary:
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to: 1. Advise the customer to:
a. Increase the allocated memory of the ART EX. a. Set Print Mode to High Speed and reduce the print resolution. Retry the operation.
b. Lower the print mode. b. Increase the memory to increase the page buffer.
c. Lower the resolution. c. Retry the operation in Print Page Mode.
d. Set Page Print mode to Enabled. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
e. Execute Image Compression in the Graphics tab of the printer driver.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to delete unnecessary documents, then repeat the operation.
WARNING
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to:
a. Check whether the selected mailbox is set up correctly.
b. Have Email, fax or internet fax sent to a valid mailbox.
2. Ensure all fax PWBs are correctly installed, PL 20.05.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 and the hard disk.
5. Initialise the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics.
6. Install a new hard disk, PL 3.10 Item 2.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check that the required optional software is installed and enabled. 1. Advise the customer to delete unnecessary documents or users, then repeat the opera-
Also check that the correct print driver is being used. tion.
2. If the fault persists, perform the steps that follow: 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
a. Reload the software, GP 4.
b. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 and the hard disk.
c. Initialise the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics.
d. Install new components as necessary:
• Hard disk, PL 3.10 Item 2.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to: 1. Advise the customer to:
a. Remove the conditions that disable sample print. a. Cancel annotation or watermark, then repeat the operation.
b. If the fault occurred at installation, check whether the operations for Sample Print are b. Reduce the number of document pages. In Mixed Size mode, only a single size is
correct. available.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected. c. For printing Stored Document, delete unnecessary documents from the hard disk,
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected. then repeat the operation.
3. Reload the software, GP 4. 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected.
4. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 and the hard disk. Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
5. Initialise the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics. 3. Reload the software, GP 4.
6. Install a new hard disk, PL 3.10 Item 2. 4. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 and the hard disk.
7. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6. 5. Initialise the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics.
6. Install a new hard disk, PL 3.10 Item 2.
7. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to: 1. Advise the customer to:
a. Switch off parallel bi-directional communication in the printer driver. a. If secure print, proof print or knowledge storage print is specified, disable them.
b. Set a longer time for Auto Output Time. b. Reduce the delay print jobs waiting to 100 jobs or less.
c. Change the PC BIOS settings. 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected.
d. Use a shorter, genuine, parallel cable. Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected. 3. Reload the software, GP 4.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected. 4. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 and the hard disk.
3. Reload the software, GP 4. 5. Initialise the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics.
4. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 and the hard disk. 6. Install a new hard disk, PL 3.10 Item 2.
5. Initialise the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics. 7. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
6. Install a new hard disk, PL 3.10 Item 2.
7. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to set a correct password and try again. 1. Advise the customer to open the appropriate mailbox and then try again.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected. 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4. 3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6. 4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to input the correct password to use ESCP form. 1. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected. 2. Reload the software, GP 4.
3. Reload the software, GP 4. 3. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 and the hard disk.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6. 4. Initialise the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics.
5. Install a new hard disk, PL 3.10 Item 2.
6. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to decrease the resolution to reduce the PLW memory.
WARNING
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to:
a. Split any internet fax documents that would exceed 2GB in document storage size
into several jobs and control the usage amount of memory.
b. If there is a large amount of scan or internet fax documents being processed, wait
until the other jobs are completed before performing additional jobs.
2. Reload the software, GP 4.
3. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 and the hard disk.
4. Initialise the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics.
5. Install a new hard disk, PL 3.10 Item 2.
6. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to increase the PCL memory size. Increasing the memory for the 1. Advise the customer to cancel the job then execute the command again.
whole system will increase the memory to be allocated to the Decomposer in some mea- 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
sure.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
016-722 Staple position that is not supported by this machine or a paper size that is not sup- Procedure
ported by the Finisher was specified.
Perform the steps that follow:
016-723 Punch position that is not supported by this machine or the paper size that is not sup- 1. Advise the customer to directly scan the document and send it to the fax recipient.
ported by the Finisher was specified. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
016-724 Job canceled due to invalid combination of staple and punch positions.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to correct the settings, then execute the command again.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to fix, then select the decomposer from the UI or with a command. 1. Advise the customer to to switch off paper saving, then print the job again.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
For information only, no service action necessary. Refer the customer to the User Guide. Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to refer to the User Guide to correct the valid range.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
016-732 The decomposer detected that the form specified is not registered. Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
Procedure 1. Advise the customer to:
Perform the steps that follow:
a. Check if the destination address has been entered correctly.
1. Advise the customer to resend the data or form data.
b. Set a correct DNS server address.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
2. Reload the software, GP 4.
3. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to obtain the download data again, then retry the job.
1. Advise the customer to cancel the download prohibited mode then check that the jobs
have completed before retrying the operation.
2. Enter dC131. Set NVM value 700-420 to 0, the retry the operation.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to source a download file that has the same model with the device VerUP Perform the steps that follow:
then retry the job. 1. Ensure that the cable connected to the device is secured correctly, then retry the job.
Procedure 016-751 Syntax error, usage of undefined command, parameter error, damaged PDF file,
internal error of the PDF decomposer has occurred during PDF bridge process.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to print via the driver from Acrobat Reader.
2. Reload the software, GP 4.
3. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to use Acrobat to clear the print prohibition setting then print the PDF 1. Advise the customer to request the Account Administrator for access to use the service.
file. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to set the correct account, then resubmit the job. 1. Advise the customer to:
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4. a. Set the new function that is allowed for that account then try again.
b. Try a different user account.
c. Configure the printer to permit user access to this feature.
d. Request that the Accounting Administrator add access rights to the account.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer additional users can be added to the device with expanded storage 1. Advise the customer to resend the job.
options. The productivity kit increases the maximum amount of users available for this 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
device.
2. Advise the customer to delete unnecessary users or combine user accounts
3. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Print a configuration report and confirm that the DNS settings are correct. 1. Print a configuration report and confirm that the DNS settings are correct.
2. Confirm that the POP3 server settings are correct. 2. Confirm that the SMTP server settings are correct.
3. Enter the IP Address of their POP3 server into the machine. 3. Enter the IP Address of their SMTP server into the machine.
4. If the fault persists, refer the customer to the System Administrator Guide to check that 4. If the fault persists, refer the customer to the System Administrator Guide to check that
the machine is correctly configured. the machine is correctly configured.
016-766 The memory capacity allocated by the SMTP server is exceeded. Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
Procedure 1. Check the email address is correct and is a valid email address.
Advise the customer to:
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
1. Delete jobs on their server because the machine is receiving communication from their
SMTP (email) server that the server disk drive or mailboxes are full.
2. If the fault persists, refer to the System Administrator Guide to ensure that the machine is
configured correctly.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to contact the network administrator for advice and ensure that the SMTP
1. Check the sender address is valid and has been spelled correctly. server supports DSN.
2. Check that the correct SMTP authentication settings have been enabled.
3. Check the SMTP user name and password.
4. Check that the sender address is correct.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to release the direct fax job prohibition (set the target system to 0). Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to set the DNS address. Or, set the scan data repository address
using IP address.
2. Reload the software, GP 4.
3. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to:
WARNING
a. Correctly set the device TCP/IP, IP address, subnet mask and gateway.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
b. Check that the SMTP server, IP address or host name and port number are correct.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
c. Check whether characters other than ASCII are set for the host name of the device. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Set the host name of the device to ASCII characters.
Perform the steps that follow:
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure all paper trays are loaded.
3. If this occurs when sending email, Advise the customer to:
– Reduce the resolution then resend it.
– Reduce the size then resend it.
– Reduce the number of pages and separate the job into several batches when send-
ing.
– Set the output color to Black then resend it.
4. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 and the hard disk.
5. Initialise the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics.
6. Reload the software, GP 4.
7. Install a new hard disk, PL 3.10 Item 2.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. 1. Advise the customer to:
2. Advise the customer to: a. Reduce resolution (image to send quality), then resend the job.
a. Reload the browser page then perform retrieval operation again. b. Reduce magnification, then resend the job.
b. Re-activate the browser, then perform retrieval operation again. c. Increase the maximum fragment quantity.
c. Improve the connection status to a network. 2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
d. Check whether there are problems such as duplicated IP addresses.
3. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to repeat the operation. 1. Advise the customer to check that the media is inserted.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check the media content from the PC. Check the file format/direc- 1. Advise the customer to check the me dis content from the PC. Check whether the print file
tory in the media and the selected mode (Digital Camera Print/Document Print), then attribute data is displayed on the PC, then reset the settings.
reset the settings. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure 016-981 HDD was determined to be full due to scan to email, scan to fax, secure print, delayed
print or sample print was specified when the HDD capacity is low.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to correctly set the paper settings.
016-982 HDD was determined to be full due to collate, stored or interrupted jobs.
2. Reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to:
a. Process or delete the jobs (documents) stored in the same HDD partition, then
repeat the operation.
b. If step A does not resolve the problem, expand the HDD partition size of the relevant
service.
2. Reload the software, GP 4.
3. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 and the hard disk.
4. Initialise the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics.
5. Install a new hard disk, PL 3.10 Item 2.
Consult with your manager before troubleshooting the customer’s network, as the policy varies
according to region. Also consult with the customer’s IT personnel or System Administrator.
Procedure
NOTE: Network errors can be complex to diagnose and resolve. Actions are limited to check-
ing for fundamental faults and to collect system information, before contacting 2nd level sup-
port.
NOTE: If it is possible to log in to the Embedded Web Server by entering the IP address of the
machine, then the network controller on the ESS PWB is good.
Check that the date and time are set correctly on the machine, refer to GP 24 How to Set the
Date and Time. The time and date are correct.
Y N
Set the time and date parameters correctly.
Check the LED link lights at the ESS PWB ethernet connection. The LEDs illuminate.
Y N
If possible, perform the following to try and eliminate the problem of a faulty network port:
• Check the connections at the network port and ESS PWB are good.
• Connect the machine to another network port.
• Advise the customer to a provide a new network port to ESS PWBA cable.
• Check the operation of a known good machine to the network port.
If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6. The LEDs illuminate.
Y N
Contact 2nd level support.
NOTE: If the Windows key is enabled (the key located in the lower left corner with
the Microsoft logo), hold the Windows key down, press R and release both keys to
open the Run window.
c. In the Command window (where the blinking cursor is) type ping. Press the space
bar once, then enter the IP address of the machine. Press Enter.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to change the user privileges.
1. Check the job parameter settings, then re-run the job.
2. Check the response packet from the job limit server.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to contact the System Administrator. Advise the customer to clear the job history and repeat the job.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to change the SSL operation mode setting to other than STARTTLS Perform the steps that follow:
mode. 1. Advise the customer to check if this fault occurred in TLS Mode, it may be due to an incor-
rect port number. Check the Port Number settings of the SMTP Server.
2. Confirm that the SSL or TLS encryption type matches the appropriate port the customer
selected.
3. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
NOTE: This problem can also be fixed by switching off the machines SSL Server Verifica-
tion setting. This will render the machine unable to guarantee the authenticity of the
SMTP server that it is connecting to.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to disable the offline status of the destination machine.
1. Advise the customer to check that network communication between the POP server and
the machine is available:
a. Check that the POP server IP address that is set in the machine is correct.
b. Check the connection of network cables.
017-746 Custom transfer plug-in local disk malfunction. 017-740 Custom transfer plug-in not activated error.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. 1. Enable the embedded plug-in feature.
2. Initialise the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics. 2. Input the software key for the customization kit.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to:
1. Advise the customer to take any one of the actions that follow: 1. Wait a while, then re-run the job.
a. Lower the resolution, then re-send. 2. If the situation does not improve, consult with the Network Administrator.
b. Reduce the size, then re-send.
c. Reduce the page count, then re-send the job in several batches.
d. Change the output color to black & white, then re-send.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to refer to the error details in the job undelivered transmission report, then
1. Advise the customer to revise the custom transfer plug-in and then reinstall it. take appropriate action.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
017-768 The validity period of the Server Certificate has not started yet.
017-770 The server name does not match the server address of the server certificate.
Procedure
Advise the customer to:
1. Check that the clock of the POP server and the machine are correct. If the clock is cor-
rect, change the POP server SSL certificate to one that is valid.
2. Check the validity period settings of the POP server certificate.
3. Check that the server name that are registered in the POP server certificate and the
server address are correct.
NOTE: This problem can also be fixed by switching off the machines SSL Server Verifica-
tion setting. This will render the machine unable to guarantee the authenticity of the POP
server that it is connecting to.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to check the setting related to the Netlog function.
1. Darken the density during scan.
2. Turn off the blank suppression instruction.
Procedure Procedure
For information only, no service action necessary. Advise the customer to check if there is any issues on the network route to the Syslog server.
017-777 The sending queue became full and discarded the message sending request. Procedure
Advise the customer to check if the IP address of the machine is set.
Procedure
Advise the customer to check the status of the Syslog server, address value of the Syslog that
is set to the machine, whether there is an issue in the network route between the machine and
the Syslog server, or a network cable failure.
Procedure Procedure
Check the connection state of the network cable. Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to disable the auto delete setting or change the timer setting (1-7200
minutes) to an appropriate value.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Procedure
Advise the customer to set the permissions as required.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to clear the IPSEC setting mismatch and re-enable the IPSEC. Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer that there is a check mark at Account Invalid for the relevant user in
NOTE: Mismatched IPSEC settings occur when the password is not set because the authenti- the active directory of the LDAP authentication destination server. The server has been
cation method is set to pre-shared key, or when IPSEC certificate is not set because the set to prohibit access from the relevant user.
authentication method is set to digital signature. 2. Advise the customer to consult with the Server Administrator.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: 1. Advise the customer to change the setting to a different IP address. Either that or allow
1. Advise the customer to change the setting to a different IP address. the same IP address setting.
2. Change the IP address to DHCP. 2. If the fault persists advise the customer try switching the DHCPv6 configuration to be
directed by router and disable the manual address.
3. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Procedure 018-412 The same IP address machine as the state-less auto setting address 2 of this
machine exists on the network in the network environment where Ether 2 is connected.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to: 018-413 The same IP address machine as the IPv6 state-less auto setting address 3 of this
a. Change the IPv4 address of this machine or the IPv4 address of the network upper machine exists on the network in the network environment where the Ether 2 is connected.
apparatus.
b. For manual address setting, ensure that the IP address specified by the client is not Procedure
used in other places.
Perform the steps that follow:
c. Check the respective server setting environments with the client.
1. Advise the customer to:
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
a. Change the IPv6 address of the network upper apparatus that is duplicated to
resolve the IP address duplication.
b. Check if the IP address that was set in state-less address auto setting is not used in
other places.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to change the IPv6 manual setting address of this machine or the IPv6 Perform the steps that follow:
address of the network upper apparatus. 1. Advise the customer to:
a. Change the IPv6 address of the network upper apparatus that is duplicated to
resolve the IP address duplication.
b. Check if the IPv6 address that was automatically set as link local address is not used
in other places.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Procedure 018-430 There is an IP address conflict with another system on the network (WIFI direct).
Perform the steps that follow:
018-431 There is an IP address conflict with another system on the network (WIFI).
1. Switch off the machine, GP 10. Remove, then install the WIFI module. Switch on the
machine, GP 10. 018-432 There is an IP address conflict with another system on the network (WIFI).
2. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• WiFi dongle, PL 3.10 Item 10. 018-433 There is an IP address conflict with another system on the network (WIFI).
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
018-434 There is an IP address conflict with another system on the network (WIFI).
018-435 There is an IP address conflict with another system on the network (WIFI).
018-436 There is an IP address conflict with another system on the network (WIFI).
Procedure
Advise the customer to request their network administrator to change the IP address of the
systems the machine is connected to, to something different.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to request their network administrator to change the setting for the Wi-Fi Advise the customer to request their network administrator to change the setting for the config-
network type to Infrastructure. uration information related to the IP protocol stack to Dual or the IPv4 mode.
Procedure 018-501 The machine could not connect to the CA server when trying to do CA authentication.
The machine has failed in communication.
Advise the customer to request their network administrator to change the setting for the Wi-Fi
band of this machine to Auto or the 2.4GHz mode.
018-503 The machine received a message from the CA server and was waiting for a JRM/UI
judgment, but received no response in time.
018-504 During communication between the machine and the CA server for authentication, a
mismatch in Session ID between both has occurred.
018-506 During communication between the machine and the CA server, a mismatch in Field
ID between both has occurred.
018-507 The CA authentication server requested an entry of user info, and the server deter-
mined that the entered info was different.
018-508 In process of CA authentication, the machine has received a server exception mes-
sage from the CA authentication server.
Procedure
Advise the customer to:
1. Enter the correct user name and password.
2. Make the IOT and the controller the same in agreement info.
3. Check the address of the CA server, or recheck the connection to the network.
4. Retry the authentication operation.
5. Set up the server certificate, or set the CA function to off.
6. Check the status of the CA server. Reboot it if necessary.
NOTE: If the user forgets his/her password, he/she needs to set up a new password.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check whether the settings in the job template are correct. For exam- Advise the customer to:
ple: 1. Check whether the port and network related settings that are required to execute the scan
1. A setting that cannot be used in the machine is set. job are set correctly in the machine.
2. The transfer repository is not set correctly. 2. Check whether the DNS server setting is correct.
3. A nonexistent template name is specified. 3. Check whether the port for the specified protocol is activate.
Procedure 018-527 CUI scan: internal error occurred when processing job template.
Perform the steps that follow:
018-528 CUI scan: soap argument error.
1. Advise the customer to wait for a while, then perform the same operation again.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016-210, 506, 777, 780, 798 HDD Error RAP. 018-529 CUI scan: duplication of soap job startup request.
Procedure
Advise the customer to wait for a while, then perform the same operation again.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to either perform the correct authentication operation or check the limita- Advise the customer to:
tions (color mode, number of sheets, services) that was set by the administrator. 1. Check the shared name specified then set the correct name.
2. Check that the user has the right to access the shared name specified.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check the limit for the number of users that can connect to the shared folder. 1. Check that the drive and directory that are specified in the HTTP server that sends
2. Check whether the number of users who are concurrently using the server has exceeded scanned documents are accessible.
the maximum number. 2. Repeat the operation.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to ensure that the file name that is specified in the scanned document Advise the customer to:
destination does not contain any invalid characters. 1. Check that the directory that is specified in the scanned document destination HTTP
server exists.
2. Check that the file name that is specified in the scanned document destination HTTP
server exists.
Procedure
Advise the customer to:
1. Check whether the scanned document destination HTTP server is accessible from the
PC.
2. Check the login user name.
3. Check the login password.
4. Check the name of scanned document destination HTTP server.
5. Check the server path name of scanned document destination HTTP server.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check whether the scanned document destination HTTP server has been registered in 1. Check whether the proxy server name that is set in the machine has been registered in
the DNS. the DNS.
2. Check whether it is connected to the DNS server. 2. Check whether it is connected to the DNS server.
3. Check whether the DNS server address is set. 3. Check whether the DNS server address is set.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check whether the scanned document destination HTTP server is accessible from the 1. Check whether the scanned document destination HTTP server is accessible from the
PC. PC.
2. Check whether the SSL server certificate of the scanned document destination HTTP 2. Check whether the SSL client certificate is set correctly in the machine.
server is registered in the machine. 3. Check whether a valid machine certificate is registered in the scanned document destina-
3. Check whether the SSL server certificate of the scanned document destination HTTP tion HTTP server.
server is valid. For example, check the items that follow:
• The certificate has not expired yet.
• The time that is set in the machine is correct.
• It is not in the discard list.
• The certificate path of the SSL server certificate and import any necessary CA certif-
icate.
4. If the certificate is not registered in the scanned document destination HTTP server, dis-
able the machine certificate validation.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to repeat the operation. Advise the customer to set File Name Conflict to other than Cancel Job.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer that when Add is selected for File Name Conflict, check that the file format Advise the customer that when Add is selected for File Name Conflict, check that the NEXT-
is not set to Multi-page. NAME.DAT file is correct.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer to perform the same operation again without multiple machines Advise the customer to change the file name/destination folder on the scan server. Else, move
accessing the same folder in the same server. or delete the files in the destination folder.
2. Change file name of scan, or move or delete files from the file server using that file name.
3. Check user permissions to the share or file folder.
018-700 Network stack is not initialized fail. 018-702 LDAP protocol error 02 at address book operation (operation error).
018-705 LDAP protocol error 05 at Address Book operation (comparison request result is
false)
Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a configuration report and verify that network setup
settings are indicated. The printer is operational or the configuration report indicates
valid network settings.
Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a
problem with the network. Inform the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server.
Advise the customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is good, there may be a
problem with the remote LDAP server.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server.
Advise the customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is good, there may be a
problem with the remote LDAP server.
018-721 The server returned RFC2251 standard result message 21 (syntax error of the speci-
fied attribute value) in response to the address book inquiry.
Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a configuration report and verify that network setup
settings are indicated. The printer is operational or the configuration report indicates
valid network settings.
Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a
problem with the network. Inform the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server.
Advise the customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is good, there may be a
problem with the remote LDAP server.
Procedure 018-740 Connection error of certificate has occurred during communication through XMPP
protocol with Google server.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to confirm the network connection status, network settings status
with the system administrator.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
1. Advise the customer to confirm with the network administrator the correct root CA certifi-
cate is present, certificate authentication settings are correct.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer that the user Kerbeors password set on the Kerbeors server has expired,
1. Advise the customer to confirm with the network administrator the network (SSL Commu- it is necessary to ask the server administrator to extend the expiration date of it.
nication) connection status, SSL settings status.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check if a higher CA certificate in the user SmartCard is registered with Advise the customer to check if the certificate in the user SmartCard is valid. If it has become
the machine. If not, register it with the machine. invalid or expired, renew it, or if the Kerberos server prohibits the use of the certificate, it is nec-
essary to ask the server administrator to authorise the server permit it.
018-745 A network related (proxy connection) error has occurred when communicating with
Google server via XMPP protocol.
018-746 A network related (DNS name resolution) error has occurred when communicating
with Google server via XMPP protocol.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check the network connection status, settings status as the net-
work might be congested.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure 018-733 LDAP protocol error 33 at address book operation (wrong alias).
Perform the steps that follow:
018-734 LDAP protocol error 34 at address book operation (wrong DN format, wrong pass-
1. Advise the customer to check the HDD available capacity, and free up space. Print again
word).
after executing all print jobs which are being spooled.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4. 018-735 LDAP protocol error 35 at address book operation (object is terminated).
018-736 LDAP protocol error 36 at address book operation (cannot refer to alias).
Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a configuration report and verify that network setup
settings are indicated. The printer is operational or the configuration report indicates
valid network settings.
Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a
problem with the network. Inform the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server.
Advise the customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is good, there may be a
problem with the remote LDAP server.
018-741 Other internal error has occurred during GCP module (XMPP library) processing. Procedure
Advise the customer to:
Procedure 1. Check the Communication Environment:
Perform the steps that follow:
Check that network communication between the transfer destination SMB server and this
1. Advise the customer to check the settings. machine is available, by the performing the steps that follow:
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4. a. Network cable connection.
b. If the transfer destination address is specified using IP Address, check whether the
IP address is correct.
c. Check with the System Administrator on whether the SMB related ports (*1) are
blocked (whether there are blocked ports at the transfer destination server, between
the MFD and the server, etc.)
2. Check the SMB Server:
Check the network settings that follow to check if the computer operates as an SMB
server:
a. Whether the SMB related ports (*1) are blocked by software, such as anti-virus or a
firewall, on the server.
3. Check the Resolution Server Name:
Check the network settings that follows to check if the computer operates as an SMB
server:
a. For communication that goes beyond the subnet and the server name is 15 charac-
ters or shorter, check the WINS server settings and check whether the server name
address can be resolved correctly.
4. If there is no problem, login to the SMB server from another PC using the same user
name and check whether a file can be written to the same storage destination on that
SMB server. If write is possible, try to perform the same operation again from the
machine.
018-750 LDAP protocol error 49 at address book operation (the specified authentication certifi- Procedure
cate is invalid, login name is invalid). Verify that print jobs are printing or print a configuration report and verify that network setup
settings are indicated. The printer is operational or the configuration report indicates
018-751 LDAP protocol error 51 at address book operation (busy). valid network settings.
Y N
018-752 LDAP protocol error 52 at address book operation (cannot be processed). Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a
problem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service.
018-753 LDAP protocol error 53 at address book operation (execution denied).
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server.
018-754 LDAP protocol error 54 at address book operation (loop detected). Ask the customer to re-verify user name and password to be used for authentication to cancel
incorrect search login name. Check with the network administrator to verify authentication set-
Procedure ting of server side when the status is not improved.
Verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is OK, there may be a problem with the remote
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a configuration report and verify that network setup
settings are indicated. The printer is operational or the configuration report indicates LDAP server.
valid network settings.
Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a
problem with the network. Inform the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server.
Advise the customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is good, there may be a
problem with the remote LDAP server.
NOTE: If the situation does not improve, it is highly likely that there is a problem occurring b. If it is taking a long time, consult with the System Administrator.
at the server. 2. If there is no problem, login to the SMB server from another PC using the same user
name and check whether a file can be written to the same storage destination on that
SMB server. If write is possible, try to perform the same operation again from the
machine.
NOTE: If the situation does not improve, there is a possibility of bad connection status in
the customers environment. Advise them to consult with the System Administrator.
Procedure 018-759 SMB Scan image storage location or file name error.
Advise the customer to:
1. For communication that goes beyond the subnet, check the DNS server settings and Procedure
check whether the server name address can be resolved correctly. Advise the customer to:
2. If there is no problem, login to the SMB server from another PC using the same user 1. Check whether the storage location is correct.
name and check whether a file can be written to the same storage destination on that
2. Check whether the specified file name is one that can be created on the SMB server.
SMB server. If write is possible, try to perform the same operation again from the
machine. 3. Check whether the storage destination or file name of the scan image that is set at the
main unit contains restricted characters.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check the settings of the distributed file system (DFS) with the system Advise the customer to:
administrator. 1. Check whether the usage condition at the storage destination PC has caused all the
memory to be used.
2. Terminate the applications that are currently not in use.
3. Check the memory usage status and perform upgrades to increase the memory.
4. Reboot the server.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check whether an anti-virus software is operating at the storage destination PC. If operat- 1. Check whether the server name, shared name, path name, etc. contains machine-depen-
ing, reduce the number of document copies to make the transmission file smaller. dent characters such as (special symbol), (number symbol), IV (roman numeral), and etc.
2. Check that there is no cable unplugged or any issues with the router or the hub in the net- 2. If it contains any machine-dependent characters, edit it so that the name no longer con-
work route. tain any and operate.
018-765 LDAP protocol error 65 at address book operation (object class specification error). Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a configuration report and verify that network setup
018-766 LDAP protocol error 66 at address book operation (entries other than termination can-
settings are indicated. The printer is operational or the configuration report indicates
not be executed). valid network settings.
Y N
018-767 LDAP protocol error 67 at Address Book operation (cannot be executed at RDN).
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a
problem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service.
018-768 LDAP protocol error 68 at address book operation (the specified entry already exists).
Ask the customer to retry search with narrower search target by changing search condition/
018-769 LDAP protocol error 69 at address book operation (object class cannot be changed). search start position in Address Book internal data. If the check is OK, there may be a problem
with the remote LDAP server.
018-771 LDAP protocol error 71 at address book operation (influence on multiple DSA).
Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a configuration report and verify that network setup
settings are indicated. The printer is operational or the configuration report indicates
valid network settings.
Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a
problem with the network. Inform the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server.
Advise the customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is good, there may be a
problem with the remote LDAP server.
Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a configuration report and verify that network setup
settings are indicated. The printer is operational or the configuration report indicates
valid network settings.
Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a
problem with the network. Inform the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server.
Advise the customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is good, there may be a
problem with the remote LDAP server.
018-793 LDAP protocol error 93 at address book operation (result is not returned).
018-794 LDAP protocol error 94 at address book operation (result no longer exist).
018-795 LDAP protocol error 95 at address book operation (result still exist).
018-796 LDAP protocol error 96 at address book operation (client loop detected).
018-797 LDAP protocol error 97 at address book operation (maximum hop number for refer-
ence is exceeded).
Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a configuration report and verify that network setup
settings are indicated. The printer is operational or the configuration report indicates
valid network settings.
Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a
problem with the network. Inform the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server.
Advise the customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is good, there may be a
problem with the remote LDAP server.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
The fax is connected to an analogue network.
Y N
Perform the 020H Fax Problems on Digital Networks RAP.
Procedure Enable audio line monitor. Refer to How to Enable Audio Line Monitor.
Dial the fax number. Listen for a dial tone or dialing and answer tones. Fax tones are pres-
NOTE: Refer to the 020A Fax Entry RAP. Complete all of the Initial Actions.
ent.
Y N
Perform the 020G Fax Module Checkout.
WARNING Install new components as necessary:
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do • Line 1 fax PWB, PL 20.05 Item 10.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause • Line 2 or 3 fax PWB, PL 20.05 Item 15.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Telephone cable.
Verify with the customer that Public Switched Telephone Network/Private Automatic Branch
Exchange (PSTN/PABX) line is operational. Connect a telephone handset into the line outlet. The dial tone/dialling answer tones are present.
Listen for a dial tone. Use a known good telephone handset. The dial tone is present. Y N
Y N The exchange is receiving the digits too quickly or is not processing the digits correctly.
Use a telephone handset to dial a known good number. The ring back is heard. Ask the customer if the exchange uses ‘tone’ or ‘pulse’ dialing.
Y N Perform the steps that follow:
Ask the customer to request a line check by the telephone company.
• From the Embedded Web Server Home screen, select Log In, then Admin. Enter
the password ‘1111’ (default setting). Select Log In. Select Apps. From the Installed
Enable audio line monitor. Refer to How to Enable Audio Line Monitor.
Apps list, select Fax. Check that the Dialing Mode setting is correct (Tone/Pulse 10
Dial the fax number. Listen for dial tones or dialing and answer tones. Fax tones are
pps/Pulse 20 pps).
present.
Y N • Advise the customer to insert a pause ( , ) between the first and second digit of the
Perform the 020G Fax Module Checkout. dial string.
Install new components as necessary:
The fax only dials once and hangs up, or the busy tone has unusual timing, frequency or level.
• Line 1 fax PWB, PL 20.05 Item 10.
The busy tones are recognized.
• Line 2 or 3 fax PWB, PL 20.05 Item 15. Y N
• Telephone cable. • Check the number for a voice or tone answer.
• From the Embedded Web Server Home screen, select Log In, then Admin. Enter
The dial tone/dialling answer tones are present. the password ‘1111’ (default setting). Select Log In. Select Apps. From the Installed
Y N Apps list, select Fax. Check that the country setting is correct.
The exchange is receiving the digits too quickly or is not processing the digits cor-
rectly. Ask the customer if the exchange uses ‘tone’ or ‘pulse’ dialing. The fax is working correctly. Send a 3 page test fax to a known good fax machine. Print a pro-
Perform the steps that follow: tocol report, GP 30. Check for errors.
• From the Embedded Web Server Home screen, select Log In, then Admin.
Enter the password ‘1111’ (default setting). Select Log In. Select Apps. From How to Enable Audio Line Monitor
the Installed Apps list, select Fax. Check that the Dialing Mode setting is cor-
1. Enter Customer Administration Tools, GP 23.
rect (Tone/Pulse 10 pps/Pulse 20 pps).
2. Touch Device.
• Advise the customer to insert a pause ( , ) between the first and second digit of
the dial string. 3. Touch General, then Sounds.
4. Touch Fax Processing Tones:
The fax only dials once and hangs up, or the busy tone has unusual timing, frequency or • 0 = Off (Default)
level. The busy tones are recognized. • 1 = Low
Y N
• 2 = Medium
Check the number for a voice or tone answer.
• 3 = High
The fax is working correctly. Send a 3 page test fax to a known good fax machine. Print a
protocol report, GP 30. Check for errors. Re-enter the details from the Fax options.
A
Status Indicator RAPs December 2017
020B 2-280 Xerox® VersaLink® C7000 Color Printer & C7030 Family Color Multifunction
020C Unable To Send A Fax To Some Machines RAP 020D Unable To Receive A Fax RAP
Use this RAP to isolate components which contribute to a failure to send a fax to some Use this RAP to isolate components which contribute to a fax receive failure.
machines.
Procedure
Procedure
NOTE: Refer to the 020A Fax Entry RAP. Complete all of the Initial Actions.
NOTE: Refer to the 020A Fax Entry RAP. Complete all of the Initial Actions.
WARNING
WARNING Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Verify with the customer that Public Switched Telephone Network/Private Automatic Branch
Ensure the correct number is being dialled to make the connection. The connection is made. Exchange (PSTN/PABX) line is operational. Use a known good telephone handset or use a
Y N line test tool to check the fax line. The dial tone is present.
The exchange is not processing the digits correctly. The machine needs a longer pause Y N
between digits. Advise the customer to insert a pause ( , ) between the first and second Ask the customer to request a line check by the telephone company.
digit of the dial string. Ensure the fax service is enabled and supported on that line by a PBX administrator.
Call the fax number from a known good telephone. Listen for the answer fax tones. The fax Call the handset from another telephone. The phone rings.
tones are heard. Y N
Y N Ask the customer to request a line check by the telephone company.
The fax on the remote end is not picking up, or no fax is connected. Advise the customer Ensure the fax service is enabled and supported on that line by a PBX administrator.
to check the machine at the remote end.
Reconnect the fax. Call the fax number from another telephone. Listen for fax tones. The
The fax is working correctly. Send a 3 page test fax to a known good fax machine. Print a pro- machine answers and fax tones are heard.
tocol report, GP 30. The protocol report shows Receive Not Ready (RNR) is received from the Y N
remote fax repeatedly until timeout and Disconnect (DCN). Check for a communication failure Print a fax activity report, GP 30. Check for received calls on the activity report. The
after ‘V34-PH2/V34-PH3’ or ‘DCS/TCF’. The remote fax receives and prints the fax. machine probably does not ‘beep’ to indicate an incoming call.
Y N Call the fax number from another telephone. Listen for fax tones. The machine answers
There is a compatibility problem with the remote fax. Check the items that follow: and fax tones are heard.
• Check the protocol report for communication errors. Y N
• The fax line quality is too poor for V34 (Super G3) to function correctly. This is possi- Perform the 020G Fax Module Checkout.
Install new components as necessary:
bly caused by mains interference on the line.
• From the Embedded Web Server Home screen, select Log In, then Admin. Enter • Line 1 fax PWB, PL 20.05 Item 10.
the password ‘1111’ (default setting). Select Log In. Select Apps. From the Installed • Line 2 or 3 fax PWB, PL 20.05 Item 15.
Apps list, select Fax. Disable Super G3.
The fax is working correctly. Send a 3 page test fax to a known good fax machine. Print a
If mains noise persists, install and use line 2 or 3 instead of line 1 (if available).
protocol report, GP 30. Check for errors.
The protocol report shows Message Confirmation (MCF) is not sent by the remote fax (last
Receive a 3 page test fax from the original fax machine. The fax is working correctly. Send a 3
page), only DCN. The failure report is printed, but the remote fax prints multiple copies
of the job or failed page. page test fax to a known good fax machine. Print a protocol report, GP 30. Check for errors.
The protocol report may show a communication failure after ‘Called Subscriber Identified/Digi-
Y N
tal Identification Signal’ (CSI/DIS) or ‘Digital Command Signal/Training Check’ (DCS/TCF) or
The fax is working correctly. Send a 3 page test fax to a known good fax machine. Print a
protocol report, GP 30. Check for errors. after ‘V34-PH2/V34-PH3’ or ‘Eye Quality Monitor’ (EQM) value greater than 5000. The proto-
col report shows a communication failure.
Y N
The machine will resend up to 5 times before printing the failure report.
Enter Customer Administration Tools, GP 23. Select Service Settings / Embedded Fax Set- The problem may be intermittent. Inform the operator of the remote machine that they
should report the problem to the telephone company.
tings / Transmission Defaults / Automatic Resend. Set the number of resends to 1 or 2.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
From the Embedded Web Server Home screen, select Log In, then Admin. Enter the pass-
word ‘1111’ (default setting). Select Log In. Select Apps. From the Installed Apps list, select
Fax. Check that:
• Auto Tray Switching is set to Use Same or Larger Paper Size.
• Auto Reduce on Receipt is set to On.
• Fax Receive Tray is set to all available trays.
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
From the Embedded Web Server Home screen, select Log In, then Admin. Enter the pass- • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
word ‘1111’ (default setting). Select Log In. Select System, then Fax. Check that the fax is • For image quality defects, perform the IQ27 Unfused Copy/Toner Offset RAP.
enabled.
• Initialize the System NVM, refer to dC301.
Exit Customer Administration Tools, GP 23. Press the Home button on the UI. The Fax App
is displayed.
Y N Procedure
Check that the fax PWBs, PL 20.05 are installed correctly. Switch off the machine GP 10. Disconnect the components that follow:
Perform the steps that follow: • If installed, the line 2 and 3 fax PWBs, PL 20.05 Item 15.
1. Switch off the machine, GP 10. • The line 1 fax PWB, PL 20.05 Item 10 from the riser PWB.
2. Check the fax USB harness, PL 20.05 Item 2. • The the fax USB harness, PL 20.05 Item 2 from the ESS PWB.
3. Switch on the machine, GP 10. Check that the connectors are clean and not damaged. If the connectors are damaged, install
The Fax App is displayed. new components as necessary:
Y N • Line 1 fax PWB, PL 20.05 Item 10.
Reload the software, GP 4. • Line 2 or 3 fax PWB, PL 20.05 Item 15.
NOTE: Software should only be loaded on a working machine. Loading or reloading • Riser PWB, PL 20.05 Item 16.
software onto a machine (or fax module) that has a fault will not work. • Fax USB harness, PL 20.05 Item 2.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. • ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
NOTE: Due to the compression used on the technologies, the level of performance
will be lower than on a PSTN or POTS.
• The fax option will not function on Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN).
• The fax over IP is a customer option. The feature allows the machine to send and receive
faxes over an IP based network using SIP and VoIP Gateway industry standard protocols
and services. The FoIP enabled machine can send and receive faxes from a variety of
analog and digital devices.
Fax over IP uses devices at each end of the IP network (fax modems) to decode the fax
audio (analog) back into fax protocol (digital), and send the data over an IP network. This
is known as Fax Relay and ITU standard is T.38.
If the customer is experiencing poor performance when using fax over IP, it may be
because the machine is configured for embedded fax. The machine cannot run both fax
over IP and embedded fax concurrently, the machine must be configured for one or the
other.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 14.
• Check with the customer or IT person on what network the fax service is being used and
what is the quality of service.
• Check that an analogue adapter or a connection for analogue terminals is available.
• Ask the customer to check with the service provider that an analogue port for fax service
has been provided and enabled.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. 1. Enter dC131. Set NVM value 850-007 to the appropriate one for the connected acces-
2. Advise the customer that the encryption settings of the connected USB IC card reader are sory. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
wrong. Connect an USB IC card reader that has never been used before, or one that has 2. Or replace the connected accessory with the appropriate one for the setting. Switch off,
had its encryption settings initialized as factory default settings to the machine. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Procedure • There was an attempt to start up a job for accessory billing in the middle of a fax send job
operation.
• There was an attempt to start up a Fax send Job in the middle of a Job for accessory bill-
WARNING ing operation. This fault is not detected when the fax send billing function is disabled.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Procedure
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Advise the customer to wait for the current running job to complete, and then restart the job.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Advise the customer to disconnect the USB IC card reader that caused this error to occur
from the USB connector.
021-511 Installation status mismatch (EP system) 021-513 EP-DX installation conflict (EP system).
Procedure
Advise the customer to check with the EP Center for the EP contract status, registration status
and system operation status.
Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
021-529 The latest version is detected (software update). 021-531 A large load on the server is detected (software update).
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. 1. Wait a while, then perform the same operation again.
2. If the fault persists, advise the customer to check with the EP Center for the EP contract 2. If the fault persists, advise the customer to check with the EP Center for the EP contract
status, registration status and system operation status. status, registration status and system operation status.
024-340 Drive PWB sending error detected by controller (invalid parameter was used). WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
024-341 Drive PWB sending error detected by controller (sequence number error). not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
024-342 Drive PWB sending error detected by controller (packet number error). Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
024-343 Drive PWB sending error detected by controller (message length error).
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
024-345 Drive PWB sending error detected by controller (check code error).
securely connected.
024-346 Drive PWB sending error detected by controller (parity error detected by the IOT. 3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
024-347 Drive PWB sending error detected by controller (framing error detected by the IOT). 5. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
024-348 Drive PWB sending error detected by controller (overrun error detected by the IOT).
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
024-349 Drive PWB sending error detected by controller (receive abort detected by the IOT
after the header had been recognized).
024-350 Drive PWB receiving error detected by controller (sequence number of the received
message packet is incorrect).
024-351 Drive PWB receiving error detected by controller (packet number error).
024-352 Drive PWB receiving error detected by controller (message length error).
024-353 Drive PWB receiving error detected by controller (check code error).
024-354 Drive PWB receiving error detected by controller (parity error detected by the UART).
024-355 Drive PWB receiving error detected by controller (framing error detected by the
UART).
024-356 Drive PWB receiving overrun error detected by controller (overrun error detected by
the UART).
024-357 Drive PWB receiving error detected by controller (receiving abort detected after the
header had been recognized).
024-358 Print sequence error detected by controller (paper feed and paper output that are not
applicable to the number detected.)
024-359 Drive PWB transmission receiving error detected by controller (invalid parameter
used).
024-361 Invalid IOT paper size group information. 024-362 Page-sync occurred before video output preparation completes.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause WARNING
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Perform the steps that follow: not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Perform the steps that follow:
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
securely connected. 2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
3. Initialize the user NVM, refer to dC301 NVM Initialization. Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
4. Reload the software, GP 4.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
5. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
4. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
5. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
• ESS PWB,PL 3.10 Item 6.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure the connectors on the hard disk are securely connected.
3. Remove, then re-install the SD card, PL 3.10 Item 11. If necessary, install a new memory
card.
4. Format the hard disk drive, refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics.
5. Reload the software, GP 4.
6. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause WARNING
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Perform the steps that follow: not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Perform the steps that follow:
2. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure the connectors on the hard disk are securely connected.
3. Format the hard disk drive, refer to dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics.
4. Reload the software, GP 4.
5. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
6. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
024-368 PCI access error occurred due to a faulty PCI bus. 024-370 Marker code detection error. During enlarge, when the file was enlarged only by the
specified size, the end code (FF02) cannot be found in the compressed data.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do WARNING
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Perform the steps that follow: death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. Perform the steps that follow:
2. Ensure the connectors on the hard disk are securely connected. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
3. Format the hard disk drive, refer to dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics. 2. Change the Print mode (Normal/High Quality/High Resolution). Inform the customer of
4. Reload the software, GP 4. any print mode setting changes.
5. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP. 3. Remove, then re-install the SD card, PL 3.10 Item 11. If necessary, install a new memory
card.
6. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
4. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
5. Reload the software, GP 4.
6. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
7. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
• SD card, PL 3.10 Item 11.
024-372 Sending error detected by the controller (incorrect parameter instruction). Procedure
BSD-ON: BSD 6.4 LED Control (Y, M), BSD 6.5 LED Control (C, K). 024-601 The billing backup counter 1 is automatically repaired.
024-376 Drive PWB image signal truncation detected by the controller. 024-602 The billing backup counter 2 is automatically repaired.
Procedure
For information only, no service action necessary.
Procedure
For information only, no service action necessary.
024-700 A job that could not be printed due to insufficient system memory or hard disk not Procedure
installed was received.
Advise the customer to use paper that is in specification. Refer to GP 15 Paper and Media Size
Specifications.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Remove, then re-install the SD memory card, PL 3.10 Item 11. If necessary, install a new
memory card.
2. Ensure that the connectors from the hard disk drive, PL 3.10 Item 2 to the ESS PWB, PL
3.10 Item 6 are securely connected.
3. If the fault persists, install a new hard disk drive, PL 3.10 Item 2.
Procedure 024-742 The number of sheets per set exceeds a specific allowable number for a booklet.
Clear the paper jam.
024-775 A job that exceeds booklet paper quantity is cancelled.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to use paper of a lighter weight so as not to exceed the maximum
output limit or use less pages.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to use paper that is in specification or to print simplex. Refer to GP 1. Advise the customer to use paper that is in specification or to print face up. Refer to GP
15 Paper and Media Size Specifications. 15 Paper and Media Size Specifications.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
024-747 The specified combination of parameters (stored file size, paper size, paper tray, Procedure
duplex command, output tray) cannot be executed or continued.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to reduce the number of documents to less than the user-specified
Procedure number or reduce the number of numbering digits.
Advise the customer to use the correct print parameters.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the 071-212 Tray 1 Paper Size Sensor Fault RAP. Perform the 072-212 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensor Fault RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the 073-212 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensor Fault RAP. Perform the 074-212 Tray 4 Paper Size Sensor Fault RAP.
Procedure
Perform the 012-211 Stacker Tray Fail Entry RAP.
024-136 The staple set count exceeded 50 sets on the stacker tray during the staple set eject Procedure
operation.
For information only, no service action necessary.
Procedure
Perform the 012-212 Stacker Tray Upper Limit Failure RAP.
Procedure
Install new components as necessary:
• Yellow toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 10.
• Magenta toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 11.
• Cyan toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 12.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Empty the punch box, PL 13.06 Item 11.
• Check for any debris or obstructions in the path of the punch waste bin or the punch box
set sensor.
Procedure
Enter dC330, code 012-275, punch box set sensor. Remove, then reinstall the punch waste
bin. The display changes.
Y N
Check the punch box set sensor, refer to GP 7 How to Check a Sensor. Install new com-
ponents as necessary:
• Punch box set sensor, PL 13.09 Item 5.
• (Integrated office finisher) finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
• (Office finisher LX) finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Reload the software, GP 4. If the fault persists, install a new finisher PWB (integrated office fin-
isher), PL 12.14 Item 1 or (office finisher LX), PL 13.45 Item 2.
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Check that the finisher top cover, PL 12.05 Item 10 can be opened, then closed. Ensure that the eject cover, PL 13.25 Item 1 is closed.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Procedure
Procedure Check the specification of the paper, refer to GP 15 Paper and Media Size Specifications.
Check the specification of the paper, refer to GP 15 Paper and Media Size Specifications. The paper is within specification.
The paper is within specification. Y N
Y N Load new paper that is in specification.
Load new paper that is in specification.
Check the condition of the paper. The paper is in good condition.
Check the condition of the paper. The paper is in good condition. Y N
Y N Load new paper that is in specification.
Load new paper that is in specification.
Check all connectors on the finisher PWB. The connectors are connected correctly.
Check the fault history, dC122 for a fault code. Another fault code is displayed. Y N
Y N Connect the connectors.
If the fault persists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 12.14 Item 1.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. Open, then close the eject cover. If the fault
Perform the relevant RAP. persists, install a new finisher PWB, PL 13.45 Item 2.
Procedure WARNING
Install new components as necessary: Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
• Yellow toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 10. not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
• Magenta toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 11. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Cyan toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 12. Perform the steps that follow:
1. Load the specified media.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do WARNING
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Perform the steps that follow: death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Check the UI settings, ensure that bypass tray is selected and the correct media used. Perform the steps that follow:
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 1. Ensure that the job is programmed in compliance with the maximum number of sheets for
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are a booklet.
securely connected. 2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
3. Reload the software, GP 4. Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure
Enter dC330, code 071-101, tray 1 no paper sensor. Manually actuate the tray 1 no paper sen-
sor, PL 80.10 Item 6. The display changes.
Y N
Check the tray 1 no paper sensor. Refer to GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Perform the 071-210 Tray 1 Lift Fail RAP. Check the tray 1 feed/lift motor. If the fault persists,
install new components as necessary:
• Tray 1 no paper sensor, PL 80.10 Item 6.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
BSD-ON: BSD 7.9 Tray 2 Paper Stacking (1TM) 024-952 Tray 3 is empty.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause WARNING
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Procedure Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Enter dC330, code 074-101, tray 4 no paper sensor. Manually actuate the tray 4 no paper sen-
sor, PL 80.20 Item 6. The display changes. Procedure
Y N Enter dC330, code 075-100, bypass tray no paper sensor. Manually actuate the bypass tray no
Check the tray 4 no paper sensor. Refer to GP 7 How to Check a Sensor. paper sensor, PL 70.40 Item 12. The display changes.
Y N
Perform the 074-210 Tray 4 Lift Fail RAP. Check the tray 4 feed/lift motor. If the fault persists, Check the bypass tray no paper sensor, refer to GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
install new components as necessary:
• Tray 4 no paper sensor, PL 80.20 Item 6. Install new components as necessary:
• 3TM PWB, PL 70.23 Item 5. • Bypass tray no paper sensor, PL 70.40 Item 12.
• TTM PWB, PL 70.90 Item 1. • Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
Procedure
WARNING For information only, no service action necessary.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Procedure
Enter dC330, code 078-200, HCF no paper sensor. Manually actuate the HCF no paper sen-
sor, PL 80.61 Item 19. The display changes.
Y N
Check the HCF no paper sensor. Refer to GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Perform the 078-250 HCF Lift Fault RAP. Check the HCF feed/lift motor. If the fault persists,
install new components as necessary:
• HCF no paper sensor, PL 80.61 Item 19.
• HCF PWB, PL 70.60 Item 9.
024-974 Interposer tray size mismatch. 024-966 The paper specified for printing cannot be detected.
Procedure Procedure
For information only, no service action necessary.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Reload the relevant paper tray.
2. If the fault persists, perform the steps that follow:
a. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
b. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL
3.10 Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both
PWBs are securely connected.
c. Reload the software, GP 4.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do WARNING
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Perform the steps that follow: death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Cancel the stapling job. Refer the customer to the user documentation. • Check if the specified paper is loaded in the tray.
2. If the fault persists, perform the steps that follow: • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
a. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
b. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL Procedure
3.10 Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both Cancel staple mode and punch mode. The fault persists.
PWBs are securely connected. Y N
c. Reload the software, GP 4. Correct the settings.
Check the connectors on the finisher PWB. The connectors are securely connected.
Y N
Connect the connectors securely.
Check the connection of the harness between the machine and the finisher. The harness is
securely connected.
Y N
Connect the harness securely.
024-969 Mixed punch paper of different widths was detected while printing in punch mode. 024-970 Tray 6 out of place.
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Check if the specified paper is loaded in the tray. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Procedure
Procedure Enter dC330, code 078-204, HCF tray in sensor. Manually actuate the HCF tray in sensor, PL
Cancel punch mode. The fault persists. 70.45 Item 3. The display changes.
Y N Y N
Correct the settings. Check the HCF tray in sensor. Refer to GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Check the connectors on the finisher PWB. The connectors are securely connected. Check for damage to the actuator on the HCF tray. If the fault persists, install new components
Y N as necessary:
Connect the connectors securely. • HCF tray in sensor, PL 70.45 Item 3.
• HCF PWB, PL 70.60 Item 9.
Check the connection of the harness between the machine and the finisher. The harness is
securely connected.
Y N
Connect the harness securely.
Enter dC330, code 078-203, HCF size sensor B. Manually actuate the HCF size sensor B, PL
70.60 Item 11. The display changes.
Y N
Check the HCF size sensor B. Refer to GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Check for damage to the actuator on the HCF tray. If the fault persists, install new components
as necessary:
• HCF size sensor A, PL 70.60 Item 11.
• HCF size sensor B, PL 70.60 Item 11.
• HCF PWB, PL 70.60 Item 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the 012-213 Stacker Tray Lower Limit Failure RAP. Advise the customer to ensure the correct paper size or type is loaded in the bypass tray in the
correct orientation. Resubmit the job.
Procedure
Perform the 016-210, 506, 777, 780, 798 HDD Error RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Inform the customer to give the machine time to cool down before proceeding. Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer that this fault is caused when the server uses an undefined LDAP
protocol that is not supported by the machine. Correct any mistakes in server settings or
client operation.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: For information only, no service action necessary. Advise the customer to wait for approxi-
1. Reduce a resolution send parameter (image-to-send quality) then re-send the job. mately one day until an automatic deletion of documents makes space available. Then re-run
the job.
2. Reduce a magnification send parameter, then re-send the job.
3. Increase the maximum file accumulated data size.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to:
1. Advise the customer to: 1. Reduce the resolution level (scanned-image quality), then re-run the job.
a. Ask the sender of the S/MIME encrypted mail to encrypt the mail by the encryption 2. Reduce the number of documents, then re-run the job.
method (3DES), then re-send it.
b. Set FIPS140 Authentication Mode of the machine to off.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Procedure
Advise the customer to:
1. Check that the media exists where scanned documents will be sent.
2. Check that the PC can access the media where scanned documents will be sent.
3. Check that a file can be created in a specified storage.
4. Check that the media is neither removed nor reinserted while being referred to or that dur-
ing that time, other media is not inserted.
026-725 The checksum of the remote download file reported from the EP center does not Procedure
match that of the downloaded file.
Advise the customer to set up the machine configuration info on the printer driver screen so
that it can match the actual configuration.
Procedure
Advise the customer that it is necessary to check the size of the file registered with the EP cen-
ter and the size stored in the SW repository.
Procedure 026-729 An error occurred during communication with the WSD scan client. WSD scan client
cancelled the job or a scan from the DADF was performed from an application other than Win-
Advise the customer to shorten the specified storage location or the filename.
dows fax and scan.
Procedure
Advise the customer to:
1. Check whether the transfer destination WSD scan client and the machine are able to
communicate via the network. For example:
• Check whether the WSD scan client has enough free capacity.
• Check the connection of the network cable.
2. When using DADF, perform the scan using Windows Fax & Scan. Or, change to the
platen to perform the scan.
026-733 The password that is specified by PJL command is different from the one that is set in
the machine.
Procedure
Advise the customer to correct the PIN number, print count or password that is specified by
PJL Command, then try again.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: For one occurrence, take no action. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
1. Ensure that the job has completed, then try again.
2. After completing a panel operation, wait at least 1 minute before starting the download
operation.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to change the IPv6 (Manual Setting Address) of this machine to the 1. Advise the customer to change the IPv6 Link Local Address of this machine or the IPv6
IPv6 address that can be used as the self-machine address. address of the other machine on the network.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP. 2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to:
1. Advise the customer to change the duplicated IP address of the PC. 1. Check with the System Administrator that the mail server has been launched and the
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP. environment is already used for other purposes (such as for PC).
2. Check that a correct SMTP server address is reflected in the machine setting list:
a. When the SMTP server address is specified using IP address, set a correct IP
address.
b. When the SMTP server address is specified using FQDN, check that the FQDN
name is correct. Also check that a correct DNS server address is set for the
machine, and set a correct IP address.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check with the System Administrator that the mail server has been launched and the 1. Advise the customer to specify the correct POP server authentication information.
environment is already used for other purposes (such as for PC). 2. Perform the 027-501 POP Server Fail for Mail IO RAP, then advise the customer to spec-
2. Check that a correct POP server address is reflected in the machine setting list: ify a correct POP User Name.
a. When the POP server address is specified using IP address, set a correct IP 3. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
address.
b. When the POP server address is specified using FQDN, check that FQDN name is
correct. Also check that a correct DNS server address is set for the machine, and set
a correct IP address.
027-773 Time to communicate with the SMTP server ran out (after connection to the server).
Procedure
Advise the customer to wait for a while, then perform the operation again.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check the connection to the DNS. Or, check whether the SMB server Advise the customer to set the DNS server address. Or, set the SMB server address of the
name of the transfer destination has been registered in the DNS. transfer destination using IP address.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to check the password that was set for the shared folder.
1. Check that network communication between the transfer destination SMB server and this
machine is available, by checking:
a. The connection of network cables.
b. The TCP/IP settings.
c. For communication through port 137 (UDP), port 138 (UDP) and port 139 (TCP).
2. Check the network settings that follow to see if the computer operates as an SMB server.
a. Check that the file sharing service for Microsoft network is enabled.
b. Check that NetBIOS over TCP/IP is enabled in the TCP/IP settings.
c. Check the file sharing service (communications through port 137 (UDP), port 138
(UDP) and port 139 (TCP)) is allowed in the firewall settings.
3. For communication that goes beyond the subnet, check the WINS server settings and
check whether the server name address can be resolved correctly.
4. Check whether the NetBIOS interface machine at the transfer destination SMB server has
started.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to change the file name/destination folder on the SMB scan server. Else, Advise the customer to:
move or delete the files in the destination folder. 1. Check if the specified file name already exists on the server.
2. Check if the specified file name is in use.
3. Check if the specified file name already exists as a directory.
4. Check if a prohibited character was detected in the specified file name.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to check if a file or folder with the same name as the specified name
1. Manually delete the lock directory (*.LCK) from the transfer destination. exists on the SMB server.
2. Check whether a folder with the same name as the specified name already exists.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check that the storage destination has enough free space. Advise the customer to log in to the SMB server from another PC using the same user name
and check whether they can write a file into the same storage destination on that SMB server.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to set File Name Conflict to other than Cancel Job. Advise the customer to check that the file format is not set to Multi-page When Add is selected
for File Name Conflict.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check that the NEXTNAME.DAT file is correct when Add is selected for Advise the customer to check that the server name of the SMB server is correct.
File Name Conflict.
027-548 SMB protocol error (4-008), the scan user name specification is incorrect 027-572 SMB protocol error (4-032), incorrect parameter.
Procedure
Advise the customer to perform the operation again.
Procedure 027-578 SMB protocol error (4-038), communication timeout has occurred.
Advise the customer to:
1. Check that the authentication server and the machine can communicate through the net-
Procedure
work (check the network group, TCP/IP settings, check the communication at Port No. Advise the customer to check that the authentication server and the machine can communi-
137 (UDP)/Port No. 138 (UDP)/Port No. 139 (TCP)). cate through the network (check the network group, TCP/IP settings, check the communication
2. If the authentication server and the machine are connected to different subnets, check at Port No. 137 (UDP)/Port No. 138 (UDP)/Port No. 139 (TCP)).
that the machine has settings that can resolve the address of the authentication server.
3. Check if the NetBIOS over TCP/IP has become enabled at the authentication server set-
tings:
a. Check if the authentication server and the machine can resolve the addresses from
the WINS server.
b. Check if the authentication server and the machine can resolve the addresses from
the DNS server.
4. Check if the NetBIOS over TCP/IP has become enabled at the authentication server set-
tings.
5. Check at the Internet connection firewall if the communication through Ports 137, 138 and
139 are not blocked.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check if the SMB client has been started. Advise the customer to check that SMB (TCP/IP) is enabled.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to obtain a valid password from the system administrator. Advise the customer to request the system administrator to disable the change password at
next login setting.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check that the domain of the destination mail address is not designated Ensure the network cable is connected correctly.
as a prohibited domain.
027-703 The certificate for the destination expired (before connection to the server). 027-711 SMIME mail certificate retrieval error.
027-704 The certificate for the destination is not reliable (before connection to the server). 027-712 Invalid S/MIME mail certificate error.
027-705 The certificate for the destination existed on a list of revoked certificates (before con- 027-713 Receive S/MIME mail tampered error.
nection to the server).
027-714 S/MIME mail sender impersonation error.
027-706 No machine certificate exists (before connection to the server).
027-715 S/MIME mail certificate not supported.
027-707 The machine certificate expired (before connection to the server).
Procedure
027-708 The machine certificate is not reliable (before connection to the server).
Perform the steps that follow:
027-709 The certificate for the destination existed on a list of revoked certificates (before con- 1. Advise the customer to:
nection to the server). a. Enable S/MIME setting in the machine.
b. Register the sender certificate in the machine or change the mailer options so that
Procedure the S/MIME signature mails from the sender will be sent with the certificate.
Perform the steps that follow: c. Check that the signature bearer of the CA certificate is registered in the machine.
1. Advise the customer to: d. Check that the mail address written on the machine certificate is the same as that
set up on the machine.
a. Store the correct certificate for the destination in the machine. Check the items that
follow: 2. Advise the customer that the sender needs to send a mail that is signed with a valid certif-
i. That the term for which the certificate is valid. icate because the sender certificate has expired.
ii. The machines time is correct. 3. Advise the customer that the machine may be blocking the attacks.
b. Check the certification path for the destination certificate and import the necessary 4. Reload the software, GP 4.
CA certificate. 5. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Workflow Scanning Error Entry RAP.
c. Store in this machine a destination certificate that is not on the list of revoked certifi-
cates.
d. Check that the mail address written on the machine certificate is the same as that
set up on the machine.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
027-721 Application interface destination during web service interface - not found. Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
Procedure 1. Advise the customer:
Perform the steps that follow:
a. That if a number of documents is specified for scanning, scan one document and
1. Advise the customer to check that the DNS server address is set correctly. Check that the store it.
PC running the application interface is registered in DNS.
b. That when scanning and storing are successful, change the application interface
2. Reload the software, GP 4. timeout value. If scanning and storing are not successful,
3. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP. c. To check that the scan document can be uploaded from the PC browser. When
uploading is successful, change the application interface timeout value.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure 027-725 Application interface during web service interface - job operation failure.
Perform the steps that follow:
027-726 Application interface during web service interface - unknown job status.
1. Advise the customer to check the user name and password to be entered for creating a
job flow.
Procedure
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check that the application interface is working correctly.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to increase the preset pagination value, or reduce the number of original Advise the customer to check that the server disk is normal and has free space, and then retry
pages scanned. the operation.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check that the SSL setting for the job template server is enabled. Advise the customer to:
1. Using the HTTPS protocol, check whether the job template server is accessible from the
PC.
2. Check whether the SSL server certificate of the job template server is registered in the
machine.
3. Check whether the SSL server certificate of the job template server is valid. For example,
check that:
a. The certificate has not expired yet.
b. The time that is set in the machine is correct.
c. It is not in the discard list.
d. The certificate path of the SSL server certificate and import any necessary CA certif-
icate.
4. If the certificate is not registered in the job template server, disable the machine certificate
validation.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check that Read Authorization is established for the storage desti- 1. Advise the customer to set the resource of the storage destination path from the client
nation server directory set as a resource. PC.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check the user information: 1. Advise the customer to:
a. Set the log-in name and password in the job template file storage destination. a. Check hat the network cable is connected correctly.
b. From some other PC connected to the network, check that they can log in with the b. From the destination server, ping the machine.
relevant account. c. Perform the ping test on the destination server from PSW.
c. From a client PC, set a login name and password as a resource d. From a client PC, check that the FTP connection to the destination server is possi-
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4. ble.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to re-examine the contents of the instruction. 1. Advise the customer to:
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4. a. Not link the box to the instruction that requires user entry.
b. Set preset values for the items in the instruction requiring user entry.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to enable the service. 1. Advise the customer to check the system data setting of the XDW/PDF signature and the
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4. signature setting that is specified in the instruction. If the system data setting is different
from the setting in the instruction, either change the instruction or change the system
data.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to:
1. Advise the customer to: 1. Check whether the login name and password have been set correctly.
a. Check the server/network connection. 2. Consult with the Network Administrator to check the authentication settings at the LDAP
b. Check the communication route that can be reached. Server.
c. Ping the DNS server.
d. Check if the CA certificate of the connection destination server is imported to the
machine by using the browser.
e. Check if the machine does not go through the proxy that SSL has the function to
check the communication details SSL.
f. Specify the machine as out of the SSL proxy target.
g. Check if the server supports the relevant encryption method.
h. Set the client certificate to the machine.
i. Import the client certificate to the machine and set to use as the client certificate.
j. Check the daylight saving time difference to see if the date/time of the machine is
correct.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check whether the machines network settings are set correctly. 1. Advise the customer to:
2. Consult with the network administrator to check the connection status from the machine a. Check if the parameter setting specified in XDOD client is out of system specifica-
to the reference server. tions.
b. Check the XDOD client and controller versions.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to repeat the print instruction.
1. If on-demand print for multiple documents was instructed using the external access func-
tion, reduce the number of documents then retry it.
2. Either extend the print on demand print duration or set it to 0.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check if the external accounting server is working correctly. 1. Check that network communication between the transfer destination AirPrint scan client
2. Connect the cable correctly. and the machine is available.
3. Set up the machine so that it can correctly communicate with the external accounting 2. Check whether the AirPrint scan client has enough free capacity.
server. 3. Check the network cable connection.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check that the scan document destination WebDAV server is registered in DNS. 1. Check that the proxy server name that is configured on the machine is registered in DNS.
2. Check that the DNS server connection is good. 2. Check that the DNS server connection is good.
3. Check that the DNS server is correctly configured. 3. Check that the address of the DNS server is correctly configured.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check the access from the PC to the scan document destination WebDAV server. 1. Check the access from the PC to the scan document destination WebDAV server.
2. Check the scan document SSL settings of the destination WebDAV server. 2. Ensure the machine is registered.
3. Check the scan document destination WebDAV server name and server path name. 3. Ensure the scan SSL server certificate of the document destination WebDAV server is
correct. For example:
a. Check the expiration date.
b. Check that the machine time is correct.
c. Check that they are not on the disposal list.
d. Check the SSL server certificate of the certification path.
4. If the Scan document certificate to the destination WebDAV server is not registered, dis-
able the certificate validation of the machine.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check the network cable connection. 1. Advise the customer to change the job conditions then try again.
2. Check the access from the PC to the Scan document destination WebDAV server. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
3. Ensure the correct network interface is selected.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to reduce the number of mail addresses. Advise the customer to send mail without setting SMTP-AUTH.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to contact the network administrator to check what SMTP authentication Advise the customer to check if the authentication information (user name/password) has been
method the server uses. set correctly.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to select the network interface that can be used. Advise the customer to split the scan data.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check the redirection settings of the WebDAV server. Advise the customer to:
1. Check the access from the PC to the scan document destination WebDAV server.
2. Check the login user name and password.
3. Check the scan document destination WebDAV server name and server path name.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check that the user name and password for the proxy server that was Advise the customer to set the processing of duplicated filenames at the time of scanning job
configured on the machine are correct. execution to anything other than Stop the Job (Not Save).
027-793 Error number 400 from the WebDAV server has been answered. 027-791 WebDAV server method not allowed.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to correct the settings, then repeat the operation. 1. Advise the customer to specify the output destination that can be processed by the
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4. machine, then repeat the operation.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to check whether or not there is free space in the storage location.
1. Advise the customer to select another document, then repeat the operation.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Install a new fuser, PL 10.05 Item 2. Perform the steps that follow:
1. Reload the relevant paper tray.
2. Set the specified paper on the specified tray.
3. If the fault persists, perform the steps that follow:
a. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
b. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL
3.10 Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both
PWBs are securely connected.
c. Reload the software, GP 4.
029-701 The response from the server does not meet the specifications of the WebDAV. Procedure
Advise the customer to retry the same operation.
Procedure
Advise the customer to:
1. Ensure that the WebDAV server is up and running.
2. Verify the configuration of the server.
3. Check the access from the PC to the scan document destination WebDAV server.
Procedure
Advise the customer to check whether the URL information of the PACFile in the DHCP server
is correctly registered.
Procedure
Advise the customer to confirm the server setting and connection status.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. If the fault persists, advise the customer to contact the System Administrator.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to switch off the fax send billing function or change to a single-line instal- Perform dC301 NVM initialization.
lation.
033-320 The system side did not respond within the specified time on booting.
033-321 The fax card did not respond within the specified time on booting.
033-327 During fax communication, the FCM stopped responding and even though a commu-
nication interrupt request was issued to the FCM, it remained unresponsive.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional fax fault finding procedures, refer to 020A Fax Entry RAP.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Check that the telephone cables and network cable are securely connected.
3. Ensure that the fax PWBs, PL 20.05 are installed correctly.
033-331 The initialization process with the FoIP controller has failed. Procedure
Perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
033-332 The FoIP controller did not respond within the specified time on booting.
033-333 The FoIP controller did not respond within the specified time after entering sleep
mode.
033-335 A fault notification due to invalid fault code was received from the fax card or FoIP.
Procedure
Perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. Inform the customer that the line 3 fax kit is required.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check the status of the remote machine, If the remote machine is
good, repeat the operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check if the remote machine has the relevant function.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to request for the sender to check the remote machine for an error,
then re-send.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
033-552 When receiving G3 image data, the detected total number of error lines exceeded the
threshold value indicated in the system data.
033-578 The frame size of received command exceeded the specification value.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to request for the sender to check the remote machine for an error,
then re-send.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure 033-537 A conflict between outgoing and incoming calls has occurred and the sending was
cancelled.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check the recipient’s address, folder information, etc. then repeat
033-538 During the image processing of fax send, an error has occurred in the fax card.
the operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP. 033-539 During the image processing of fax receive, an error has occurred in the fax card.
033-540 During the image processing for fax print format, an error has occurred.
033-568 During fax communication, there was no response from the FCM for the specified
time.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to repeat the operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
033-566 The fax card is unable to call because there is no dial. 033-567 There is incorrect (illegal) data in the dial data.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: For information only. No service action necessary.
1. Advise the customer to check the address number and whether the remote party is a fax
machine.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure 033-551 When a phone or fax communication was about to end, an operation was performed
on that job.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Use a phone to establish communications, then Advise the customer to repeat the opera-
033-583 The request received a connection refused response because the target connection is
tion. temporarily out of resource.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to wait for a while, then repeat the operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to wait for the job to complete its transmission, then repeat the oper- 1. Advise the customer to consult with the operator of the remote machine on whether the
ation. wrong F Code was input.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP. 2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
033-561 TRESS and RCC cannot be performed as the operation is prohibited or a Job is in 033-569 The paper tray status is such that paper with orientation that can be output can only
progress. be supplied from the SMH.
033-562 RCC execution was put on hold as it is in the operation prohibited mode. Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
Procedure 1. Advise the customer to specify the correct paper size and check that the paper trays are
Perform the steps that follow: correctly loaded with the paper guides correctly adjusted.
1. For a single occurrence, take no action. 2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
033-570 An error due to power off during transmission. the power switch was turned off, or the 033-588 T38 packet loss causing unrecoverable error was detected.
system was reset.
Procedure
Procedure Perform the steps that follow:
Perform the steps that follow: 1. Advise the customer to wait for some of the jobs that are queued to be completed or can-
1. Advise the customer to: celled, then retry the operation.
a. Wait for a while then check the fax function settings and dial numbers, then re-send 2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
data if needed.
b. Check the self-terminal status and line status, then perform the operation again.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to request for the sender to check the remote machine for an error,
then re-send.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to request for the sender to re-send. 1. Advise the customer to:
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP. a. Repeat the operation if the fault occurs while sending.
b. Request for the sender to re-send if the fault occurs when receiving.
c. Check the remote machine for an error.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
033-718 The document was not found in the polling sending box or the specified folder.
033-719 The document was not found in the polling sending box or the specified folder.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to repeat the operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. For a single occurrence, take no action. 1. Inform the customer that the optional hard disk is required.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP. 2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
033-742 Timed out by page read close instruction (ran out of memory during manual send). 033-728 Formatting for fax auto print was aborted because the instruction for fax manual print
was sent during the operation.
Procedure
Advise the customer to delete unnecessary data from the hard disk. 033-734 Job was cancelled because fax print and fax auto report were started at the same
time.
Procedure 033-737 The fax cont detected a failure and could not continue processing the job.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to delete unnecessary data from the hard disk. 033-738 The fax cont detected an error in JBIG data during coding/decoding of the JBIG data.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
033-751 An activity report is generated during the time period where print is prohibited and
since the machine is in sleep mode, it started the process to place the report on hold.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. For a single occurrence, take no action.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
033-747 When requesting to start the service from the fax card, the job could not be generated 033-743 When receiving image data from the fax card, the conditions for sending the response
due to causes such as job number overflow. to the fax card did not match.
033-748 During service sequencing, an illegal operation was detected. 033-744 When receiving image data from the fax card, the conditions for sending the response
to the fax card did not match.
033-749 During fax formatting, the extended image data is larger than the memory reserved.
033-745 When receiving image data from the fax card, the conditions for sending the response
Procedure to the fax card did not match.
For information only. No service action necessary.
033-746 When transferring image data to the fax card, the conditions for sending the response
to the fax card did not match.
033-750 During formatting, when image data was retrieved from the fax card, even though the
image data was determined to be free from error, extension failed.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to repeat the operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
041-310 IM software control error detected. BSD-ON: BSD 1.7 Option DC Power Distribution
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause WARNING
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Perform the steps that follow: not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
3. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary: 1. Check the tray module for overcurrent and overvoltage. Repair the wiring or install new
components as necessary.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
2. After the faulty circuit has been repaired, install a new drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
BSD-ON: BSD 1.7 Option DC Power Distribution BSD-ON: BSD 10.5 Fused Paper Exit 2
041-334 Drive PWB fuse 11 open circuit was detected. 041-335 Drive PWB fuse 12 open circuit was detected.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check the finisher for overcurrent and overvoltage. Repair the wiring or install new com- 1. Check the fuser exhaust fan for overcurrent and overvoltage. Repair the wiring or install
ponents as necessary. new components as necessary.
2. After the faulty circuit has been repaired, install a new drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3. 2. After the faulty circuit has been repaired, install a new drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Fault code 041-340 Only. Enter dC131. Check that the NVM values that follow are set to 0:
• 740-016 Range Over Chain No
• 740-017 Range Over Link No
• 740-018 Range Over Chain Link
• 740-019 Range Over Value
• 740-020 Write in Progress Range Over Chain No
• 740-021 Write in Progress Range Over Link No
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Reload the software, GP 4.
3. dC301 NVM Initialization.
4. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
041-391 Finisher module fatal error was detected. 041-604 The value of the humidity sensor exceeds the upper limit.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
WARNING
2. Reload the software, GP 4.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that the fusing unit exhaust fan and the marking unit fan are operating correctly,
refer to:
• 042-330 Fuser Exhaust Fan Fail RAP.
• 043-344 Marking Fan Fail RAP.
3. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
NOTE: The temperature sensor and humidity sensor are both surface mounted on the
ESS PWB.
042-325 Main motor run fault. 042-330 Fuser exhaust fan fault.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary: Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 6 How to Check a Motor. • GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
Enter dC330 code 042-003 to run the main motor, PL 40.10 Item 1. The main motor runs. Enter dC330 code 042-050 to run the fuser exhaust fan. The fuser exhaust fan runs.
Y N Y N
Check the +24V power supply to the main motor. The power supply is good. Check the +24V power supply to the fuser exhaust fan. The power supply is good.
Y N Y N
Check the power supply circuit to the main motor. Check the power supply circuit to the fuser exhaust fan.
Check the items that follow: Check the items that follow:
• The connection between the main motor ( P/J213) and the drive PWB ( P/J405) for • The connection between the fuser exhaust fan ( P/J210) and the drive PWB ( P/
open circuit, short circuit or poor contact. J413) for open circuit, short circuit or poor contact.
• The drive gear for wear, damage or bearing blockage. • Load towards the fuser exhaust fan.
• Load towards the main motor. Install new components as necessary:
Install new components as necessary: • Fuser exhaust fan, PL 40.15 Item 4.
• Main motor, PL 40.10 Item 1. • Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
The fault may be intermittent. Check the connection between the fuser exhaust fan ( P/J210)
The fault may be intermittent. Check the connection between the main motor ( P/J213) and the and the drive PWB ( P/J413) for open circuit, short circuit or poor contact.
drive PWB ( P/J405) for open circuit, short circuit or poor contact. Install new components as necessary:
Install new components as necessary: • Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3. • ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
043-342 A rotation abnormality of the sub motor was detected. 043-343 A YMC Link Sensor detection error was detected (Mismatch of print mode and YMC
Link Sensor driven state register information).
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do WARNING
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary: death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• GP 6 How to Check a Motor. Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
Enter dC330 code 042-004 to run the sub motor. The sub motor runs. • GP 8 How to Check a Solenoid.
Y N • GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Check the +24V power supply to the sub motor. The power supply is good. Enter dC330 code 042-011 to initialise the 1st BTR. The operating link bar moves up and
Y N down.
Check the power supply circuit to the sub motor. Y N
Check the items that follow:
Check the items that follow: • The connection between the YMC link solenoid ( P/J203) and the drive PWB ( P/
• The connection between the sub motor ( P/J214) and the drive PWB ( P/J405) for J413) for open circuit, short circuit or damage.
open circuit, short circuit or damage. • The drive gears of the drive assembly for wear or damage.
• The sub motor drive gear for wear, damage or bearing blockage. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• Load towards the marking fan. • Drive assembly, PL 40.05 Item 1.
Install new components as necessary: • Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
• Sub motor, PL 40.10 Item 11.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
Check the items that follow:
The fault may be intermittent. Check the connection between the sub motor ( P/J214) and the • The YMC link sensor, PL 40.10 Item 12.
drive PWB ( P/J405) for open circuit, short circuit or damage.
• The connection between the YMC link sensor ( P/J108) and the drive PWB ( P/J407) for
Install new components as necessary:
open circuit, short circuit or damage.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
• Drive assembly, PL 40.05 Item 1.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
043-344 Marking fan fault. 044-313 M software control error was detected (PH).
Procedure Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Reload the software, GP 4.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
Enter dC330 code 042-052 to run the marking fan. The marking fan runs.
Y N
Check the +24V power supply to the marking fan. The power supply is good.
Y N
Check the power supply circuit to the marking fan.
The fault may be intermittent. Check the connection between the marking fan and the drive
PWB ( P/J410) for open circuit, short circuit or poor contact.
Install new components as necessary:
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Reload the software, GP 4.
045-311 Communication failure between ESS PWB and DRIVE PWB was detected. 045-370 ASIC register error during IBY initial DL confirmation. Fail has occurred simultane-
ously in LPHs of all colors. Possibility of common parts (board power connector, etc) error.
045-396 IO setup error of HASIC installed on drive PWB.
045-371 ASIC register error during IBY initial DL confirmation. Fail has occurred simultane-
Procedure ously in multiple LPHs (2 or 3 colors). Possibility of common parts (board power connector,
etc) error.
WARNING Procedure
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. WARNING
Perform the steps that follow: Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
2. Check the connection between the ESS PWB ( P/J1334) and the drive PWB ( P/J401).
Perform the steps that follow:
3. Install new components as necessary:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
2. Enter dC131 code 749-115 to determine which LPHs have failed. An NVM value of 1 in
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3. the bits listed below indicates a failure in the LPH of that color:
• Bit 0: Yellow LPH.
• Bit 1: Magenta LPH.
• Bit 2: Cyan LPH.
• Bit 3: Black LPH.
3. Check the LPH for debris or contamination.
4. Check the FFC cable between the LPH and the ESS PWB (Yellow: P/J1360, Magenta: P/
J1361, Cyan: P/J1362, Black: P/J1363) for open circuit, short circuit or damage.
5. Check the power supply to the LPH, Refer to 01B +5VDC Power Fault RAP.
6. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:.
• LPH, PL 60.35 Item 1.
• FFC Cable:
– FFC Cable (K), PL 60.35 Item 4.
– FFC Cable (C), PL 60.35 Item 5.
– FFC Cable (M), PL 60.35 Item 6.
– FFC Cable (Y), PL 60.35 Item 7.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause WARNING
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Perform the steps that follow:
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
2. Reload the software, GP 4. Perform the steps that follow:
3. Install new components as necessary: 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3. 2. Check the items that follow: connections:
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6. • Between the LVPS ( P/J502) and the drive PWB ( P/J400).
• Between the ESS PWB ( P/J1334) and the drive PWB ( P/J401).
3. Check the drive PWB +5V power supply line. If the +5V is not being supplied, install a
new LVPS, PL 1.10 Item 3.
4. Install new components as necessary:
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
BSD-ON: BSD 3.6 PWB Communications (ESS PWB/Drive PWB to Finisher) 047-217 Reply from the HCF was determined as a communication error.
Procedure
Check the fault history, dC122 for any tray faults. Perform the relevant procedures.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. If the fault persists, install a new drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
057-316 Drive PWB fuse 16 open circuit was detected. 057-317 Drive PWB fuse 17 open circuit was detected.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check the components that follow for overcurrent and overvoltage. Repair the wiring or 1. Check the components that follow for overcurrent and overvoltage. Repair the wiring or
install new components as necessary: install a new exit gate solenoid, PL 10.22 Item 9 as necessary.
• Takeaway clutch, PL 40.10 Item 5. 2. After the faulty circuit has been repaired, install a new drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
• Bypass tray feed clutch, PL 70.40 Item 4.
• Registration clutch, PL 80.55 Item 11.
• Marking fan, PL 40.15 Item 6.
• Exit 1 offset solenoid, PL 10.15 Item 11.
• Duplex clutch, PL 80.50 Item 28.
2. After the faulty circuit has been repaired, install a new drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
058-311 At warm up, the heat roll thermistor temperature has exceeded the check tempera-
ture.
058-318 After inspection start, the side temperature rises from the measurement start temper-
ature to the target temperature sooner than the specified time.
058-319 The heater assessment time has arrived, the center temperature or side temperature
is the setting value or less.
058-320 The side temperature does not rise to the measurement start temperature within the
specified time from the inspection start.
058-321 The side temperature does not rise from the measurement start temperature to the
target temperature within the specified time from the inspection start.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Remove the fuser. Check whether foreign substances or paper is wound around the heat
roll.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. (Fault code 058-310 only) Check the heat roll NC sensor for correct installation and
loose connections.
3. (Fault code 058-311 only) Check the heat roll thermistor for correct installation and loose
connections.
4. (Fault code 058-319 only) Check the heater for a wiring error.
5. (Fault code 058-320 only) Check the main heater rod for open circuit or poor contact.
6. (Fault code 058-321 only) Check the sub heater rod for open circuit or poor contact.
7. Ensure that the fuser is installed correctly and is the correct voltage for the region.
8. Check the drawer connector between the fuser ( DJ612) and the main unit ( DP612) for
damage.
9. Check the connections and wiring between the fuser ( DJ612) and the LVPS ( P2) for an
open circuit, short circuit or poor contact.
059-326 The system detected an open circuit of the heat roll thermistor. 059-372 Abnormal temperature monitor AD value of the heat roll NC sensor was detected 10
consecutive times.
Initial Actions
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do WARNING
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
• Ensure that the fuser is installed correctly. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Check the drawer connector between the fuser ( DJ612) and the main unit ( DP612) for Perform the steps that follow:
damage. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
• Ensure P/J416 on the drive PWB is connected correctly. 2. Ensure that the fuser is installed correctly.
3. Check the drawer connector between the fuser ( DJ612) and the main unit ( DP612) for
Procedure damage.
Remove the fuser. Measure the resistance between DJ612S pin 7 and pin 8 (across the heat 4. Check the connections and wiring between the fuser ( DJ612S) and the drive PWB ( P/
roll thermistor). An open circuit is measured. J416) for an open circuit, short circuit or poor contact.
Y N 5. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
Check the items that follow: connections for open circuits, short circuits or poor contacts: • Fuser, PL 10.05 Item 2.
• Between DJ612S pin 8 and P/J416 pin 4 on the drive PWB. • Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
• Between DJ612S pin 7 and P/J416 pin 5 on the drive PWB. 6. After correcting the fault, reset the value of NVM location 744-003 (Differential Amplifica-
If the wiring is good, install a new drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3. tion Error Detection Flag) to 0 (Normal). Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
010-383 When transitioning from the wait state, the specified temperature is not reached within
the specified time.
NOTE: This fault may occur when the temperature in the installation environment is low (10
degrees C or lower).
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that the fuser is installed correctly.
3. Check the drawer connector between the fuser ( DJ612) and the main unit ( DP612) for
damage.
4. Check the connections and wiring between the fuser ( DJ612) and the LVPS ( P2) for an
open circuit, short circuit or poor contact.
5. Check the connections and wiring between the fuser ( DJ612S) and the drive PWB ( P/
J416) for an open circuit, short circuit or poor contact.
6. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• Fuser, PL 10.05 Item 2.
• LVPS, PL 1.10 Item 3.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
060-341 Large pixel count error between the video output and yellow LPH. Image abnormality WARNING
may occur. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
060-342 Large pixel count error between the video output and magenta LPH. Image abnormal- death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
ity may occur. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Check the connections and ribbon cable between the LPH and the ESS PWB (Yellow, P/
060-343 Large pixel count error between the video output and cyan LPH. Image abnormality J1360, Magenta P/J1361, Cyan, P/J1362, Black, P/J1363).
may occur.
3. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
060-344 Large pixel count error between the video output and black LPH. Image abnormality • LPH, PL 60.35 Item 1.
may occur. • LPH FFC:
– Black LPH FFC, PL 60.35 Item 4.
060-345 Communication error between ESS and yellow LPH. Possibly caused by an external – Cyan LPH FFC, PL 60.35 Item 5.
noise.
– Magenta LPH FFC, PL 60.35 Item 6.
060-346 Communication error between ESS and magenta LPH. Possibly caused by an exter- – Yellow LPH FFC, PL 60.35 Item 7.
nal noise. • ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
060-347 Communication error between ESS and cyan LPH. Possibly caused by an external
noise.
060-348 Communication error between ESS and black LPH. Possibly caused by an external
noise.
060-349 Yellow LPH reset due to a noise was detected. Possibly caused by an external noise.
060-350 Magenta LPH reset due to a noise was detected. Possibly caused by an external
noise.
060-351 Cyan LPH reset due to a noise was detected. Possibly caused by an external noise.
060-352 Black LPH reset due to a noise was detected. Possibly caused by an external noise.
060-353 Large pixel count error between the video output and yellow LPH. Image abnormality
may occur.
060-354 Large pixel count error between the video output and magenta LPH. Image abnormal-
ity may occur.
060-355 Large pixel count error between the video output and cyan LPH. Image abnormality
may occur.
060-356 Large pixel count error between the video output and black LPH. Image abnormality
may occur.
061-357 ASIC register error in IBY initial DL check. It may be an error in the black LPH (ASIC Procedure
or memory). It may also be an ASIC malfunction due to poor power supply or a communication
Perform the 060-341 to 060-356 LPH Fault RAP.
error due to poor connection with the ESS.
061-362 Communication error between ESS and yellow LPH (data read error from LPH). It
may occur due to external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
061-363 Communication error between ESS and magenta LPH (data read error from LPH). It
may occur due to external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
061-364 Communication error between ESS and cyan LPH (data read error from LPH). It may
occur due to external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
061-365 Communication error between ESS and black LPH (data read error from LPH). It may
occur due to external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
061-366 Communication error between ESS and yellow LPH (data write error to LPH). It may
occur due to an external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
061-367 Communication error between ESS and magenta LPH (data write error to LPH). It
may occur due to an external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
061-368 Communication error between ESS and cyan LPH (data write error to LPH). It may
occur due to an external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
061-369 Communication error between ESS and black LPH (data write error to LPH). It may
occur due to an external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
061-370 Communication error between ESS and yellow LPH (error in the communication IC or
cable). It may occur due to an external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
061-371 Communication error between ESS and magenta LPH (error in the communication IC
or cable). It may occur due to an external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply,
etc.
061-372 Communication error between ESS and cyan LPH (error in the communication IC or
cable). It may occur due to an external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
061-358 The model number of the installed yellow LPH does not match. It may also be a mem- 062-277 Communications cannot be established between the ESS PWB and the DADF PWB.
ory error in the LPH.
Procedure
061-359 The model number of the installed magenta LPH does not match. It may also be a
memory error in the LPH.
WARNING
061-360 The model number of the installed cyan LPH does not match. It may also be a mem-
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
ory error in the LPH.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
061-361 The model number of the installed black LPH does not match. It may also be a mem-
ory error in the LPH. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Check the connections and wiring between the ESS PWB ( P/J750) and the DADF PWB (
Procedure P/J751) for an open circuit, short circuit or poor contact.
3. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• DADF PWB, PL 5.10 Item 11.
WARNING • ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Check that a valid LPH is installed.
3. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• Print head assembly, PL 60.35 Item 1.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
062-345 Write failure to IEEPROM, or communication failure with EEPROM. 062-360 Any of the faults that follow was detected:
• An error with the count value of the carriage position control.
Procedure • No IIT registration sensor input during carriage initialization.
• Abnormality in detected position of IIT registration sensor.
062-389 A Carriage overrun was detected.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Procedure
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. WARNING
2. If the fault persists, install a new CCD Assembly, PL 60.10 Item 4.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
• GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Remove the document glass. Manually move the full rate carriage to right and left. The car-
riage moves smoothly, with no interference.
Y N
Check the carriage operation for mechanical load, the carriage cable for winding failure,
the rail for contamination/foreign substances, and the full rate/half rate carriage for
improper position. Refer to ADJ 60.1. Install new components as necessary, PL 60.15.
Enter dC330 code 062-212. Manually move the carriage to actuate IIT registration sensor, PL
60.30 Item 7. The display changes.
Y N
Check the IIT registration sensor. Refer to GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Enter dC330 code 062-005 (scan) or 062-006 (return) to run the IIT scan motor, PL 60.30 Item
5. The IIT scan motor runs and drives the carriage.
Y N
Check the items that follow:
• The IIT scan motor. Refer to GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
• The timing belt, PL 60.30 Item 1.
Install new components as necessary.
The fault may be intermittent. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• IIT registration sensor, PL 60.30 Item 7.
• IIT scan motor, PL 60.30 Item 5.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure 062-371 Insufficient light from Lamp detected in CCD (during white gradation correction/agc
before scan starts)
WARNING 062-380 Insufficient lamp brightness was detected when performing AGC.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
062-386 A CCD output error was detected when performing AOC.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
062-393 Write failure to the Shading Memory has occurred.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6. Initial Actions
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform ADJ 60.5 Optics Cleaning Procedure.
Procedure
1. Check the ribbon cable between the ESS PWB and the lamp assembly. If necessary,
install a new FFC LED cable assembly, PL 60.20 Item 10.
2. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• Lamp assembly, PL 60.20 Item 9.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the 060-341 to 060-356 LPH Fault RAP. Advise the customer to refer to the Legal Notices in the User Guide to check the types of docu-
ment available for copying.
BSD-ON: BSD 8.1 Tray 1 and Bypass Tray Paper Transportation BSD-ON: BSD 8.5 Registration
071-100 Paper does not actuate the tray 1 feed out sensor within the specified time after tray 1 071-105 The registration sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the registration
feed start. clutch initialized during paper feed from tray 1.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
WARNING not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. • GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary: • GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
• GP 6 How to Check a Motor. • GP 8 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch.
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor. Perform the steps that follow:
Perform the steps that follow: 1. Check for obstructions in the paper path.
1. Check for obstructions in the paper path. 2. Check the tray 1 feed roll, nudger roll and retard roll, PL 80.11 for foreign substances or
2. Check the tray 1 feed roll, nudger roll and retard roll, PL 80.11 for foreign substances or wear. Clean or install new components as necessary.
wear. Clean or install new components as necessary. 3. Enter dC330, code 077-104. Check the registration sensor, PL 80.55 Item 4.
3. Check the registration roll and takeaway roll 1, PL 80.55 for foreign substances or wear. 4. Enter dC330, code 077-002. Check the registration clutch, PL 80.55 Item 11.
Clean or install new components as necessary.
5. Enter dC330, code 077-001. Check the PH drive assembly, PL 40.10 Item 3.
4. Enter dC330, code 071-105. Check the tray 1 pre feed sensor, PL 80.10 Item 22.
6. Enter dC330, code 071-002. Check the tray 1 feed/lift up motor, PL 80.10 Item 4.
5. Enter dC330, code 071-002. Check the tray 1 feed/lift up motor, PL 80.10 Item 4.
7. Enter dC330, code 042-003. Check the main motor, PL 40.10 Item 10.
6. Check the drive gears, PL 80.10 for wear or damage. Install new components as neces- 8. Check the drive assembly, PL 40.10 Item 1 for wear or damage.
sary.
9. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
7. If the fault persists, install a new drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
071-210 Tray 1 lift NG has occurred three consecutive times. 071-212 Abnormal output AD value from tray 1 paper size sensor was detected.
BSD-ON: BSD 8.2 Tray Module Paper Transportation (STM) Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check the takeaway roll, PL 70.22 Item 13 for foreign substances or wear. Clean or install
BSD-ON: BSD 8.3 Tray Module Paper Transportation (1TM) new components as necessary.
2. Enter dC330, code 072-103. Check the tray 2 feed out sensor PL 70.22 Item 10.
BSD-ON: BSD 8.4 Tray Module Paper Transportation (3TM) 3. Enter dC330, code 072-001. Check the tray 2 feed/lift motor, PL 80.20 Item 4.
4. Enter dC330, code 077-033. Check the takeaway motor, PL 70.23 Item 4.
BSD-ON: BSD 8.9 Tray Module Paper Transportation (TTM) (1 of 2)
5. Check the drive gears, PL 80.20 for wear or damage.
072-101 Paper does not actuate the tray 2 feed out sensor within the specified time after tray 2 6. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
feed start. • 3TM PWB, PL 70.23 Item 5.
072-900 The tray 2 feed out sensor detected remaining paper. • ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
STM Checkout
Initial Actions Perform the steps that follow:
Check the condition of the paper in tray 2. Refer to GP 15 Paper and Media Size Specifications 1. Check the takeaway roll, PL 70.26 Item 4 for foreign substances or wear. Clean or install
Procedure new components as necessary.
2. Enter dC330, code 072-103. Check the tray 2 feed out sensor, PL 70.26 Item 1.
3. Enter dC330, code 072-001. Check the tray 2 feed/lift motor, PL 80.20 Item 4.
WARNING 4. Enter dC330, code 077-033. Check the takeaway motor, PL 70.28 Item 2.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do 5. Check the drive gears, PL 80.20 for wear or damage.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause 6. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• STM PWB, PL 70.28 Item 4.
Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
• GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
TTM Checkout
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Perform the steps that follow:
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check the takeaway roll, PL 80.65 Item 17 for foreign substances or wear. Clean or install
1. Check for obstructions in the paper path. new components as necessary.
2. Check the tray 2 feed roll, nudger roll and retard roll, PL 80.25 for foreign substances or 2. Enter dC330, code 072-103. Check the tray 2 feed out sensor, PL 80.65 Item 7.
wear. Clean or install new components as necessary.
3. Enter dC330, code 072-001. Check the tray 2 feed/lift motor, PL 80.20 Item 4.
3. Perform the relevant procedure:
4. Enter dC330, code 077-033. Check the take away motor, PL 70.85 Item 2.
• 1TM Checkout
5. Check the drive gears, PL 80.20 for wear or damage.
• 3TM Checkout
6. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• STM Checkout
• TTM PWB, PL 70.90 Item 1.
• TTM Checkout
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
1TM Checkout
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check the takeaway roll, PL 80.15 Item 19 for foreign substances or wear. Clean or install
new components as necessary.
2. Enter dC330, code 072-103. Check the tray 2 feed out sensor, PL 80.15 Item 22.
3. Enter dC330, code 072-001. Check the tray 2 feed/lift motor, PL 80.20 Item 4.
4. Enter dC330, code 077-033. Check the takeaway motor, PL 70.17 Item 4.
5. Check the drive gears, PL 80.20 for wear or damage.
6. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• 1TM PWB, PL 70.17 Item 5.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
072-105 The registration sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the registration BSD-ON: BSD 7.9 Tray 2 Paper Stacking (1TM)
clutch initialized during paper feed from tray 2.
BSD-ON: BSD 7.10 Tray 2 Paper Stacking (3TM)
Initial Actions
BSD-ON: BSD 7.19 Tray 2 Paper Stacking (TTM)
Check the condition of the paper in tray 2. Refer to GP 15 Paper and Media Size Specifications
BSD-ON: BSD 7.3 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensing (1TM) BSD-ON: BSD 8.4 Tray Module Paper Transportation (3TM)
BSD-ON: BSD 7.4 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensing (3TM) BSD-ON: BSD 7.20 Tray 3 Paper Stacking (TTM)
BSD-ON: BSD 7.16 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensing (TTM) BSD-ON: BSD 8.9 Tray Module Paper Transportation (TTM) (1 of 2)
072-212 Abnormal output AD value from tray 2 paper size sensor was detected. 073-101 Paper does not actuate the tray 3 feed out sensor within the specified time after tray 2
feed start.
Procedure
073-900 The tray 3 feed out sensor detected remaining paper.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
• GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
• GP 8 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check for obstructions in the paper path.
2. Check the tray 3 feed roll, nudger roll and retard roll, PL 80.25 for foreign substances or
wear. Clean or install new components as necessary.
3. Enter dC330, code 077-104. Check the registration sensor, PL 80.55 Item 4.
4. Enter dC330, code 077-002. Check the registration clutch, PL 80.55 Item 11.
5. Enter dC330, code 077-001. Check the PH Drive assembly, PL 40.10 Item 3.
6. Enter dC330, code 077-033. As necessary, perform the steps that follow:
• Check the 3TM takeaway motor, PL 70.23 Item 4.
• Check the TTM takeaway motor, PL 70.85 Item 2.
7. Check the drive gears, PL 80.10 for wear or damage. Install new components as neces-
sary.
8. Check the drive assembly, PL 40.10 Item 1 for wear or damage.
9. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• 3TM PWB, PL 70.23 Item 5.
• TTM PWB, PL 70.90 Item 1.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Initial Actions
• Check for obstructions behind the tray.
• Ensure that the tray is loaded correctly.
• Ensure the tray is pushed fully home.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
• GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Enter dC330, code 073-102. Check the tray 3 level sensor, PL 80.20 Item 6.
2. Enter dC330, code 073-002. Check the tray 3 feed/lift up motor, PL 80.20 Item 4.
3. Enter dC330, code 042-003. Check the main motor,PL 40.10 Item 10.
4. Check the drive gears, PL 80.20 for wear or damage. Install new components as neces-
sary.
5. (3TM Only) Check the drive system between the bottom plate and the tray 3 feed/lift
motor for operation failure. Install new components as necessary, PL 70.20.
6. (TTM Only) Check the drive system between the bottom plate and the tray 3 feed/lift
motor for operation failure. Also check the bottom plate lift mechanism. Install new com-
ponents as necessary, PL 70.66.
7. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• 3TM PWB, PL 70.23 Item 5.
• TTM PWB, PL 70.90 Item 1.
BSD-ON: BSD 7.17 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensing (TTM) BSD-ON: BSD 8.4 Tray Module Paper Transportation (3TM)
073-212 Abnormal output AD value from tray 3 paper size sensor was detected. BSD-ON: BSD 8.10 Tray Module Paper Transportation (TTM) (2 of 2)
Procedure 074-101 Paper does not actuate the tray 4 feed out sensor within the specified time after tray 2
feed start.
WARNING 074-103 The tray 4 feed out sensor detected remaining paper.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
074-900 The tray 4 feed out sensor detected remaining paper.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Initial Actions
Perform the steps that follow:
Check the condition of the paper in tray 4. Refer to GP 15 Paper and Media Size Specifications
1. Load the correct paper in tray 3.
2. Ensure that the customer is programming the job correctly.
Procedure
3. Perform the relevant procedure:
• 3TM Checkout
• TTM Checkout WARNING
3TM Checkout Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Perform the steps that follow: not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove tray 3. Check underneath the tray for damage to the link mechanism. Also check
the actuator at the rear of tray 3. If necessary, install a new tray assembly, PL 70.10 Item Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
1. • GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
2. Enter dC140 Analog Monitor, code 073-200. Check the tray 3 size sensor, PL 70.22 Item • GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
9. Perform the steps that follow:
3. Check the wiring between the tray 3 size sensor and J549 on the 3TM PWB. 1. Check for obstructions in the paper path.
4. Reload the software, GP 4. 2. Check the tray 4 feed roll, nudger roll and retard roll, PL 80.25 for foreign substances or
5. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary: wear. Clean or install new components as necessary.
• Tray 3 size sensor, PL 70.22 Item 9. 3. Perform the relevant procedure:
• 3TM PWB, PL 70.23 Item 5. • 3TM Checkout
TTM Checkout • TTM Checkout
Perform the steps that follow: 3TM Checkout
1. Remove tray 3. Check the actuator at the rear of tray 3. If necessary, install a new tray Perform the steps that follow:
assembly, PL 70.66 Item 1. 1. Check the tray 4 takeaway roll, PL 70.22 Item 13 for foreign substances or wear. Clean or
2. Enter dC140 Analog Monitor, code 073-200. Check the tray 3 size sensor, PL 70.80 Item install new components as necessary.
1. 2. Enter dC330, code 074-103. Check the tray 4 feed out sensor PL 70.22 Item 10.
3. Check the wiring between the tray 3 size sensor and J549 on the TTM PWB. 3. Enter dC330, code 074-001. Check the tray 3 feed/lift motor, PL 80.20 Item 4.
4. Reload the software, GP 4. 4. Enter dC330, code 077-033. Check the takeaway motor, PL 70.23 Item 4.
5. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary: 5. Check the drive gears, PL 80.20 for wear or damage.
• Tray 3 size sensor, PL 70.80 Item 1. 6. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• TTM PWB, PL 70.90 Item 1. • 3TM PWB, PL 70.23 Item 5.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
• GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
• GP 8 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check for obstructions in the paper path.
2. Check the tray 4 feed roll, nudger roll and retard roll, PL 80.25 for foreign substances or
wear. Clean or install new components as necessary.
3. Enter dC330, code 077-104. Check the registration sensor, PL 80.55 Item 4.
4. Enter dC330, code 077-002. Check the registration clutch, PL 80.55 Item 11.
5. Enter dC330, code 077-001. Check the PH Drive assembly, PL 40.10 Item 3.
6. (3TM Only) Enter dC330, code 077-033. Check the 3TM takeaway motor, PL 70.23 Item
4.
7. (TTM Only) Enter dC330, code 077-035. Check the TTM takeaway motor 2, PL 70.85
Item 2.
8. Check the drive gears, PL 80.10 for wear or damage. Install new components as neces-
sary.
9. Check the main drive assembly, PL 40.10 Item 1 for wear or damage.
10. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• 3TM PWB, PL 70.23 Item 5.
• TTM PWB, PL 70.90 Item 1.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
BSD-ON: BSD 7.21 Tray 4 Paper Stacking (TTM) BSD-ON: BSD 7.21 Tray 4 Paper Stacking (TTM)
074-210 Tray 4 lift NG has occurred three consecutive times. 074-212 Abnormal output AD value from tray 4 paper size sensor was detected.
7. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary: 1. Remove tray 4. Check the actuator at the rear of tray 4. If necessary, install a new tray
assembly, PL 70.67 Item 1.
• 3TM PWB, PL 70.23 Item 5.
2. Enter dC140 Analog Monitor, code 074-200. Check the tray 4 size sensor, PL 70.80 Item
• TTM PWB, PL 70.90 Item 1.
1.
3. Check the wiring between the tray 4 size sensor and J549 on the TTM PWB.
4. Reload the software, GP 4.
5. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• Tray 4 size sensor, PL 70.80 Item 1.
• TTM PWB, PL 70.90 Item 1.
BSD-ON: BSD 8.5 Registration 077-101 The trail edge of the paper does not deactuate the registration sensor within the spec-
ified time after the registration clutch is energized.
075-135 Paper does actuate the registration sensor in the specified time after the registration
clutch is energized when feeding from the bypass tray. 077-900 The registration sensor detected remaining paper.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary: Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor. • GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
• GP 8 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch. • GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check for obstructions in the paper path. 1. Check for obstructions in the paper path.
2. Check the bypass tray feed roll, bypass tray nudger roll and retard pad, PL 70.40 foreign 2. Check the registration roll and takeaway roll 1, PL 80.55 for foreign substances or wear.
substances or wear. Clean or install new components as necessary. Clean or install new components as necessary.
3. Check the registration roll and takeaway roll 1, PL 80.55 for foreign substances or wear. 3. Enter dC330, code 077-104. Check the registration sensor, PL 80.55 Item 4.
Clean or install new components as necessary. 4. Enter dC330, code 042-003. Check the main motor, PL 40.10 Item 10.
4. Enter dC330, code 077-104. Check the registration sensor, PL 80.55 Item 4. 5. Enter dC330, code 077-002. Check the registration clutch, PL 80.55 Item 11.
5. Enter dC330, code 077-002. Check the registration clutch, PL 80.55 Item 11. 6. Check the drive assembly, PL 40.10 Item 1 for wear or damage.
6. Enter dC330, code 075-001. Check the bypass tray feed clutch, PL 70.40 Item 4. 7. Check the registration transport assembly, PL 80.55 Item 1 for wear or damage.
7. Enter dC330, code 077-001. Check the PH Drive assembly, PL 40.10 Item 3. 8. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
8. Check the main drive assembly, PL 40.10 Item 1 for wear or damage. • Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
9. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary: • ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
077-104 The trail edge of the paper deactuated the fuser exit sensor earlier than the specified 077-105 The trail of the paper was late from the exit 2 sensor.
time.
077-109 The fuser exit sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the registration Initial Actions
clutch energized. Check the condition of the paper in all trays. Refer to GP 15 Paper and Media Size Specifica-
tions
077-113 The trail edge of the paper deactuated the fuser exit sensor later than the specified
time.
Procedure
077-901 The fuser exit sensor detected remaining paper.
Initial Actions
WARNING
• Check the condition of the paper in all trays. Refer to GP 15 Paper and Media Size Spec-
ifications Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
• Ensure that the fuser is installed correctly.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause • GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Perform the steps that follow:
WARNING 1. Check for obstructions in the paper path.
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot. 2. Check the exit 2 roll and nip rolls, PL 10.22 for foreign substances or wear. Clean or
install new components as necessary.
Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
3. Enter dC330, code 077-100. Check the exit 2 sensor, PL 10.21 Item 12.
• GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
4. Enter dC330, code 077-014. Check the exit 2 motor, PL 10.21 Item 4.
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
5. Check the exit 2 drive gears, PL 10.21 for wear or damage.
Perform the steps that follow:
6. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
1. Check for obstructions in the paper path.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
2. Check the exit 2 roll and nip rolls, PL 10.22 for foreign substances or wear. Clean or
install new components as necessary. • ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
3. Remove the fuser. Check whether foreign substances or paper is wound around the heat
roll.
4. Enter dC330, code 077-101. Check the fuser exit sensor, part of the fuser, PL 10.05 Item
2.
5. Enter dC330, code 042-003. Check the main motor, PL 40.10 Item 10.
6. Enter dC330, code 077-014. Check the exit 2 motor, PL 10.21 Item 4.
7. Enter dC330, code 077-002. Check the registration clutch, PL 80.55 Item 11.
8. Check the exit 2 drive gears, PL 10.21 for wear or damage.
9. Check the registration transport assembly, PL 80.55 Item 1 for wear or damage.
10. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
BSD-ON: BSD 10.7 Duplex Transport 077-126 After actuating the fuser exit sensor, paper did not actuate the exit 2 sensor within the
specified time.
077-123 Paper does not actuate the registration sensor in the specified time after the registra-
tion clutch in energized in duplex mode. 077-902 The exit 2 sensor detected remaining paper.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary: Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
• GP 6 How to Check a Motor. • GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor. • GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
• GP 8 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch. • GP 8 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check for obstructions in the paper path. 1. Check for obstructions in the paper path.
2. Check the exit 2 roll and nip rolls, PL 10.22 for foreign substances or wear. Clean or 2. Check the exit 2 roll and nip rolls, PL 10.22 for foreign substances or wear. Clean or
install new components as necessary. install new components as necessary.
3. Check the duplex rolls and nip rolls, PL 80.50 for foreign substances or wear. Clean or 3. Remove the fuser. Check whether foreign substances or paper is wound around the heat
install new components as necessary. roll.
4. Enter dC330, code 077-104. Check the registration sensor, PL 80.55 Item 4. 4. Enter dC330, code 077-100. Check the exit 2 sensor, PL 10.21 Item 12.
5. Enter dC330, code 077-003. Check the duplex clutch, PL 80.50 Item 28. 5. Enter dC330, code 077-014. Check the exit 2 motor, PL 10.21 Item 4.
6. Enter dC330, code 042-001. Check the sub motor, PL 40.10 Item 11. 6. Enter dC330, code 077-004. Check the exit gate solenoid, PL 10.22 Item 9.
7. Enter dC330, code 077-014. Check the exit 2 motor, PL 10.21 Item 4. 7. Enter dC330, code 042-003. Check the main motor, PL 40.10 Item 10.
8. Check the duplex drive gears and belts, PL 80.50 for wear or damage. 8. Check the exit 2 drive gears, PL 10.21 for wear or damage.
9. Check the drive assembly, PL 40.10 Item 1 for wear or damage. 9. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
10. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary: • Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3. • ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
077-300 Front cover was opened during run. 077-301 L/H cover was opened during run.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary: Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 9 How to Check a Switch • GP 9 How to Check a Switch
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check the actuator on the front cover for damage. If necessary, install a new front cover, 1. Check the actuator on the L/H cover for damage. If necessary, install a new L/H cover, PL
PL 28.05 Item 2. 80.40 Item 8.
2. Enter dC330 code 077-303. Check the front cover interlock switch, PL 1.05 Item 4. 2. Enter dC330 code 077-300. Check the left hand cover interlock switch, PL 80.40 Item 1.
3. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary: 3. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• LVPS PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3. • LVPS PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4. • Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6. • ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
077-301 Tray module left cover was opened during run. 077-308 L/H high cover was opened during run.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary: Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 9 How to Check a Switch • GP 9 How to Check a Switch
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check the actuator on the tray module left cover for damage. If necessary, install a new 1. Check the actuator on the left hand transport assembly, PL 10.20 Item 2 for damage. If
tray module left cover: necessary, install a new left hand transport assembly,
• (1TM), PL 70.16 Item 6. 2. Enter dC330 code 077-302. Check the left hand high cover switch, PL 10.21 Item 3.
• (3TM), PL 70.21 Item 6. 3. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• (STM), PL 70.25 Item 2. • Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
• (TTM), PL 70.70 Item 7. • ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
2. Enter dC330, code 077-306. As necessary, perform the steps that follow:
• Check the 1TM left cover switch, PL 80.15 Item 3.
• Check the 3TM left cover switch, PL 80.30 Item 8.
• Check the STM left cover switch, PL 80.35 Item 4.
• Check the TTM left cover switch, PL 70.95 Item 18.
3. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• 1TM PWB, PL 70.17 Item 5.
• 3TM PWB, PL 70.23 Item 5.
• STM PWB, PL 70.28 Item 4.
• TTM PWB, PL 70.90 Item 1.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
077-968 The paper loaded is different from the specified paper type. BSD-ON: BSD 8.8 HCF Paper Transportation
Procedure 078-102 Paper fed from the HCF did not actuate the registration sensor within the specified
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. The fault persists. time.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. Initial Actions
Procedure
Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
• GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
• GP 8 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch.
Enter dC330, code 077-104. Manually actuate the registration sensor, PL 80.55 Item 4. The
display changes.
Y N
Check the registration sensor, PL 80.55 Item 4.
Enter dC330 code 078-093 to run the HCF takeaway motor. The motor runs.
Y N
Check the wiring between the HCF takeaway motor (JF57) and the HCF PWB (JF06).
The wiring is good.
Y N
Repair as necessary.
Check that the resistance through the HCF takeaway motor is approximately 0.8 ohms
between:
• JF57 pin 3 to pins 1 and 2.
• JF57 pin 4 to pins 5 and 6.
The resistances are good.
Y N
Install a new HCF takeaway motor, PL 70.60 Item 7.
Check the voltage between JF06 pins 9 and 10 and ground. +24V is measured.
Y N
Check the +24VDC circuit.
A B
Procedure
Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
• GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Enter dC330 code 078-101. Manually actuate the HCF feed out sensor, PL 70.55 Item 25.
The display changes.
Y N
Check the HCF feed out sensor.
Enter dC330 code 078-093 to run the HCF takeaway motor. The motor runs.
Y N
Check the wiring between the HCF takeaway motor (JF57) and the HCF PWB (JF06).
The wiring is good.
Y N
Repair as necessary.
Check that the resistance through the HCF takeaway motor is approximately 0.8 ohms
between:
• JF57 pin 3 to pins 1 and 2.
• JF57 pin 4 to pins 5 and 6.
The resistances are good.
Y N
Install a new HCF takeaway motor, PL 70.60 Item 7.
Check the voltage between JF06 pins 9 and 10 and ground. +24V is measured.
Y N
Check the +24VDC circuit.
Install a new HCF takeaway motor, PL 70.60 Item 7. If the fault persists, install a new
HCF PWB, PL 70.60 Item 9.
Check the HCF take away components. Install new components as necessary, PL 70.55.
078-219 HCF soft download fail. 078-250 HCF tray lift failure. The tray 6 level sensor is not actuated within the specified time.
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: • Check the condition of the paper in the HCF. Refer to GP 15 Paper and Media Size Spec-
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. ifications.
2. Check wires and connectors between the HCF and the IOT. • Check for obstructions in the paper tray.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. If the fault persists, install a new HCF PWB, PL 70.60 Item 9. Procedure
Refer to the procedures that follow as necessary:
• GP 6 How to Check a Motor.
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Open, then close the HCF door. The HCF lift/feed motor runs.
Y N
Check the wiring between the HCF lift/feed motor (JF58) and the HCF PWB (JF06). The
wiring is good.
Y N
Repair as necessary.
Check that the resistance through the HCF lift/feed motor is approximately 0.8 ohms
between:
• JF58 pin 3 to pins 1 and 2.
• JF58 pin 4 to pins 5 and 6.
The resistances are good.
Y N
Install a new HCF lift/feed motor, PL 80.60 Item 23.
Check the voltage between JF06 pins 3 and 4 and ground. +24V is measured.
Y N
Check the +24VDC circuit.
Install a new HCF lift/feed motor, PL 80.60 Item 23. If the fault persists, install a new HCF
PWB, PL 70.60 Item 9.
Check the installation of the HCF stack height sensor, PL 80.61 Item 19 and the operation of
the actuator. The sensor and actuator are good.
Y N
Correctly install the HCF stack height sensor, or install new components as necessary,
PL 80.61.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 9 How to Check a Switch.
Enter dC330 code 078-300. Open then close the top cover, PL 70.55 Item 7 to actuate the
HCF top cover interlock switch. The display changes.
Y N
Measure the voltage between JF05 pin 2 on the HCF PWB and ground. +24V is mea-
sured.
Y N
Measure the voltage between JF05 pin 1 on the HCF PWB and ground. +24V is
measured.
Y N
Measure the voltage between JF04 pin 1 and 2 on the HCF PWB and ground.
+24VDC is measured.
Y N
Check the +24VDC circuit.
The fault could be caused by misalignment of the HCF top cover interlock switch. Ensure the
switch and HCF top cover are correctly installed. Check if the actuator is damaged, install new
components as necessary, PL 70.55.
If the fault persists, install a new components as necessary:
• HCF PWB, PL 70.60 Item 9.
• Drive PWB, PL PL 1.10 Item 3.
078-301 HCF1 side out switch open. The HCF and the IOT were undocked.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Check that the HCF and the IOT are correctly docked.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Procedure
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 9 How to Check a Switch.
Enter dC330 code 078-301. Dock then undock the HCF to actuate the HCF1 side out switch.
The display changes.
Y N
Undock the HCF. Actuate the HCF1 side out switch, PL 70.60 Item 8. The display
changes.
Y N
Measure the voltage between JF08 pin 2 on the HCF PWB and ground. The volt-
age drops to less than +1VDC when the switch is actuated
Y N
Check the wiring between:
• JF08 pin 1 on the HCF PWB and FS003 on the HCF1 side out switch.
• JF08 pin 2 on the HCF PWB and FS004 on the HCF1 side out switch.
If the wiring is good, install a new HCF1 side out switch, PL 70.60 Item 8.
Check the alignment of the HCF docking base and the IOT.
The fault may be intermittent. Check HCF1 side out switch wiring. If the fault persists, install
new components as necessary:
• HCF1 side out switch, PL 70.60 Item 8.
• HCF PWB, PL 70.60 Item 9.
Install a new IBT belt unit, PL 90.40 Item 3. After installing a new IBT belt unit, enter dC135
code 954-820 to reset the HFSI value for the BTR Unit. If the fault persists install a new drive
PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4. Enter dC675, perform the registration control setup cycle.
Procedure 089-609 During the magenta B (rough adjustment pattern) patch detection, the patch at the
MOB ADC Out Sensor did not satisfy the defined number of valid sample blocks.
089-610 During the cyan B (rough adjustment pattern) patch detection, the patch at the MOB
WARNING
ADC In Sensor did not satisfy the defined number of valid sample blocks.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause 089-612 During the cyan B (rough adjustment pattern) patch detection, the patch at the MOB
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. ADC Out Sensor did not satisfy the defined number of valid sample blocks.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor. 089-613 During the black B (rough adjustment pattern) patch detection, the patch at the MOB
Perform the steps that follow: ADC In Sensor did not satisfy the defined number of valid sample blocks.
1. Check the applicable MOB ADC sensor for contamination, open circuits, short circuits or
089-615 During the black B (rough adjustment pattern) patch detection, the patch at the MOB
damage:
ADC Out Sensor did not satisfy the defined number of valid sample blocks.
2. If the fault persists, install a new MOB ADC sensor assembly, PL 90.40 Item 6.
3. Enter dC675, perform the registration control setup cycle. Initial Actions
Enter dC125, if multiple chain 89 faults are indicated, refer to Chain 089 Entry RAP to deter-
mine the highest priority fault.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Check the wiring between the drive PWB and the applicable MOB ADC sensor for open cir-
cuits, short circuits or damage. The connection is good.
Y N
Reconnect or repair the wiring between the drive PWB and the MOB ADC sensor.
Check the magnet roll at the applicable MOB ADC sensor position for contamination, damage
or distortion. The magnet roll is good.
Correction item
Minimum Maximum
Fast Scan Margin -90 +90
Slow Scan Margin -4720 +4720
Skew -800 +800
Fast Scan Margin or Slow Scan Margin have reached the minimum or maximum adjust-
ment value.
Y N
Check the position of the drum cartridge of each color. The drum cartridge positions
are good.
Y N
Correctly position all drum cartridges.
Check if Fast Scan Margin or Slow Scan Margin have reached the minimum or maximum
adjustment value. Slow Scan Margin has reached the minimum or maximum adjust-
ment value.
Y N
Raise/lower the LPH (Y, M, C, K) 2 to 3 times to check the LPH lift up/down mechanism.
If no fault is found, install a new LPH, PL 60.35 Item 1, as necessary.
Install a new drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4. Enter dC675, perform the registration control setup
cycle.
Procedure 089-674 The LED light amount setting value does not converge in gain correction of the MOB
Enter dC131, check the NVM values that follow: ADC In Sensor LED Brightness Correction.
• 759-319 (Lead Registration Offset).
• 759-321 (Side 1 Registration Offset). 089-676 The LED light amount setting value does not converge in gain correction of the MOB
ADC Out Sensor LED Brightness Correction.
• 759-322 (Side 2 Registration Offset).
089-677 An error occurs in the output voltage value of the IBT Belt Sensor during MOB ADC In
Sensor LED Brightness Correction.
089-679 An error occurs in the output voltage value of the IBT Belt Sensor during MOB ADC
Out Sensor LED Brightness Correction.
Initial Actions
Enter dC125, if multiple chain 89 faults are indicated, refer to Chain 089 Entry RAP to deter-
mine the highest priority fault.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor.
Check the wiring between the drive PWB and the applicable MOB ADC sensor for open cir-
cuits, short circuits or damage. The connection is good.
Y N
Reconnect or repair the wiring between the drive PWB and the MOB ADC sensor.
Check the IBT Belt, PL 90.45, at the applicable MOB ADC Sensor position for damage and dis-
tortion. The IBT Belt is good.
Y N
Install a new IBT belt unit, PL 90.45 Item 1. Enter dC135 code 954-820 to reset the HFSI
value for the BTR Unit.
Check the detection area of the applicable MOB ADC sensor for obstruction or contamination.
The MOB ADC sensor is good.
Y N
Clean the detection area of the MOB ADC sensor.
A
Status Indicator RAPs December 2017
089-617, 089-623, 629, 674, 676, 677, 679 2-492 Xerox® VersaLink® C7000 Color Printer & C7030 Family Color Multifunction
A
Install a new MOB ADC sensor assembly, PL 90.40 Item 6. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Install a new IBT belt unit, PL 90.45 Item 1. After installing a new IBT belt unit, enter dC135
code 954-820 to reset the HFSI value for the BTR Unit. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
If the fault persists, install a new drive PWB PL 1.10 Item 4. Enter dC675, perform the registra-
tion control setup cycle.
091-921 Black Drum cartridge CRUM is not installed in the correct position.
091-927 Yellow Drum cartridge CRUM is not installed in the correct position.
091-928 Magenta Drum cartridge CRUM is not installed in the correct position.
091-929 Cyan Drum cartridge CRUM is not installed in the correct position.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Remove, then reinstall the drum cartridge.
3. Check the drum cartridge CRUM connector for damage and contamination.
4. Check the wiring between the drum cartridge CRUM and the drive PWB for an open cir-
cuit, short circuit or poor contact:
• Check the wiring between the black drum cartridge CRUM, P/J109, and the drive
PWB, P/J409.
• Check the wiring between the yellow drum cartridge CRUM, P/J112, and the drive
PWB, P/J409.
• Check the wiring between the magenta drum cartridge CRUM, P/J111, and the
drive PWB, P/J409.
• Check the wiring between the cyan drum cartridge CRUM, P/J110, and the drive
PWB, P/J409.
5. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• Black drum cartridge, PL 90.20 Item 5.
• Yellow drum cartridge, PL 90.20 Item 8.
• Magenta drum cartridge, PL 90.20 Item 7.
• Cyan drum cartridge, PL 90.20 Item 6.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
091-411 Yellow drum cartridge is near end of life. 091-424 Black drum cartridge end of life.
091-421 Magenta drum cartridge is near end of life. 091-480 Yellow drum cartridge over end of life.
091-431 Cyan drum cartridge is near end of life. 091-481 Magenta drum cartridge over end of life.
091-406 Black drum cartridge is near end of life. 091-482 Cyan drum cartridge over end of life.
091-416 Yellow drum cartridge is near end of life. 091-913 Black drum cartridge end of life.
091-944 Invalid authentication area data of magenta drum cartridge CRUM detected.
091-945 Invalid authentication area data of cyan drum cartridge CRUM detected.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Remove, then reinstall the drum cartridge.
2. If the fault persists, install a genuine Xerox drum cartridge:
• Black drum cartridge, PL 90.20 Item 5.
• Yellow drum cartridge, PL 90.20 Item 8.
• Magenta drum cartridge, PL 90.20 Item 7.
• Cyan drum cartridge, PL 90.20 Item 6.
Procedure 092-313 Toner density in the developer unit as detected by the magenta ATC sensor abnor-
mal. This fault occurs when the difference between the maximum and minimum values in the
ATC sensor measurement set is lower than the threshold value.
WARNING
092-314 Toner density in the developer unit as detected by the cyan ATC sensor abnormal.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do This fault occurs when the difference between the maximum and minimum values in the ATC
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause sensor measurement set is lower than the threshold value.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary: 092-315 Toner density in the developer unit as detected by the black ATC sensor abnormal.
• GP 7 How to Check a Sensor. This fault occurs when the difference between the maximum and minimum values in the ATC
Check the wiring between the drive PWB and the applicable MOB ADC sensor for open cir- sensor measurement set is lower than the threshold value.
cuits, short circuits or damage. The connection is good.
Y N 092-657 Toner density in the developer unit as detected by the yellow ATC sensor abnormal.
Reconnect or repair the wiring between the drive PWB and the MOB ADC sensor. This fault occurs when the difference between the maximum and minimum values in the ATC
sensor measurement set is lower than the threshold value.
Install new parts as necessary:
092-658 Toner density in the developer unit as detected by the magenta ATC sensor abnor-
• MOB ADC sensor assembly, PL 90.40 Item 6. Enter dC675, perform the registration con-
mal. This fault occurs when the difference between the maximum and minimum values in the
trol setup cycle
ATC sensor measurement set is lower than the threshold value.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
• IBT belt unit, PL 90.45 Item 1. 092-659 Toner density in the developer unit as detected by the cyan ATC sensor abnormal.
This fault occurs when the difference between the maximum and minimum values in the ATC
NOTE: Following installation of the new IBT belt unit, enter dC135 code 954-820 to reset
sensor measurement set is lower than the threshold value.
the HFSI value for the BTR Unit
• LVPS, PL 1.10 Item 3. 092-660 Toner density in the developer unit as detected by the black ATC sensor abnormal.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6. This fault occurs when the difference between the maximum and minimum values in the ATC
sensor measurement set is lower than the threshold value.
092-665 Toner density in the developer unit as detected by the yellow ATC sensor abnormal.
This fault occurs when the average value of the ATC sensor measurement values is not
between the upper and lower limit values.
092-666 Toner density in the developer unit as detected by the magenta ATC sensor abnor-
mal. This fault occurs when the average value of the ATC sensor measurement values is not
between the upper and lower limit values.
092-667 Toner density in the developer unit as detected by the cyan ATC sensor abnormal.
This fault occurs when the average value of the ATC sensor measurement values is not
between the upper and lower limit values.
092-668 Toner density in the developer unit as detected by the black ATC sensor abnormal.
This fault occurs when the average value of the ATC sensor measurement values is not
between the upper and lower limit values.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
NOTE: Following installation of the new IBT belt unit, enter dC135 code 954-820 to 092-912 The magenta toner cartridge became empty during new cartridge period.
reset the HFSI value for the BTR Unit
092-913 The cyan toner cartridge became empty during new cartridge period.
• IBT cleaner, PL 90.45 Item 2.
• Toner cartridge: 092-914 The black toner cartridge became empty during new cartridge period.
– Black toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 13.
– Yellow toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 10. Procedure
– Magenta toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 11. Perform the steps that follow:
– Cyan toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 12. 1. Remove the toner cartridge. Shake, then reinstall the toner cartridge.
• Drum cartridge: 2. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
– Black drum cartridge, PL 90.20 Item 5. • Black toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 13.
– Yellow drum cartridge, PL 90.20 Item 8. • Yellow toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 10.
– Magenta drum cartridge, PL 90.20 Item 7. • Magenta toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 11.
– Cyan drum cartridge, PL 90.20 Item 6. • Cyan toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 12.
• LPH, PL 60.35 Item 1.
• LPH FFC:
– Black LPH FFC, PL 60.35 Item 4.
– Cyan LPH FFC, PL 60.35 Item 5.
– Magenta LPH FFC, PL 60.35 Item 6.
– Yellow LPH FFC, PL 60.35 Item 7.
• HVPS, PL 1.05 Item 7.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
093-337 Magenta toner CRUM authentication IC communication error. 093-408 Magenta toner cartridge is near end of life.
093-338 Cyan toner CRUM authentication IC communication error. 093-409 Cyan toner cartridge is near end of life.
093-916 Black Toner cartridge CRUM is not installed in the predetermined position.
093-423 Yellow toner cartridge is near end of life.
093-970 Yellow toner cartridge CRUM is not installed in the predetermined position.
093-424 Magenta toner cartridge is near end of life.
093-971 Magenta toner cartridge CRUM is not installed in the predetermined position.
093-972 Cyan toner cartridge CRUM is not installed in the predetermined position. 093-425 Cyan toner cartridge is near end of life.
Procedure Procedure
Information only. No service action necessary. Advise the customer that the toner cartridge is
almost empty.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Remove, then reinstall the toner cartridge.
3. Check the toner cartridge CRUM connector for damage and contamination. Use a dry
cloth to wipe the joining terminal between the toner cartridge CRUM PWB and the con-
nector assembly.
4. Check the wiring between the drive PWB Yellow/Magenta connector ( P/J412) or Black/
Cyan connector ( P/J411) and the cyan ( P/J114), magenta ( P/J115), yellow ( P/J116), or
black ( P/J113), toner CRUM connector assembly for an open circuit, short circuit or poor
contact.
5. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• Toner cartridge:
– Black toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 13.
– Yellow toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 10.
– Magenta toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 11.
– Cyan toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 12.
• Toner CRUM connector assembly:
– Black CRUM connector assembly, PL 90.15 Item 7.
– Yellow CRUM connector assembly, PL 90.15 Item 10.
– Magenta CRUM connector assembly, PL 90.15 Item 9.
– Cyan CRUM connector assembly, PL 90.15 Item 8.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure
Install a new developer unit:
• Black developer unit, PL 90.05 Item 9. Enter dC135 code 954-833 to reset the HFSI value
for the black developer unit.
• Yellow developer unit, PL 90.05 Item 6. Enter dC135 code 954-830 to reset the HFSI
value for the yellow developer unit.
• Magenta developer unit, PL 90.05 Item 7. Enter dC135 code 954-831 to reset the HFSI
value for the magenta developer unit.
• Cyan developer unit, PL 90.05 Item 8. Enter dC135 code 954-832 to reset the HFSI value
for the cyan developer unit.
093-960 Invalid authentication area data of yellow toner cartridge CRUM detected.
093-961 Invalid authentication area data of magenta toner cartridge CRUM detected.
093-962 Invalid authentication area data of cyan toner cartridge CRUM detected.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Remove, then reinstall the toner cartridge.
2. If the fault persists, install a genuine Xerox toner cartridge:
• Black toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 13.
• Yellow toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 10.
• Magenta toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 11.
• Cyan toner cartridge, PL 90.05 Item 12.
094-417 IBT is near end of life. 094-422 2nd BTR unit end of life.
099-396 The centre temperature does not reach the required threshold within the specified
time.
099-397 The centre temperature does not reach the required threshold within the specified
time.
099-398 The centre temperature reaches the required threshold faster the specified time.
099-399 The centre temperature is detected as higher than the specified level.
Procedure
Perform the following procedures as necessary:
• 010-327 Fusing On Time Fail RAP.
• 010-334, 010-335 Heat Roll NC Sensor Fail RAP.
102-312 It was detected that MAC address of another M/C was recorded in the dongle during Procedure
the initial installation by the USB dongle.
102-313 An illegal IOT speed setting key was detected during the initial installation by the USB WARNING
dongle.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
102-314 Setting the IOT speed setting key failed during the initial installation by the USB don-
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
gle.
Perform the steps that follow:
102-315 Setting the SW Key failed during the initial installation by the USB dongle. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
102-316 Setting the supply setting failed during the initial installation by the USB dongle. Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
102-317 Setting the page pack failed during the initial installation by the USB dongle. 3. Initialise the hard disk, refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics.
4. Reload the software, GP 4.
102-318 Setting the country code failed during the initial installation by the USB dongle.
5. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
102-319 The NVM rewriting list process failed during the initial installation by the USB dongle. 6. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Ensure the USB dongle is installed correctly.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
3. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
4. Reload the software, GP 4.
5. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
6. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
103-312 The secure watermark kit cannot be made available because the hybrid watermark WARNING
detection hardware for document side 2 is not installed.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
103-313 The secure watermark kit did not become available because of insufficient IISS exten-
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
sion memory.
Perform the steps that follow:
Procedure 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
For information only. No service action necessary. 2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
3. Initialise the hard disk, refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics.
4. Reload the software, GP 4.
5. If the fault persists, install new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure
Advise the customer to empty the punch debris bin.
116-211 Connection cable disconnected. 116-220 The downloader software that processes downloads within the ESS failed to initialize
during transition into download mode.
Procedure
116-310 An error was detected when the ESS font ROM DIMM #2 was checked.
WARNING 116-311 A fail is detected during a check of ESS font ROM DIMM #3.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Procedure
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
WARNING
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
securely connected.
Perform the steps that follow:
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
WARNING not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Perform the steps that follow:
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Advise the customer to check that the TCP/IP ports are correctly configured.
Perform the steps that follow:
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
1. Initialise the hard disk, refer to dC355 Image Disk Diagnostics.
3. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
2. When the system has been recovered, advise the customer to set a correct HDD encryp- Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
tion key. securely connected.
4. Reload the software, GP 4.
5. Perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
6. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
116-322 Due to an error in software processing, subsequent processes cannot be performed. Initial Actions
116-323 During a read/write check at power on, OS/DD detects an error with the ESS-NVRAM NOTE: This fault can be caused by a corrupt print job.
board. 1. Switch off the machine, GP 10.
2. Disconnect the network cable.
116-328 A failure was detected in the level 2 cache built in the CPU.
3. Switch on the machine GP 10.
116-329 A system call error related to the serial I/F was detected. • If the fault persists continue with the Procedure below.
• If the fault clears connect the network cable, then continue with Initial Actions from
116-338 Overall JBA fatal error. Due to an error in software processing, subsequent processes step 4.
cannot be performed.
4. Use the Embedded Web Sever (EWS) to print a test page. From the EWS Home page
under Quick Links select Submit File, select a file (note the on screen specified file for-
Procedure mats), then touch Submit.
a. If the job prints, advise the customer to inform their IT department that there could be
a corrupt print job causing the fault and to ensure all user of the device are using the
WARNING
correct print driver when submitting print jobs.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
b. If the fault persists continue with the Procedure below.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 WARNING
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
4. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
Perform the steps that follow:
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 and the hard disk.
5. Initialise the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Hard Disk Diagnostics.
6. Initialize the Sys - System NVM, refer to dC301.
7. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
WARNING 116-337 Overall SNTP fatal error. Due to an error in software processing, subsequent pro-
cesses cannot be performed.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
116-339 When the JBA is started up, the HDD is not installed.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Perform the 016-210, 506, 777, 780, 798 HDD Error RAP.
2. Check the wiring between P/J311 on the ESS PWB and the ESS fan for an open or short
circuit, or a loose or damaged connector.
3. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
• ESS fan, PL 3.10 Item 9.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do WARNING
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Perform the steps that follow: death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Enter dC125 Faults. If a 124-3XX fault code is also displayed, perform the relevant RAP.
3. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
4. Reload the software, GP 4.
5. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
6. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
116-342 Fatal error related to the SNMP agent. 116-346 A response such as system function recall error was detected.
116-394 Abnormal authentication mode and accounting mode settings detected during AAA 116-359 Fatal error in PLW.
manager boot sequence.
Procedure
Procedure
Reload the software, GP 4.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
116-349 An error occurred when calling the Pflite function using the SIF. 116-354 The M/C was not started up due to a product code error detected in the HDD on boot-
ing.
116-358 Fatal error related to salutation.
116-356 The M/C was not started up due to an insufficient HDD capacity error detected during
116-360 Fatal error related to SMB. HDD formatting.
116-374 Fatal error of auto SW. 116-361 Fatal error of SPL HDD.
Procedure
WARNING Perform the 016-210, 506, 777, 780, 798 HDD Error RAP.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check that the TCP/IP ports are correctly configured.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
3. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
4. Reload the software, GP 4.
5. Perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
6. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
7. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
116-363 BMLinkS/print service software failure. 116-365 Fatal error of the SPL.
116-367 Overall fatal error of Parallel. 116-366 Print utility operational failure, report generator operational failure.
116-373 Fatal error related to dynamic DNS. 116-371 PCL decomposer software failure.
Procedure 116-375 A response such as system function recall error was detected.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do WARNING
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Perform the steps that follow: death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. Perform the steps that follow:
2. Ensure that the fax USB cable is connected to the correct USB port. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016-210, 506, 777, 780, 798 HDD Error RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Initialize the NVM, refer to dC301 NVM Initialization.
WARNING
NOTE: Inform the customer that this will clear all address information. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
2. Reload the software, GP 4. not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. If the fault persists, enter dC131. Ensure NVM values 700-165, 700-338 and 700-402 are
correct. Change the values as necessary.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Reload the software, GP 4.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do WARNING
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Perform the steps that follow: death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. Perform the steps that follow:
2. Enter dC131. Ensure the value of 720-061 is higher than 720-060. Adjust the values as 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
necessary. 2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. Perform the Special Boot Mode function NVRAM INIT MODE, GP 22.
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Ensure that all paper trays are loaded with the correct media.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Reload the software, GP 4.
116-716 The MediaLib detected this error while performing the operation that requires access
to media.
116-717 The MediaLib detected this error while performing the operation that requires access
to media.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check the contents in the media for errors from the PC:
a. Check the file format/directory and selected mode (digital camera print/document
print).
b. Check whether the printed file attribute information is displayed.
c. Check whether the print file images are displayed.
d. Check whether the printed file attribute information is displayed.
e. If the fault persists, inform the customer that the media may be defective.
2. If the fault persists, inform the customer that the media may be defective.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Some of the parameters are disabled by XPIF so the machine cannot execute them. Advise
1. Reload the software, GP 4. the customer to cancel the disabled parameter(s).
2. If a HDD is installed, perform the 016-210, 506, 777, 780, 798 HDD Error RAP.
3. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
017-726 Color, single sided print attempted. Output changed to monochrome, duplex.
Procedure
Advise the customer to set the permissions as required.
017-741 The form data cannot be registered due to the restriction on the no. of forms. Procedure
Advise the customer to upgrade the driver.
017-742 The logo data cannot be registered due to the restriction on the no. of logos.
017-743 The received data (form/logo) exceeded the registered buffer size.
Procedure
Advise the customer to delete the unnecessary forms/logos. Otherwise, if not already installed,
inform the customer that the optional hard disk is required.
Procedure
Advise the customer to repeat the operation.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to add the necessary font, or specify a substitute font. Advise the customer to set the banner sheet feed tray status to normal or change the banner
sheet feed tray.
WARNING 116-774 An incorrect JBIG parameter YD was detected and automatically corrected.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
116-775 An incorrect JBIG parameter L0 was detected and automatically corrected.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
116-776 An incorrect JBIG parameter MX was detected and automatically corrected.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to: 116-777 An incorrect JBIG parameter MY was detected and automatically corrected.
a. Re-run the job.
b. Print to a machine that supports the printing instructions. 116-778 An incorrect JBIG parameter VLENGTH was detected and automatically corrected.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
116-780 The system detected an error in the document attached to the E-mail to XXX
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
Procedure
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
For information only. No service action necessary.
Procedure
Advise the customer not to cancel stapling during a job.
Procedure Procedure
Install the security enhancing kit in the correct slot.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to install the correct CRUs for the changed geographic region and con- Perform the steps that follow:
tract type. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4.
117-318 The contract manager detected that the DC command write that was performed at the Procedure
end of a PPP contract has failed.
Procedure WARNING
Advise the customer to wait for the machine to reboot. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure the SD card, PL 3.10 Item 11 is correctly installed. Also, ensure that the write pro-
tection switch, to the left of the SD card, is not enabled. If the installation of the SD card
and the write protection switch setting are good, advise the customer to rewrite the pro-
gram and font data into the SD Card. If the problem persists after the rewrite, install a new
SD card, PL 3.10 Item 11.
3. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
4. Reload the software, GP 4.
5. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
6. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
117-321 When starting, the installed SD card was detected to be unsupported by Sys- 117-326 Software fault processing of NVRAM area/access.
CheckSD.
Procedure
117-322 When starting, SD encryption error was detected by SysCheckSD. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
117-323 When starting, SD card file system access error was detected by SysCheckSD.
117-324 When the OS is starting up, the system detected that the SD card is meant for another
product and an error is issued.
117-329 When starting up, the SD card was detected to be not connected by the OS or Sys-
CheckSD.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Ensure the SD card, PL 3.10 Item 11 is the correct variant for the machine and securely
installed.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
3. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
4. Reload the software, GP 4.
5. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
6. If the fault persists, install a new components as necessary:
• SD card, PL 3.10 Item 11.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure
WARNING Perform the 016-210, 506, 777, 780, 798 HDD Error RAP.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Advise the customer to check whether HTTP and HTTPS have started up normally and
are operable.
3. Advise the customer to check that the TCP/IP ports are correctly configured.
4. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
5. Reload the software, GP 4.
6. Perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
7. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check if public print it is set to be stored as charge print.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. For a single occurrence, take no action.
2. If the fault persists, perform the steps that follow:
a. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
b. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL
3.10 Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both
PWBs are securely connected.
c. Reload the software, GP 4.
d. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
e. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
117-350 A problem has occurred in the AirPrint scan service software processing and it is WARNING
unable to continue with the subsequent processes.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Procedure death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
WARNING 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Initialize the NVM, perform dC301 NVM Initialization.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause 3. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
Perform the steps that follow:
4. Reload the software, GP 4.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure 117-363 During the initial installation by USB dongle, it fails to set the count-up mode.
Advise the customer to set the correct time and date.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure the correct USB dongle is installed.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10, 2 times if necessary. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. If the fault persists perform dC355 Initialize Hard Disk. 2. Check the connection of the WiFi dongle, PL 3.10 Item 10.
3. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. 3. If the fault persists install a new WiFi dongle, PL 3.10 Item 10.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Disconnect the FDI accessory.
2. Set the authentication method to an option other than Secure Access (either Authentica-
tion Off, Local Authentication or Remote Authentication).
3. Reconnect the FDI accessory.
117-330 The disconnect boot of related products in the product is not the correct specification.
117-332 The wake command from this machine to related products has elapsed.
117-341 Undefined accessory information was detected in the wake up answer message.
Procedure
For information only. No service actions necessary.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to correct the unit price settings in the coin kit. Switch off, then switch 1. Make any accessories are installed correctly and are the correct specification.
on the machine, GP 10. 2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. If the fault persists: 3. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
a. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
3.10 Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both securely connected.
PWBs are securely connected. 4. Reload the software, GP 4.
b. Reload the software, GP 4. 5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
c. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
123-325 The specified UI internal object could not be created due to a setting/specification 123-358 The control panel has detected that writing in the EEPROM for logging failed.
error. UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
123-362 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
123-326 The memory in the GUAM exceeded the upper limit.
123-368 There is insufficient memory or the connection failed.
123-333 The H/W connection in the UI is faulty or the internal connection could not be correctly
detected. 123-369 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
123-343 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB. 123-371 The parameter sent from the controller was incorrect.
123-344 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB. 123-374 The job ID parameter sent from the controller was incorrect.
123-350 MCW panel one-touch key fail. 123-377 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
123-352 An error internal to the con-panel (an abnormal value in EEPROM for Sys) has been 123-379 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
detected.
123-380 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
123-343 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
123-381 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
123-344 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
Procedure
123-350 MCW panel one-touch key fail.
Perform the 002-500 UI Error RAP.
123-353 The control panel has detected that the UI cable is disconnected.
Procedure
Perform the 002-500 UI Error RAP.
Procedure
Perform the 002-500 UI Error RAP.
124-344 All the billing meter types kept at multiple locations are different. Enter dC132 Device ID and Billing Data. The 3 values match.
Y N
124-380 The CRUM destinations stored in three positions match, but their values are not set Perform dC132. Make all three values the same.
(0).
Perform Software Loading via the Special Boot Menu, GP 4.
Procedure If the fault persists, install a new components as necessary:
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
3. If the fault persists, install a new components as necessary:
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
124-356 Serial number 1 point mismatch. 124-317 Stored data mismatch. Internal control error was detected.
Procedure 124-355 At least one set of territory information at the 3 locations is different.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause WARNING
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. The fault persists. not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Y N death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. The fault persists.
Y N
Enter dC132 Device ID and Billing Data. The 3 values match. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Y N
Perform dC132. Make all three values the same. Enter dC131 Compare NVM values 700-600, 700-601 and 700-602. The 3 values match.
Y N
Perform Software Loading via the Special Boot Menu, GP 4. Perform dC132. Make all three values the same.
If the fault persists, install a new components as necessary:
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6. Perform Software Loading via the Special Boot Menu, GP 4.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 If the fault persists, install a new components as necessary:
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. The fault persists. Perform the steps that follow:
Y N 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
Enter dC131. Compare NVM values 700-606, 700-607 and 700-608. The 3 values match.
Y N 3. Reload the software, GP 4.
Perform dC132. Make all three values the same. 4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. The fault persists.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
Enter dC131. Compare NVM values 700-603, 700-604 and 700-605. The 3 values match.
3. Ensure that the fax PWBs, PL 20.05 are installed correctly. Y N
NOTE: Line 2 and 3 fax PWBs are options. Perform dC132. Make all three values the same.
4. Reload the software, GP 4. Perform Software Loading via the Special Boot Menu, GP 4.
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6. If the fault persists, install a new components as necessary:
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to follow the instructions on the UI in order to enter the SW key for chang-
ing IOT speed.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Procedure Procedure
Have the customer select the punch unit according to the instruction on the UI.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6 are securely connected.
Ensure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
124-335 The installation of the font ROM was not detected. 124-390 The CRUM OEM destinations stored in three positions match but their values are not
set (0).
124-337 An error was detected in the ESS built-in standard RAM.
Procedure
124-338 The system detected that a duplicate font ROM was installed.
124-339 The system detected that the ROM DIMM for another model was installed. WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Procedure not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
WARNING
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause 2. If the fault persists, install a new drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
WARNING 124-382 One of CRUM destinations is different from the others (SYS 1).
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause 124-383 One of CRUM destinations is different from the others (SYS 2).
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: 124-392 One of CRUM OEM destinations is different from the others (SYS 1).
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
124-393 One of CRUM OEM destinations is different from the others (SYS 2).
2. Enter dC132 Device ID and Billing Data. Make all three values the same.
3. If the fault persists, install a new drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4. Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Enter dC132 Device ID and Billing Data. Make all three product numbers the same. The fault
persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
WARNING Procedure
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. WARNING
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. The fault persists. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Y N not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
Enter dC131. Compare NVM values 720-002 and 720-062. Both values are different. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
Y N
2. If the fault persists, install a new components as necessary:
Install a new drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6. • Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. The fault persists. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. The fault persists.
Y N Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Enter dC131. Compare NVM values 720-052 and 720-063. Both values are different. Enter dC131. Compare NVM values 720-057 and 720-064. Both values are different.
Y N Y N
Install a new drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4. Install a new drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
Install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
124-702 The machine changed output tray from stacker to another and continued printing. 124-706 Folding instruction was canceled and printing continued.
124-710 The machine changed output tray from sorter to another and continued printing. Procedure
Check dC120 Fault History for associated faults. Perform the relevant RAP.
Procedure
Advise the customer to use the correct paper type and size for the job.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
127-313 ESS detected a video link error. 1. To take the corrective actions based on the fault code displayed in the DFE monitor, then
reboot the system.
127-314 ESS detected a video link error. 2. Check the device settings.
3. Check the connection to the DFE.
127-315 A problem has occurred with software processing, causing the processing to stop. 4. Check the DFE hardware.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4 and the ESS PWB, PL 3.10
Item 6 are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are
securely connected.
3. Reload the software, GP 4.
4. Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP.
5. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Procedure
Have the customer:
1. Check what the SIP registration server is set to on the device.
2. Check that the SIP registration server is available.
Procedure
Perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
133-221 The fax card did not respond within the specified time on booting.
133-222 The fax card did not respond within the specified time.
Procedure
Perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
133-282 As downloading of fax card could not be completed due to either a fax card failure or
fax cont SW failure, subsequent processes could not be performed.
133-283 Mailbox not open was detected when fax report is stored in a mailbox.
Procedure
Perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Have the customer load the correct the paper size and type for fax printing or specify the
tray for fax printing.
2. If the fault persists, perform the steps that follow:
a. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
b. Reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure
Load the required number and size of documents, then re-run the routine.
Procedure
Re-run the routine.
• Power on Self Test (POST) occurs each time the machine is powered on. POST verifies Procedure
the functionality of key subsystems.
• POST begins when power is switched on before higher level machine functions (such as
the user interface) are operational. WARNING
• POST is performed by the ESS PWB. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
• The fault is communicated via an eight LED display on the ESS PWB. This is to help diag- not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
nose common faults which prevent the machine from powering up correctly to the point death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
where faults are displayed and service mode can be entered. Perform the steps that follow:
Procedure 1. Enter special boot mode, GP 22.
2. Perform the special boot modes in the order that follows:
a. LONGDIAG MODE.
WARNING b. 01. JOB LOG CLEAR MODE.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
c. 06. HDD INITIALIZE MODE.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. d. 04. HDD FORMAT MODE.
To check for the system power up error: e. 03. NVRAM INIT MODE.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10.
2. If the system power up sequence has failed, check the code on the eight LED display.
Refer to:
• BSD 3.10 ESS Status LED (1 of 5)
• BSD 3.11 ESS Status LED (2 of 5)
• BSD 3.12 ESS Status LED (3 of 5)
• BSD 3.13 ESS Status LED (4 of 5)
• BSD 3.14 ESS Status LED (5 of 5)
If the eight LED display indicates a related fault code, perform the relevant RAP. If a
related fault code is not listed, Perform the OF2 Special Boot Modes RAP. If the fault per-
sists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
Enter dC612 Print Test Patterns. Select the required internal test pattern, refer to Table 1.
Select simplex. Select Start Test. The printed image of the internal test pattern is
good.
Y N
Perform the IQ2 IOT IQ Defects RAP.
Check the back of the prints for toner contamination. The back of the prints are clean.
Y N
Perform the IQ2 IOT IQ Defects RAP.
A B
If the settings for a test pattern are wrong, the message appears: ‘Invalid parameter. Please re-
Lead edge enter’. and the Print Test Pattern cannot be performed. In this case, change the settings to
ensure that they match the requirements listed in Table 1, and repeat the test print.
Test patterns 1-11 are IOT patterns. Test patterns 51 and above are Controller patterns.
Ensure that the correct Screen settings are made for either IOT or controller.
The Paper Supply setting shows both which tray is selected, and the paper size for that tray.
Outboard For best results, select tray to match listed paper size.
edge
For Cin%, leave setting a 0% unless a range is specified. Where a range is specified, the lower
Cross the number entered, the lighter the test patter print will be.
process In process
direction direction
Trail edge
Ensure IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP is performed before starting this RAP. WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Ensure IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP is performed before starting this RAP.
Procedure
Refer to Table 1, then perform the appropriate action.
Table 1 IQ defects
Image Quality Defect Subsytem Symptom Action
2.5mm (0.1 inch) diagonal streaks Xerographics Diagonal streaks may occur due to BCR (bias charge roll) flow coating unevenness. Install a new relevant drum car-
tridge, PL 90.20.
3mm pitch line Transfer Lines occur at the rib pitch interval of holder DTS. Perform the IQ18 In Process
3mm Pitch Line RAP.
Background Xerographics The whole page or part of the page is contaminated by toner. The contamination appears as very light Perform the IQ23 Background
grayish color. RAP.
Banding (print head assembly periodi- LED printhead Narrow banding in the process direction, approximately 10.7mm (0.4 inch) apart, for any of the four Install a new relevant print head
cal line) assembly colors. assembly, PL 60.35 Item 1.
BCR pitch 38mm (1.5 inches) density Xerographics Charging failure occurs in weak contact parts which lowers the surface potential and the density of the Perform the IQ3 White Streaks,
unevenness half-tone image darkens with a BCR pitch (38mm/1.5 inches). Spots or Unevenness in BCR
Pitch Axial Direction RAP.
Caterpillar mark Transfer Removal of electricity with diselectrification material is performed in the charged state after the paper Perform the IQ13 Caterpillar
discharges the secondary transfer part. Mark (Transfer) RAP.
If the adhesion of the toner to the paper is weak and the amount of electricity removal is big, the toner
image scatters and a round shaped pattern appears continuously in the vertical direction.
Circular stamping marks Transfer When paper is peeled off by the secondary transfer, the toner which is not fused on the sheet is scat- Perform the IQ16 Circular Stamp-
tered in a semicircular arc. ing Marks RAP.
Color streaks Transfer Presence of paper dust in between the intermediate transfer belt and the cleaner blade causes poor Perform the IQ12 Color Streaks
cleaning. RAP.
Cross ghost Transfer Streaks in the cross process direction that occurs after 94.5mm (3.7 inches) in high image density Perform the IQ20 Cross Process
images of upstream engine (Y color, M color) Ghosting RAP.
Dark lines Xerographics Fine lines in the cross process direction due to abnormal electric discharge between BCR and the Perform the IQ5 Dark Lines RAP.
photo receptor.
DC charging ghosting Xerographics As DC charging has weak charging capability compared to AC charging, ghosting may worsen with Perform the IQ22 DC Charging
the environment or paper. Also see residual image (ghosting). Ghosting RAP.
Deletions Xerographics Part of the image is missing. Perform the IQ24 Deletions RAP.
Heat haze/mock heat haze Transfer A scattering of toner around solid patches. Perform the IQ14 Heat Haze/
Mock Heat Haze RAP.
Kiss marks Transfer As system resistance of the primary transfer is high, the charge voltage of the primary transfer to the Perform the IQ15 Kiss Marks
toner on the Photoreceptor is increased, causing kiss-shaped discharge marks. RAP.
In the BCR (bias charge roll)and photoreceptor nip sections, when BCR deformation remains, From the vibration in the drum cartridge or moving unit, a frictional charge is created by the
thin white streaks in the cross process direction at the BCR pitch occur. These streaks may position of BCR, cleaner blade that touches the photo receptor and creates a dark line of photo
occur after storage in low temperature/humidity environment. receptor pitch (approximately 94mm/3.7 inches).
If the substances contained in the cleaner roll get stuck to the BCR at the BCR and cleaner roll This problem may occur after installation of a new drum cartridge.
NIP sections, intermittent white spots may occur at the BCR pitch. These spots may occur
when the machine has been resting for a long time or in the early mornings. Ensure IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP is performed before starting this RAP.
Unevenness from charging failure occurs in weak contact parts which lowers the surface Procedure
potential and the density of the half-tone image darkens with a BCR pitch.
Ensure IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP is performed before starting this RAP. WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Procedure not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Enter dC612 Print Test Pattern. Print test pattern 5. Check that lines with 94mm (3.7
WARNING inches) pitch appear in the cross process direction.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
2. If the defect appears in a color, make 30 full color copies of a test pattern. If the defect
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
appears only in black, make 30 black and white copies of a test print.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
3. If the image quality defect remains, install a new drum cartridge of the relevant color, PL
1. Enter dC612 Print Test Pattern. Print test patterns 6 to 9. Check which color has the 90.20.
image quality defect.
2. If the defect appears in a color, make 30 full color copies of a test pattern. If the defect
appears only in black, make 30 black and white copies of a test print.
3. If the image quality defect remains, install a new drum cartridge of the relevant color, PL
90.20.
Ensure IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP is performed before starting this RAP. Ensure IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP is performed before starting this RAP.
Cause Cause
Uneven DC charge of the BCR. When the developer unit cover is badly contaminated. The cover is likely to be contaminated
when there are rapid changes in humidity or a certain amount of low and high density images
Procedure are copied repeatedly.
1. Enter dC612 Print Test Pattern. Print test pattern 5.
2. If thin, dark lines appear randomly, enter dC131. Set the value of NVM location 740-205
Procedure
to 1 (on). 1. Check if there is extreme contamination of developer unit or drum cartridge on any of the
four colors. If contamination is present, clean as necessary.
2. If the image quality defect remains after cleaning, install new components as necessary:
• Relevant developer unit, PL 90.05.
• Relevant drum cartridge, PL 90.20.
This change in speed changes the difference in relative speed between the photoreceptor and
the IBT belt surface in the K-color primary transfer section, hence creating a smear (distorted
image). This occurs in the BW mode for heavyweight paper
Ensure IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP is performed before starting this RAP.
Figure 1 Example
Initial Actions
Advise the customer to change the paper or use paper with a better hue.
Figure 1 Example
Procedure
1. Perform dC1215 Transfer Voltage Adjustment.
Procedure a. While the nominal value is 0, perform variable output (between -5 and 10, low to high
voltage) for secondary voltage, and register the optimal value.
1. Enter dC612 Print Test Pattern. Print test pattern 5. If the print has a line in the in the
cross process direction 125mm (4.9 inches) away from the lead edge, enter dC131. Set b. Nominal variable range: 10%/1 step. If necessary, enter dC131. Adjust NVM value
the NVM values that follow: 746-034 as necessary.
• 740-033 (Plain Paper B Smear Countermeasure SW) to 1.
• 740-034 (Plain Paper E Smear Countermeasure SW) to 1.
• 740-035 (Plain Paper G Smear Countermeasure SW) to 1.
• 740-036 (Heavyweight 1S Smear Countermeasure SW) to 1.
• 740-037 (Heavyweight 2S Smear Countermeasure SW) to 1.
NOTE: The above NVM changes cause the IOT to operate in the FC mode, regardless of
the color mode setting (color priority, BW priority, ACS) in the controller, when performing
monochrome printing for the above paper types.
Toner contamination suddenly appears on the 2nd BTR or IBT belt: Since the resistance in the secondary transfer section also increases by lower humidity or over
• Lead Edge: Paper lead edge contacts the belt when it is transported from registration to time, the required electrical field may not be attained, especially in the early mornings (low
Transfer. humidity environment).
• Trail Edge: The tail edge of paper that loops between the transfer-fusing sections, at the
Ensure IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP is performed before starting this RAP.
release of the secondary transfer nip, moves opposite to the feed direction and contacts
the BTR surface, or bounds up and contacts the belt
Ensure IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP is performed before starting this RAP.
Figure 1 Example
Figure 1 Example
Cause
Due to the characteristics of the EA-ECO toner, high Rsys (in the early morning low tempera-
Initial Actions ture and low humidity environment) requires a transfer voltage for the areas where multiple
transfers and MWS cannot be used at the same time.
Make a 1 sided print to check on which side (transfer side or side 2) the contamination occurs.
Because the machine is adjusted for multiple transfer priority by default, micro white spots may
Procedure be visible from side 1.
1. Enter dC131. Set the NVM values that follow:
• 744-108 (126mm/s Plain ABC) to -40. Initial Actions
• 744-109 (126mm/s Plain DEFG) to -40. 1. Verify that the hue on side 2 becomes lighter when printing a high density image in a low
• 744-110 (126mm/s Plain S) to 0. temperature and low humidity environment.
• 744-111 (126mm/s Heavyweight 1, Label 1 BW) to -20. 2. Change the secondary transfer voltage setting up or down, then compare the hue to the
• 744-112 (126mm/s Coated 1 BW) from -20 to 0. paper with defective image.
Figure 1 Example
Cause
Occurs on side 2 in a low humidity environment. Occurs due to the discharge of transfer nip as
the multi-color and monochrome transfer latitude is narrow, and the set voltage of multiple col-
ors causes excessive voltage for monochrome.
Procedure
1. Use the NVM to decrease the secondary transfer voltage as a trade-off with the multi
color.
2. Perform dC1215 Transfer Voltage Adjustment.
a. While the nominal value is "0", perform variable output (between -5 and 10, low to
high voltage) for secondary voltage, and register the optimal value.
b. Nominal variable range: 10%/1 step. If necessary, enter dC131. Adjust NVM value
746-034 as necessary.
Ensure IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP is performed before starting this RAP. If the adhesion of the toner to the paper is weak and the amount of electricity removal is big,
the toner scatters and a round shaped pattern appears continuously in the vertical direction.
Ensure IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP is performed before starting this RAP.
Figure 1 Example
Cause
Figure 1 Example
This can occur when paper that is prone to flaking is used at high relative humidity.
The heat haze/mock heat haze is generated in various places and in different ways. This can
be affected by transfer of the paper path at the transfer exit. Refer to Figure 1.
Ensure IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP is performed before starting this RAP.
• Heat haze
Cause
The heat haze occurs at the place where paper is peeled off from the IBT belt. The toner scat-
ters in small clouds all around the solid patch. Refer to Figure 2.
The mock heat haze (line/text image) occurs when the transported paper rubs against the
holder DTS (chute at the transfer exit), which charges it electrically and causes the toner to
scatter at the lead and tail edges of the solid section. Refer to Figure 3.
Procedure
1. When a heat haze or mock heat haze occurs during installation, print 25 sheets of a test
chart on A3.
2. Increase the secondary voltage.
Increase the secondary transfer voltage based on the result of 1. Perform dC1215 Trans-
fer Voltage Adjustment.
a. While the nominal value is "0", perform variable output (between -5 and 10, low to
high voltage) for secondary voltage, and register the optimal value.
b. Nominal variable range: 10%/1 step. If necessary, enter dC131. Adjust NVM value
746-034 as necessary.
3. Increase the primary transfer current value
a. For mock heat haze, enter dC131. Set the NVM values that follow:
• 746-008 (Primary Transfer Output Mock Heat Haze Correction Run Environ-
ment) to 1.
• 746-009 (Primary Transfer Output Mock Heat Haze Area Coverage Threshold
Value) to 1.
• 746-010 (Primary Transfer Output Mock Heat Haze Correction Coefficient
(63mm/s)) to 120.
• 746-011 (Primary Transfer Output Mock Heat Haze Correction Coefficient
(126mm/s)) to 120.
• 746-012 (Primary Transfer Output Mock Heat Haze Correction Coefficient
(175mm/s)) to 120.
If the result is insufficient, proceed to b.
b. Increase the primary transfer output control.
• If the defect only occurs in black. Enter dC131. Increase the value of NVM 747-
605 (the Primary Transfer Output Adjustment Value (BW mode K)) to 130.
• If the default occurs with multiple colors. Enter dC131. Increase NVM values
747-606 (Y), 747-607 (M), 747-608 (C), and 747-609 (K) to 130.
Ensure IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP is performed before starting this RAP.
Figure 1 Example
Ensure IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP is performed before starting this RAP.
Figure 1 Example
Cause
Occurs when the developer ability drops.
Initial Actions
Enter dC612 Print Test Patterns. Select a suitable test pattern (pattern 51 Total Chart recom-
mended). Check by comparing with image sample, Figure 1.
Procedure
1. Perform dC1215 Transfer Voltage Adjustment.
a. While the nominal value is "0", perform variable output (between -5 and 10, low to
high voltage) for secondary voltage, and register the optimal value.
b. Nominal variable range: 10%/1 step. If necessary, enter dC131. Adjust NVM value
746-034 as necessary.
2. Increase the primary transfer output control.
• If the defect only occurs in black, enter dC131. Increase the value of NVM 747-605
(the Primary Transfer Output Adjustment Value (BW mode K)) to 130.
• If the default occurs with multiple colors, enter dC131. Increase NVM values 747-
606 (Y), 747-607 (M), 747-608 (C) and 747-609 (K) to 130.
Figure 1 Example
Figure 1 Example
Cause
Rib of holder DTS increases the contact area by wear, and friction charge amount increases Cause
causing streaks. This is caused by low electric charge in the toner. The stress conditions are:
• Plain paper (lightweight paper)
Procedure • Mid humidity - high temperature environment
• New toner cartridge
• Job first thing in the morning (less than 10 copies)
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Procedure
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause 1. Make 12 prints.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. 2. Advise the customer change the paper (paper with high basis weight), or change the feed
1. Clean the ribs of the 2nd BTR roll assembly, PL 90.40 Item 5. direction.
2. If necessary, install a new 2nd BTR roll assembly, PL 90.40 Item 5. 3. If the image quality defect remains. Perform dC1215 Transfer Voltage Adjustment.
a. While the nominal value is "0", perform variable output (between -5 and 10, low to
high voltage) for secondary voltage, and register the optimal value.
b. Nominal variable range: 10%/1 step. If necessary, enter dC131. Adjust NVM value
746-034 as necessary.
Install a new drum cartridge of the relevant color, PL 90.20. Switch off, then switch on the
machine, GP 10. Make a print. The image quality defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Remove the fuser, PL 10.05 Item 2. Check for contamination on the surface of the heat roll.
The surface of the heat roll is clean.
Y N
If possible, remove the contamination. If necessary, install a new fuser, PL 10.05 Item 2.
Cause
Uneven charging due to localized poor electric discharge.
Procedure
1. Enter dC131. Perform the steps that follow:
• For cross process ghosting that occurs at half speed, change NVM value 740-205
(White Streaks Countermeasure Switch) to 1 (on).
• For cross process ghosting that occurs at full speed, increase the NVM values 747-
608 and 747-609 to 130.
Ensure IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP is performed before starting this RAP.
Figure 1 Example
Positive ghosting: The print appears darker after halftone of one rotation (94.5mm/3.7 inches)
of the photoreceptor.
Negative ghosting: The unprinted blank spaces (white spaces of image gaps) appear darker at
halftone after one rotation (94.5mm/3.7 inches) of the photoreceptor.
Procedure
1. Enter dC612 Print Test Pattern. Print a suitable test pattern. Identify if the ghosting is pos-
itive or negative.
2. Refer to Figure 2. Enter dC131. Perform the steps that follow:
• For positive ghosting, reduce the value of NVM 998-175.
• For negative ghosting, increase the value NVM 998-175.
Ensure IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP is performed before starting this RAP. Ensure IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP is performed before starting this RAP.
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Check for contamination on the document glass. The document glass is clean. Perform the steps that follow:
Y N • If the deletions are small and align with the stripper fingers in the drum cartridges, clean
Clean the document glass. If necessary, install new document glass, PL 60.10 Item 9. the stripper fingers. If necessary, install a new drum cartridge of the relevant color, PL
90.20.
Remove, then reinstall the drum cartridges, PL 90.20. Switch off, then switch on the machine,
• If the deletions are small and align with the stripper fingers in the fuser, clean the stripper
GP 10. Make a print. The image quality defect persists. fingers. If necessary, install a new fuser, PL 10.05 Item 2.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Procedure
Install a new drum cartridge of the relevant color, PL 90.20. Switch off, then switch on the Check the paper type, refer to GP 15. Paper used is within specifications.
machine, GP 10. Make a print. The image quality defect persists. Y N
Y N Use paper within specifications.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Use a new ream of paper. The image quality defect persists.
Check the surface of the 2nd BTR for contamination or distortion. The surface of the BTR is Y N
good. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Y N
Clean the 2nd BTR. If necessary, install a new 2nd BTR roll assembly, PL 90.40 Item 5. Remove, then reinstall the drum cartridge of the relevant color, PL 90.20. Switch off, then
switch on the machine, GP 10. Make a print. The image quality defect persists.
Remove, then reinstall the HVPS. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. Make a Y N
print. The image quality defect persists. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. Install a new drum cartridge of the relevant color, PL 90.20. Switch off, then switch on the
machine, GP 10. Make a print. The image quality defect persists.
Install new components as necessary: Y N
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
• HVPS, PL 1.05 Item 7.
Check the surface of the 2nd BTR for distortion. The surface of the BTR is good.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6. Y N
Install a new 2nd BTR roll assembly, PL 90.40 Item 5.
WARNING
WARNING Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Perform the steps that follow:
Check the paper type, refer to GP 15. Paper used is within specifications. • DADF Checkout
Y N • Document Glass Checkout
Use paper within specifications.
• Scan Carriage Assembly Checkout
Use paper stored under room conditions. The image quality defect persists. DADF Checkout
Y N Perform the steps that follow:
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
• Clean the underside of the DADF.
Check the paper settings for the tray being used. The settings are correct. • Use a microfibre wiper dampened with water to clean the DADF rolls and nip rolls.
Y N • If the documents are skewed. Check that the DADF document input guides are correctly
Correct the tray settings. adjusted.
• Check that the DADF is seated correctly.
Check the fuser rolls for contamination. The rolls are clean. • Make scan to file or scan to USB files from the DADF. If the images are skewed, perform
Y N the steps that follow:
Clean the fuser rolls. If necessary, install a new fuser, PL 10.05 Item 2.
– Check that the DADF document input guides are correctly adjusted.
– ADJ 5.1 DADF Lead Edge Skew.
Check the power supply voltage. The voltage is within the specified range.
Y N Document Glass Checkout
Connect a power supply with voltage within the specified range. Perform the steps that follow:
• If the copies of the internal test pattern have white lines or deletions in the process direc-
Enter dC140, codes 010-200, 010-201, 010-202 and 010-203. Check the fusing temperature. tion that are continuous from edge to edge of the image, clean the CVT glass, PL 60.10
Normal fusing temperatures are detected.
Item 8.
Y N
• If necessary, perform ADJ 60.5 Optics Cleaning Procedure.
Adjust the fusing temperatures as necessary.
• Check the condition of the document cushion, If necessary clean the cushion or install a
Install a new fuser, PL 10.05 Item 2. new document cushion, PL 5.05 Item 1.
Scan Carriage Assembly Checkout
Perform the steps that follow:
• If the copy of the internal test pattern (made from the IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP) is
fragmented and displaced, perform the steps that follow:
– Refer to BSD 9.3 Charging and Exposure. Check the ribbon cable and connectors
between the print head assembly and PJ1363 on the ESS PWB. if necessary, install
a new FFC cable of the relevant color, PL 60.35.
• Check the scan carriage for contamination. Refer to ADJ 60.5 Optics Cleaning Proce-
dure.
Ensure IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP is performed before starting this RAP. Ensure IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP is performed before starting this RAP.
Perform the 033-312, 033-313, 033-315 to 033-327 Fax Fault RAP. Check the connections to the components that follow, install new components as necessary:
• HVPS, PL 1.05 Item 7.
Inform the remote user of the required changes to the settings.
• Print head assembly (for the relevant color), PL 60.35 Item 1.
• Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
• ESS PWB, PL 3.10 Item 6.
BSD-Reference: BSD 6.5 LED Control (C, K) Check the connections to the components that follow, install new components as necessary:
• 2nd BTR roll assembly, PL 90.40 Item 5.
BSD-Reference: BSD 9.3 Charging and Exposure
• HVPS, PL 1.05 Item 7.
Procedure • Drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 4.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
For the relevant color.
Check the installation of the print head assembly, PL 60.35 Item 1. The print head assembly
is installed correctly.
Y N
Correctly install the print head assembly.
Check the drum ground contact point, positioned on the front underside of the drum cartridge
for contamination or distortion. The drum ground contact point is good.
Y N
Clean the drum ground contact point. Correct any distortion.
Remove, then reinstall the drum cartridge, PL 90.20. Switch off, then switch on the machine,
GP 10. Make a print. The image quality defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Install a new drum cartridge, PL 90.20. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. Make a
print. The image quality defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Print a page that is entirely of the missing color. During the print cycle, switch off the power
after the paper has been fed out of the tray (stop the transfer in mid-progress). Check the sur-
face of the IBT belt. There is a considerable amount of toner on the surface of the IBT
belt.
Y N
Check the ribbon cable and connectors between the relevant print head assembly and the
ESS PWB. The ribbon cable and connectors are good.
Y N
Correct the connections. If necessary, install a new FFC cable for the relevant color,
PL 60.35.
A B
Imaqe Quality December 2017
IQ31 3-28 Xerox® VersaLink® C7000 Color Printer & C7030 Family Color Multifunction
IQ32 Repeated Defects RAP Table 1 Defect periods
Use this RAP to identify the cause of repeated defects. Print Period Print Period Part List
Sub System Device (imm) (inches) Reference
Repeated defects can be caused by a variety of issues in the print engine. Refer to Figure 1. Fusing Heat Roll (part 82.5 3.25 PL 10.05 Item 2
of the fuser unit)
Ensure IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP is performed before starting this RAP.
Belt 95.1 3.74 PL 80.50 Item 20
PL 80.50 Item 21
Transfer 2nd-BTR Roll 56.5 2.22 PL 90.40 Item 5
IBT IBT-Belt 795.0 31.3 PL 90.50 Item 7
Tension Roll 70.9 2.79 PL 90.50 Item 6
Idle Roll 31.7 1.25 Part of IBT unit belt
Assy PL 90.50 Item 1
1st-BTR Roll 19.1 0.75 Part of IBT unit belt
Assy PL 90.50 Item 1
Sensor Roll 56.8 2.24 Part of IBT unit belt
Assy PL 90.50 Item 1
Developer Developer Unit 28.7 1.13 PL 90.30 Item 1
Xerographics Drum Cartridge 94.5 3.72 PL 90.20 Item 5 (K)
PL 90.20 Item 6 (C)
PL 90.20 Item 7 (M)
PL 90.20 Item 8 (Y)
BCR 38.0 1.5 Part of drum cartridge
PL 90.20
BCR Cleaner 29.3 1.15 Part of drum cartridge
PL 90.20
Procedure
Clean or install new components as necessary.
NOTE: Some of the items cannot be cleaned or replaced as they are contained within a larger
part. For example the idle roll, 1st BTR roll and sensor roll are contained within the IBT unit belt
assembly.
Figure 1 Print engine
Initial Actions
Refer to Table 1. Observe any lines or defects to see if space between them match any values
in the table.
Specifications
Refer to Table 1.
NOTE: For a description of the print/copy orientation definitions, refer to GP 31 Print/Copy Ori-
entation Definitions.
Table 1 Magnification
Dimension Dimension
Parameter Nominal Minimum Maximum Lss Lfs
In process direction from the 100% 99.3% 100.7% 400+/- -
platen. A3 80gsm (8.5x11 inch 2.8mm
20lb) papers. (15.75 +/-
0.11inch)
Cross process direction from the 100% 99.3% 100.7% - 277+/-
platen. A3 80gsm (8.5x11 inch 1.9mm
20lb) papers. (10.91 +/-
0.075 inch)
From CVT or DADF. A3 80gsm 100% 99.5% 101% 398to 274.2 to
(8.5x11 inch 20lb) papers. 404mm 279.8mm
(15.67 to (10.80 to
15.91inch) 11.02 inch)
In process and cross process 100% 99.6% 100.4% 400+/- 277 +/-
direction print. A3 80gsm (8.5x11 1.6mm 1.1mm
inch 20lb) papers. (15.75 +/- (7.48 +/-
0.063 inch) 0.043 inch)
In process and cross process 100% 99.5% 100.5% 400+/- 277 +/-
direction print. For all other 2mm 1.39mm
papers. (15.75 +/- (7.48 +/-
0.079 inch) 0.055 inch)
Magnification measurement
Make copies of the registration test pattern from the document glass and through the DADF.
Compare the dimensions Lss between the original print and the copies, Figure 1 and Figure 2.
Corrective action
Perform ADJ 60.4 IIT Image Ratio Adjustment.
Procedure
Make 5 copies of the test pattern, Figure 1. Check the fusing by folding one of the copies
through the centre of a solid area. Use a finger to apply medium pressure along the fold to
crease the paper. Unfold the copy. Use a finger to lightly rub the area of the fold and adjacent
areas.
Specification
Any break should measure less than 1mm (1/32 inch) across the line of a fold. Any area
rubbed with a cloth should not smudge or the image lift off the surface of the paper. When
checking the fusing on heavyweight paper (200gsm), rub the image with a finger. Images fused
on the smooth side of the paper have a greater resistance to rubbing than images fused on the
rough side of the paper. Do not attempt to fold heavyweight paper, as this breaks the fibres.
Corrective Action
If the fusing specification is not met, perform the IQ27 Unfused Copy/Toner Offset RAP.
Skew Measurement
To check for skew, perform the steps that follow:
1. Enter dC612. Make a simplex print of internal test pattern 28.
2. Determine the amount of skew. Measure the distance from a printed line to the lead edge
of the paper at the inboard and outboard edges.
3. If skew is not within specification on either side, perform the IQ25 IOT Skew RAP.
Copy Skew
Specification
Refer to Table 2.
Skew Measurement
To check for skew, perform the steps that follow:
1. Make a simplex copy of test pattern 82E2000 (A3 and 11x17), 82E2010 (A4) or 82E2020
(8.5x11).
2. Refer to Figure 1. Determine the amount of skew by either:
Figure 1 Test pattern
NOTE: Grid A and grid B are small areas of parallel lines 1mm apart. Show Through
3. If skew is not within specification, perform the IQ28 DADF, Document Glass and Scanner No show through of the underside of the document handler should be visible when using Xerox
80gsm (20lb) or heavier paper as an input document. The check is made with the document
RAP.
handler closed and in normal copy/print mode. Some show through may occur using 60gsm
(15lb) paper as documents.
Corrective action
Datum line.
If show though of the underside of the document handler is visible, ensure that the platen cush-
ion is clean. If necessary, install a new document cushion, PL 5.05 Item 1.
White Spots
White spots are areas visible on a half tone or solid area where the toner has failed to be
deposited. The specification is for the total image area. To assess for white spots use the
dC612 internal test pattern 123.
• Spots of 1mm (0.04 inch) and larger - none allowed.
• Spots 0.5mm to 1mm (0.02 to 0.04 inch) - no more than 1 spot per A4 (8.5 x 11 inch)
page.
• Spots 0.25mm to 0.5mm (0.01 to 0.02 inch) - no more than 4 spots per A4 (8.5 x 11 inch)
page.
• Spots 0.125mm to 0.25mm (0.005 to 0.01 inch) - no more than 20 spots per A4 (8.5 x 11
inch) page.
Grid B Corrective Action
Go to the IQ2 IOT IQ Defects RAP.
Datum line.
Corrective Action NOTE: For a description of the print/copy orientation definitions, refer to GP 31 Print/Copy Ori-
Perform the checks that follow: entation Definitions.
• That the paper stock conforms to the specification. Refer to GP 15 Paper and Media Size
Specifications. Inform the customer if the paper is outside of the specifications. Table 1 Registration measurement
• The customer’s paper storage conditions. Paper must be stored in unopened packs in Parameter Measurement/Tolerance
cool dry conditions. Inform the customer if the storage conditions are not good.
Lead edge registration error on a simplex sheet 10 +/- 1.6 mm (0.39 +/- 0.063 inch)
• The environmental conditions. Refer to GP 18 Environmental Data. Inform the customer if
Lead edge registration error on a duplex sheet 10 +/- 2 mm (0.39 +/- 0.079 inch)
the environmental conditions are outside of the specifications.
Top edge registration error on a simplex sheet 10 +/- 2.1 mm (0.39 +/- 0.082 inch)
• For damaged rollers in the paper path.
Top edge registration error on a duplex sheet 10 +/- 2.1 mm (0.39 +/- 0.082 inch)
– Wrinkles occurring before image transfer can be flattened by the fuser, resulting in a
wrinkled image even though the paper is flat.
– Wrinkles occurring after transfer tend to be creased into the paper and can be Registration Measurement
caused in the fuser. Perform dC126, make selections to print the test pattern on A3 or 11x17 inch paper.
Use the measurements Sa and Sb at each end of the inboard edge to measure the displace-
ment of the top of the image from the paper inboard edge, refer to IQ1 Figure 1.
Use the measurements La and Lb at each end of the lead edge to measure the displacement
of the side of the image from the paper lead edge.
NOTE: If a there is a difference between any pair of measurements, refer to IQS 5 Skew.
Corrective Action
Perform dC126 System Registration.
Registration measurement
Make a copy of test pattern 82E2010 (A4) or 82E2020 (8.5x11).
NOTE: Grid A and grid B of test patterns 82E2000, 82E2010, 82E2020 are small areas of par-
allel lines 1mm apart. These can be used to directly measure the registration displacement. Area A lead edge
NOTE: If a there is a difference between measurements at A and B, refer to IQS 5 Skew.
Corrective Action
As necessary, perform ADJ 60.2 IIT Lead Edge Registration or ADJ 60.3 Side Edge Registra-
tion.
ADJs 5 - DADF
ADJ 5.1 DADF Lead Edge Skew .................................................................................... 4-245
ADJ 5.2 DADF Side Edge Registration ........................................................................... 4-246
ADJ 5.3 DADF Lead Edge Registration .......................................................................... 4-248
ADJs 13 - Finisher
ADJ 13.1 Hole Punch Position ........................................................................................ 4-251
ADJ 13.2 Booklet Folding and Staple Position................................................................ 4-251
ADJs 60 - Imaging
ADJ 60.1 Full/Half Rate Carriage Position Adjustment ................................................... 4-253
ADJ 60.2 IIT Lead Edge Registration.............................................................................. 4-255
ADJ 60.3 IIT Side Edge Registration .............................................................................. 4-256
ADJ 60.4 IIT Image Ratio Adjustment............................................................................. 4-257
ADJ 60.5 Optics Cleaning Procedure ............................................................................. 4-259
ADJ 60.6 CDD Lens Optical Axis Correction .................................................................. 4-259
ADJ 60.7 Image Position................................................................................................. 4-260
ADJs 90 - Xerographics
ADJ 90.1 Edge Erase...................................................................................................... 4-261
ADJ 90.2 Marking Refresh .............................................................................................. 4-261
ADJ 90.3 Color Calibration - Automatic .......................................................................... 4-262
ADJ 90.4 Color Calibration - Advanced .......................................................................... 4-262
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Figure 2 HVPS
CAUTION
Observe ESD procedures during this procedure.
1. Remove the right cover, REP 28.3.
2. Remove the HVPS, Figure 2.
a. Disconnect the connector (1).
b. Remove the screws (2).
c. Remove the HVPS (3).
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
Observe ESD procedures during this procedure.
CAUTION
When installing a new drive PWB and a new ESS PWB at the same time, first install the new
ESS PWB, then switch on the machine, GP 10. If the new ESS PWB installation is successful,
switch off the machine, then install the new drive PWB.
1. If possible, record the current software level by either:
• Printing the configuration report, GP 14.
• From the user interface Home screen, touch Device, then About. Scroll down to view
the Software Version. Figure 3 Connectors
2. Remove the upper rear cover, REP 28.5.
3. Remove the lower rear cover, REP 28.6.
NOTE: The list is located in tray 1, beneath the RAI cover, PL 70.05 Item 10.
4. Ensure that the device ID and billing data is correct, perform dC132.
5. Check the machines current software level against the software level recorded prior to
installation of the new drive PWB. If necessary, reload the software, GP 4.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. If a new drive PWB is to be installed, remove the EEPROM (1) from the old drive PWB,
then install it onto the new drive PWB, Figure 5.
Figure 5 EEPROM
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
Figure 3 LVPS removal
Observe ESD procedures during this procedure.
1. Remove the upper rear cover, REP 28.5.
Replacement
2. Remove the lower rear cover, REP 28.6.
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
3. Disconnect all connectors from the LVPS, Figure 2.
Figure 2 Connectors
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Figure 2 Preparation
4. Remove four screws (1), then the LVPS assembly (2), Figure 3.
Figure 1 ESD Symbol
CAUTION
Observe ESD procedures during this procedure.
1. Remove the upper rear cover, REP 28.5.
2. Remove the lower rear cover, REP 28.6.
3. Prepare to remove the LVPS assembly, Figure 2:
a. Disconnect eight connectors (1).
b. Release the harness from the clamp (2).
c. Remove both harness clamps (3) from the frame.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. Ensure the smaller 2 pin connector is connected to PJ3, not PJ4.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Figure 3 Connectors
CAUTION
Observe ESD procedures during this procedure.
1. Remove the upper rear cover, REP 28.5.
2. Remove the lower rear cover, REP 28.6.
3. Carefully disconnect the ribbon cable (1) by releasing the side clips, Figure 2.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. If possible, record the current software level by either:
• Printing the configuration report, GP 14.
• From the user interface Home screen, touch Device, then About. Scroll down to view
the Software Version.
2. Open the DADF.
3. Remove the ICCR cover, PL 2.05 Item 12.
NOTE: The ICCR cover is secured by 2 clips at the front.
5. Fully raise the UI assembly, then remove the cable cover, PL 2.05 Item 8.
6. Remove the inner cover, PL 2.05 Item 10.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. If possible, record the current software level by either:
• Printing the configuration report, GP 14.
• From the user interface Home screen, touch Device, then About. Scroll down to view
the Software Version.
2. Remove the UI rear cover, Figure 1.
a. Lift the UI assembly (1) in the direction of arrow.
b. Insert a flat screwdriver in the gap between the UI rear cover and the UI assembly
(2).
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. Check the machines current software level against the software level recorded prior to
installation of the new user interface assembly. If necessary, reload the software, GP 4.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. Check the machines current software level against the software level recorded prior to
installation of the new user interface assembly. If necessary, reload the software, GP 4.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
Observe ESD procedures during this procedure.
CAUTION
Do not touch the battery. Do not peel off the protective tape.
CAUTION
When installing a new ESS PWB and a new drive PWB at the same time, first install the new
ESS PWB, then switch on the machine, GP 10. If the new ESS PWB installation is successful,
switch off the machine, then install the new drive PWB.
1. If possible, record the current software level by either:
• Printing the configuration report, GP 14.
• From the user interface Home screen, touch Device, then About. Scroll down to view
the Software Version.
2. Remove the upper rear cover, REP 28.5.
Figure 3 HDD bracket removal
8. If the machine has a fax installed, disconnect the connection between the connector and
the USB cable, Figure 7:
a. Disconnect the USB cable (1).
b. Release the USB cable clamp (2).
c. Disconnect the connector (3).
Figure 8 Connectors
CAUTION
Take not to damage or dislodge the rear cover ground clip (3) when removing the ESS upper
panel.
10. Remove the ESS upper panel, Figure 9.
a. Remove both screws (1).
b. Remove the ESS upper panel (2).
c. Release all remaining harness clamps from the ESS upper panel.
Figure 10 Cables
12. Disconnect the connectors and fittings from side of ESS PWB, Figure 11.
a. If fitted, remove the wireless dongle (1).
b. Disconnect the USB cable (2).
c. Remove screw for the USB connector (3).
d. Remove screws for the D-type connector (4).
CAUTION
Take care not to insert the harness at an angle as this could damage the PWB.
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. If a new ESS PWB is to be installed:
CAUTION
Take care when removing and reinstalling the SEEPROM. The pins are easily damaged.
a. Remove the SEEPROM (1) from the old ESS PWB, then install it onto the new ESS
PWB, Figure 13.
Figure 13 SEEPROM
b. Remove the SD card from the old ESS PWB, then install it onto the new ESS PWB.
3. Be aware of that when connecting the FFC cable and the ribbon cable:
a. When connecting the ribbon cable, insert it straight into the connector housing until it
locks.
b. Ensure that the cable is connected securely at both ends.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
Observe ESD procedures during this procedure.
Figure 14 FFC LED cable
5. Ensure that the device ID and billing data is correct, perform dC132. CAUTION
6. Check the machines current software level against the software level recorded prior to Do not touch the battery. Do not peel off the protective tape.
installation of the new ESS PWB. If necessary, reload the software, GP 4. 1. Remove the upper rear cover, REP 28.5.
2. Remove the lower rear cover, REP 28.6.
3. Remove the RH top cover, PL 28.06 Item 2.
4. Remove the RH rear cover, PL 28.06 Item 3.
Figure 8 Connectors
CAUTION
Figure 6 Cables Take not to damage or dislodge the rear cover ground clip (3) when removing the ESS upper
panel.
10. Disconnect the connection between the connector and the USB Cable, Figure 7:
a. Disconnect the USB cable (1).
b. Release the USB cable clamp (2).
c. Disconnect the connector (3).
Figure 10 Cables
CAUTION
For machines with a fax, the USB cable and connector are still secured by the clamp. Do not
forcibly pull the ESS PWB chassis assembly.
Figure 11 Lower right screw 17. Remove two screws (1), then the ESS PWB chassis assembly (2), Figure 14:
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the upper rear cover, REP 28.5.
2. Remove the lower rear cover, REP 28.6.
3. Remove the RH top cover, PL 28.06 Item 2.
4. Remove the RH rear cover, PL 28.06 Item 3.
5. Remove one screw (1), then the SD card cover, Figure 1.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. If a new DADF is to be installed, if possible, record the current software level by either:
• Printing the configuration report, GP 14.
• From the user interface Home screen, touch Device, then About. Scroll down to view
the Software Version.
2. Remove the upper rear cover, REP 28.5.
3. Disconnect the cable clamps (1), then the connector (2), Figure 1.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. Install the DADF by inserting the tabs of the counter balance into the grooves of the instal-
lation holes (1).
Figure 1 Connector
NOTE: The list is located in tray 1, beneath the RAI cover, PL 70.05 Item 10.
CAUTION
d. Check the machines current software level against the software level recorded prior
Take care when removing and reinstalling the SEEPROM. The pins are easily damaged. to installation of the new DADF. If necessary, reload the software, GP 4.
b. Remove the SEEPROM (1) from the old DADF PWB, then install it onto the new
DADF PWB, Figure 4.
Figure 4 SEEPROM
CAUTION
If the original SEEPROM cannot be reused, the feed count, jam count and HFSI count will
be lost.
c. If the SEEPROM is damaged during removal and cannot be reused, enter dC131
NVM read/Write. Enter the DADF NVM settings listed below according to the NVM
Setting List that was supplied with the machine:
• 711-140
• 711-141
• 711-142
• 711-143
• 711-144
• 711-270
• 711-271
• 711-272
NOTE: The DADF document cushion is attached with double sided adhesive tape.
1. Peel off the DADF document cushion, Figure 1.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the upper feeder assembly. 1. Remove the left screw that secures the DADF rear cover, Figure 1:
2. Open the DADF. a. Open the upper feeder assembly (1).
3. Remove the DADF front cover, Figure 1: b. Remove the left screw (2).
a. Remove four screws (1).
b. Remove the DADF front cover in the direction of the arrow.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
3. Release the three hooks (1) that secure the DADF rear cover, Figure 3. Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Figure 3 Hooks
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
Observe ESD procedures during this procedure.
Figure 3 DADF PWB removal
1. If possible, record the current software level by either:
• Printing the configuration report, GP 14.
• From the user interface Home screen, touch Device, then About. Scroll down to view
the Software Version.
2. Remove the DADF rear cover, REP 5.4.
3. Disconnect six connectors (1), Figure 2.
Figure 2 Connectors
Figure 4 SEEPROM
CAUTION
If the original SEEPROM cannot be reused, the feed count, jam count and HFSI count will be
lost.
3. If the SEEPROM is damaged during removal and cannot be reused, enter dC131 NVM
read/Write. Enter the DADF NVM settings listed below according to the NVM Setting List
that was supplied with the machine:
• 711-140
• 711-141
Figure 1 Front hinge bracket removal
• 711-142
• 711-143
• 711-144
• 711-270
• 711-271
• 711-272
• 711-273
• 711-274
• 711-275
NOTE: The list is located in tray 1, beneath the RAI cover, PL 70.05 Item 10.
4. Check the machines current software level against the software level recorded prior to
installation of the new DADF PWB. If necessary, reload the software, GP 4.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF front cover, REP 5.3.
2. Remove the DADF rear cover, REP 5.4.
3. Remove the upper feeder assembly, REP 5.6.
4. Remove the document tray, REP 5.14.
5. Remove the harness guide and wire harness, REP 5.11.
6. Remove two screws (1) that secure the DADF feeder assembly at the rear, Figure 1.
NOTE: On some machines, the DADF feeder assembly may be secured by a third screw
(2).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF, REP 5.1.
2. Turn the DADF upside down.
3. Remove the left counter balance, Figure 1:
a. Remove four screws (1).
b. Remove the left counter balance (2).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF rear cover, REP 5.4.
2. Remove the DADF, REP 5.1.
3. Record the position of right counter balance, Figure 1.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Figure 1 Position
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: A new feed/nudger roll assembly and retard roll assembly must both be installed at the
same time. Refer to REP 5.19.
4. If new feed roll assemblies are installed, enter dC135 HFSI Counter. Reset the HFSI
counter 955-806.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Figure 6 DADF T/A clutch connector
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF front cover, REP 5.3.
2. Remove the DADF rear cover, REP 5.4.
3. Remove the document tray, REP 5.14.
4. Remove the harness guide and wire harness, REP 5.11.
5. Remove the DADF feed motor assembly, Figure 1:
a. Remove three screws (1).
b. Remove the DADF feed motor assembly (2).
Figure 2 Alignment
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF front cover, REP 5.3.
2. Remove the DADF rear cover, REP 5.4.
3. Remove the document tray, REP 5.14.
4. Remove the harness guide and wire harness, REP 5.11.
5. Remove the DADF feed motor assembly, REP 5.12.
6. Remove the stopper link, Figure 1.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF front cover, REP 5.3.
2. Remove the DADF rear cover, REP 5.4.
3. Remove the document tray harness, Figure 1:
a. Disconnect the connector (1).
b. Remove the harness from the harness guide (2).
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. Ensure the belt is fully tensioned before tightening the screw, refer to Figure 4.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF front cover, REP 5.3.
2. Remove the DADF rear cover, REP 5.4.
3. Remove the document tray, REP 5.14.
4. Open the retard chute assembly.
5. Remove the retard chute assembly in the direction of the arrow, Figure 1.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the upper feeder assembly, PL 5.10 Item 10. 1. Remove the DADF front cover, REP 5.3.
2. Open the retard chute assembly, PL 5.45 Item 2. 2. Remove the DADF rear cover, REP 5.4.
3. Remove the invert chute assembly, Figure 1: 3. Remove the upper feeder assembly, REP 5.6.
a. Remove two screws (1). 4. Remove the invert chute assembly, REP 5.16.
b. Remove the invert chute assembly (2). 5. Remove the document tray, REP 5.14.
6. Remove the harness guide and wire harness, REP 5.11.
7. Remove the DADF feed motor assembly, REP 5.12.
8. Remove the stopper link, Figure 1.
10. Remove the DADF T/A clutch, Figure 3: Figure 4 Gear pulley removal
a. Remove the E-clip (1).
b. Remove the DADF T/A clutch (2).
CAUTION
Do not lose the gear on the rear of the front bracket. Refer to Figure 6.
12. Remove the front bracket and ground roll plate, Figure 5:
a. Remove two screws (1).
b. Loosen the screw (2).
c. Remove the front bracket and ground roll plate (3).
Figure 7 Knob
Figure 6 Gear
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF front cover, REP 5.3
2. Remove the DADF rear cover, REP 5.4.
3. Remove the document tray, REP 5.14.
4. Remove the harness guide and wire harness, REP 5.11.
5. Remove the upper feeder assembly, REP 5.6.
6. Remove the DADF feeder assembly, REP 5.7.
7. Remove the retard chute assembly, REP 5.15.
8. Remove the invert chute assembly, REP 5.16.
9. Remove the DADF feed motor assembly, REP 5.12.
10. Remove the DADF takeaway roll, REP 5.17.
11. Remove the sensor bracket assembly, Figure 1:
a. Disconnect the connector (1).
Figure 9 Takeaway roll removal b. Remove four screws (2).
c. Remove the wire harness (3) through the hole.
Replacement d. Remove the sensor bracket assembly (4).
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. Install the front bracket and ground roll plate as shown in Figure 10.
Inside
Outside
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: A new retard roll assembly and feed/nudger roll assembly must both be installed at the
same time. Refer to REP 5.10.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. If a new retard roll assembly is installed, enter dC135 HFSI Counter. Reset the HFSI
counter 955-806.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the exit 2 transport assembly, refer to REP 10.2.
2. Remove the exit front cover, PL 28.05 Item 10.
3. Remove the fusing fan duct assembly, REP 10.4.
4. Move the bearing (1) toward the front, Figure 1.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Figure 1 Bearing
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Disengage the hooks, then remove the paper exit 1 weight assembly, (1), Figure 1.
Figure 2 Connectors
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. Ensure the paper guides are orientated correctly, refer to Figure 1.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. If a new fuser is installed, enter dC135 HFSI Counter. Ensure that the HFSI counters that
follow have been reset:
• Chain Link: 954-850
• Chain Link: 954-851
NOTE: Both counters should be automatically reset when a new fuser is installed.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the upper rear cover, REP 28.5. 1. Remove the upper rear cover, REP 28.5.
2. Remove the rear duct fuser A, Figure 1: 2. Remove the fuser fan from the rear duct fuser A, Figure 1:
a. Disconnect the connector (1). a. Disconnect the connector facing the chassis (1).
b. Remove the screw (2). b. Remove the wire harness from the hook (2).
c. Disengage the right and left hooks (3), then remove the fuser rear duct A (4). c. Disengage the right and left hooks at the front of the rear duct fuser A (3), then
remove the fuser fan.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the upper rear cover, REP 28.5.
2. Remove the rear duct fuser A, REP 10.4.
3. Release the two clips on rear duct fuser B and remove rear duct fuser B.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the STM cover, PL 28.06 Item 1.
2. Disconnect the integrated office finisher harnesses, Figure 1:
a. Release the cable clamp (1).
b. Disconnect two connectors (2).
Replacement
Reverse the removal procedure for replacement.
Figure 1 Connectors
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the integrated office finisher, REP 12.1.
2. Remove the compiler assembly, REP 12.19.
3. Remove the front pulley, Figure 1:
a. Remove the E-clip (1).
b. Remove the flange (2).
c. Disengage the front paddle belt (3) from the front pulley.
d. Remove the front pulley (4).
7. Remove the paddle link assembly (1), Figure 5 : Figure 6 Bearing removal
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. Install the paddle link assembly (1) as shown in Figure 9.
Figure 1 Connector
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the integrated office finisher, REP 12.1.
3. Remove the front inner cover, PL 12.05 Item 6.
4. Remove the stapler assembly, Figure 1:
a. Remove the clamps (1).
b. Disconnect the connectors (2).
c. Remove two screws (3).
d. Remove the stapler assembly (4).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the integrated office finisher, REP 12.1.
2. Remove the rear cover, PL 12.05 Item 14.
3. Disconnect the connector, Figure 1:
a. Release the harness from the clamps (1).
b. Disconnect the connector (2).
Figure 1 Connector
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Removal NOTE: Ensure that the paper guides on the upper chute, PL 12.13 Item 4 are not folded back
on top of the exit roll assembly.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the upper chute assembly, 2.
2. Remove the exit roll assembly, Figure 1:
a. Remove the E-ring, then the bearing (1).
b. Remove the E-ring, then the bearing (2).
c. Remove the exit roll assembly (3).
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the integrated office finisher, REP 12.1. 1. Remove the integrated office finisher, REP 12.1.
2. Remove the compiler assembly, REP 12.19. 2. Turn over the integrated office finisher.
3. Remove the pinch roll, Figure 1: 3. Remove the bottom cover, PL 12.06 Item 1.
a. Raise the four springs (1) in the direction of the arrow. 4. Remove the connector bracket, Figure 1:
b. Remove the four nip rolls (2). a. Release the harness from the three clamps (1).
b. Disconnect the connectors (2).
c. Remove two screws (3).
d. Remove the connector bracket (4).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Figure 1 Connector bracket removal
Figure 2 Bottom plate removal 7. Remove the finisher entry sensor (1) from the bracket, Figure 4.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the integrated office finisher, REP 12.1.
2. Remove the compiler assembly, REP 12.19.
3. Remove the gear, Figure 1:
a. Remove the E-clip (1).
b. Remove the gear (2).
c. Remove the KL-clip (3).
d. Remove the gear (4).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
5. Remove the bearing, Figure 3. 7. Remove the main paddle shaft assembly, Figure 5.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the staple assembly, refer to REP 12.4.
2. Turn over the integrated office finisher.
3. Remove the transport motor, Figure 1:
a. Remove two screws (1).
b. Remove the belt (2) from the pulley.
c. Remove the transport motor (3).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
5. Remove the gear pulley, Figure 3: 7. Remove the entrance lower chute assembly, Figure 5 :
a. Remove the E-clip (1). a. Remove two screws (1).
b. Remove the gear (2). b. Loosen two screws (2).
c. Remove the belt (3) from the pulley. c. Remove the entrance lower chute assembly (3).
d. Remove the flange (4).
Replacement
Figure 3 Gear pulley removal
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the upper chute assembly, 2.
2. Remove the entry roll, Figure 1:
a. Disconnect the spring (1).
b. Remove two E-clips (2).
c. Remove the arm (3).
d. Slide the shaft (4) out of the bearing in the arm.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
NOTE: Ensure that the paper guides on the upper chute, PL 12.13 Item 4 are not folded back
on top of the exit roll assembly.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the integrated office finisher, REP 12.1.
2. Remove the front inner cover, PL 12.05 Item 6.
3. Remove the rear cover, PL 12.05 Item 14.
4. Remove the left cover, PL 12.06 Item 4.
5. Remove the upper frame section, Figure 1:
a. Remove the screw, then the bracket (1).
b. Remove two screws (2).
c. Remove the screw, then the bracket (3).
d. Remove two screws (4).
e. Remove the upper frame section (5).
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the integrated office finisher, REP 12.1.
2. Remove the front inner cover, PL 12.05 Item 6.
3. Remove the rear cover, PL 12.05 Item 14.
4. Turn over the integrated office finisher.
5. Remove the bottom cover, PL 12.06 Item 1.
6. Remove the tray cover, PL 12.06 Item 3.
7. Disconnect the connector, Figure 1:
a. Release the clamp (1).
b. Remove the clamp (2).
c. Release the harness (3) from the retainer.
d. Release the clamp (4).
Figure 2 Harness release
e. Disconnect the connector (5).
f. Release the harness (6) from the retainer. 9. Remove the stacker sensor assembly, Figure 3:
a. Remove the screw (1).
b. Remove the stacker sensor assembly (2).
c. Release the four clamps (3).
d. Disconnect two connectors (4).
Figure 1 Connector
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the integrated office finisher, REP 12.1.
2. Remove the rear cover, PL 12.05 Item 14.
3. Turn over the integrated office finisher.
4. Remove the tray cover, PL 12.06 Item 3.
5. Remove the rear bracket, Figure 1:
a. Remove the screw (1).
b. Remove the bracket (2).
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. Install the stacker tray assembly and integrated office finisher as shown in Figure 5.
Figure 7 Preparation
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the integrated office finisher, REP 12.1.
2. Remove the rear cover, PL 12.05 Item 14.
3. Turn over the integrated office finisher.
4. Remove the tray cover, PL 12.06 Item 3.
5. Disconnect the connector, Figure 1:
a. Release the harness from the three clamps (1).
b. Release the harness from the retainer (2).
c. Disconnect the connector (3).
Figure 1 Connector
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the integrated office finisher, REP 12.1.
2. Remove the rear cover, PL 12.05 Item 14.
3. Turn over the integrated office finisher.
4. Remove the tray cover, PL 12.06 Item 3.
5. Remove the stacker sensor assembly, Figure 1:
a. Release the harness from the lamp (1).
b. Remove the screw (2).
c. Remove the stacker sensor assembly (3).
d. Disconnect the sensor connector (4), then remove the sensor from the bracket.
Figure 4 Stacker motor removal
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. Install the stacker motor as shown in Figure 5.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Figure 5 Front screw removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the compiler assembly, REP 12.19.
2. Remove the eject shaft assembly, REP 12.24.
3. Remove the actuator and the bearing, Figure 1:
a. Remove the E-clip (1).
b. Remove the actuator (2).
c. Remove E-clip (3).
d. Remove the bearing (4).
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the compiler assembly, REP 12.19.
2. Remove the front/rear tamper motor assembly, REP 12.25.
3. Move the eject home sensor assembly, Figure 1:
a. Remove the screw (1).
b. Move the eject home sensor assembly (2).
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the integrated office finisher, REP 12.1.
2. Remove the front inner cover, PL 12.05 Item 6.
3. Remove the rear cover, PL 12.05 Item 14.
4. Turn over the integrated office finisher.
5. Remove the bottom cover, PL 12.06 Item 1.
6. Remove the connector bracket, Figure 1:
a. Release the harness from the three clamps (1).
b. Disconnect five connectors (2).
c. Remove two screws (3).
d. Remove the connector bracket (4).
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. Ensure the eject belt is aligned with the marks on the pulleys, Figure 3.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the integrated office finisher, REP 12.1.
2. Remove the front inner cover, PL 12.05 Item 6.
3. Remove the rear cover, PL 12.05 Item 14.
4. Turn over the integrated office finisher.
5. Remove the bottom cover, PL 12.06 Item 1.
6. Remove the connector bracket, Figure 1:
a. Release the harness from the three clamps (1).
b. Disconnect the connectors (2).
c. Remove two screws (3).
d. Remove the connector bracket (4).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
9. Remove the rear tamper home sensor (1) from the bracket, Figure 4.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the compiler assembly, REP 12.19.
2. Remove the bracket assembly, Figure 1:
a. Release the harness from the two clamps (1).
b. Remove two screws (2).
c. Remove the bracket assembly (3).
Figure 2 KL-clips
4. Remove the eject shaft from the front/rear tamper motor assembly, Figure 3:
a. Move the bearings (1) in the direction of the arrow.
b. Remove the eject shaft (2) in the direction of the arrow.
c. Remove the belts (3) from the pulley.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the compiler assembly, REP 12.19.
2. Remove the eject shaft assembly, REP 12.24.
3. Remove the front/rear tamper motor assembly, Figure 1:
a. Remove two self-tapping screws (1).
b. Remove the screw (2).
c. Remove the front/rear tamper motor assembly (3).
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the integrated office finisher, REP 12.1.
2. Remove the front inner cover, PL 12.05 Item 6.
3. Remove the rear cover, PL 12.05 Item 14.
4. Turn over the integrated office finisher.
5. Remove the bottom cover, PL 12.06 Item 1.
6. Remove the connector bracket, Figure 1:
a. Release the harness from the three clamps (1).
b. Disconnect the connectors (2).
c. Remove two screws (3).
d. Remove the connector bracket (4).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the integrated office finisher, REP 12.1.
2. Remove the front inner cover, PL 12.05 Item 6.
3. Remove the rear cover, PL 12.05 Item 14.
4. Turn over the integrated office finisher.
5. Remove the bottom cover, PL 12.06 Item 1.
6. Remove the connector bracket, Figure 1:
a. Release the harness from the three clamps (1).
b. Disconnect the connectors (2).
c. Remove two screws (3).
Figure 2 Bottom plate removal
d. Remove the connector bracket (4).
8. Remove the eject home sensor, Figure 3:
a. Release the harness from the clamp (1).
b. Disconnect the connector (2).
c. Remove the eject home sensor (3) from the bracket.
7. Remove the bottom plate, Figure 2: Figure 3 Eject home sensor removal
a. Release the harness from the 5 clamps (1).
b. Disconnect eight connectors (2). Replacement
c. Remove the harness from the retainers (3). The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
d. Remove four screws (4).
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the integrated office finisher, REP 12.1.
2. Remove the front inner cover, PL 12.05 Item 6.
3. Remove the rear cover, PL 12.05 Item 14.
4. Turn over the integrated office finisher.
5. Remove the bottom cover, PL 12.06 Item 1.
6. Remove the connector bracket, Figure 1:
a. Release the harness from the three clamps (1).
b. Disconnect the connectors (2).
c. Remove two screws (3).
Figure 2 Bottom plate removal
d. Remove the connector bracket (4).
8. Remove the stacker tray, Figure 3:
a. Release the harness from the five clamps (1).
b. Disconnect the connector (2).
c. Remove seven screws (3).
d. Remove the stacker tray (4).
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Undock the finisher, REP 13.5.
NOTE: For clarity, the H-transport is shown removed from the machine in Figure 1.
2. Remove the H-transport assembly, Figure 1:
1. Hold open the H-transport top cover.
a. Disconnect the harness (1).
2. Open the H-transport front cover.
b. Remove two screws (2).
3. Remove the hole punch assembly, Figure 1:
c. Remove the docking plate (3).
a. Release the cable clamp (1).
d. Remove the H-transport (4).
b. Remove the connector cover (2), then disconnect the connector.
c. Remove the thumbscrew (3).
d. Remove the hole punch assembly (4).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the H-transport assembly, REP 13.1.
2. Remove the H-transport rear cover, PL 13.06 Item 9.
3. Remove the H-transport belt, Figure 1:
a. Loosen two screws to release the belt tension (1).
b. Remove the belt (2).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the H-transport assembly, REP 13.1. 1. Disconnect the finisher power cord, the H-transport connector and the finisher connector
2. Remove the H-transport rear cover, PL 13.06 Item 9. from the IOT.
3. Place the H-transport top down on a work surface.
4. Remove the H-transport motor, Figure 1: CAUTION
a. Remove the screw, then the shield (1). Take care not to topple the finisher. The finisher is unstable when un-docked from the machine.
b. Disconnect the connector (2). 2. Raise the feet (1) to free the finisher, Figure 1.
c. Loosen two screws to release the belt tension (3).
d. Remove two screws (3), then remove the H-transport motor.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Undock the finisher, REP 13.5.
CAUTION
Take care not drop the booklet maker thumb screw into the finisher.
2. Remove the booklet maker, REP 13.31.
3. Open the finisher front door, PL 13.10 Item 5.
4. Remove the five screws, then the front cover, PL 13.10 Item 4.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement
1. Align the machine docking bracket with the cut outs in the finisher docking bracket.
2. Mate the finisher to the machine until it latches.
3. Check that the finisher is firmly latched to the machine.
4. Perform the remainder of the replacement procedure in reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Undock the finisher, REP 13.5. 1. Undock the finisher, REP 13.5.
2. Remove the booklet maker, REP 13.31. 2. Remove three screws, then the rear lower cover, PL 13.10 Item 8.
3. Remove four screws, then the rear upper cover, PL 13.10 Item 9. Replacement
Replacement The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Removal NOTE: The left side of the cover will be captured by the pins and cannot be lifted up.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the eject cover, Figure 1:
a. Unlatch the eject cover (1), then move it to the left.
b. Remove the retaining screw (2).
c. Push the latch (3) through the hole in the cover.
d. Remove the cover by moving it to the left.
Figure 3 Inserting the Latch 5. Install the retaining screw (1), Figure 6.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the screw (1), then the foot cover (2), Figure 1. 1. Remove the foot cover, REP 13.10.
2. Remove the two screws (1), then the stacker lower cover (2), Figure 1.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the stacker tray, REP 13.20. 1. Remove the rear upper cover, REP 13.7.
2. Remove the stacker lower cover, REP 13.11. 2. Remove the relevant stack height sensor, Figure 1:
3. Remove six screws (1), then the stacker upper cover (2), Figure 1. a. Disconnect the relevant connector (1).
b. Remove either stack height sensor 1 (2) or stack height sensor 2 (3).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Figure 1 Sensor removal
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the eject cover, REP 13.9. 1. Remove the finisher stapler assembly, REP 13.16.
2. Remove the sub paddle solenoid assembly, Figure 1: 2. Remove two screws (1), Figure 1.
a. Disconnect the connector (1).
b. Release the harness from the clamps (2).
c. Remove the screw (3), then the sub paddle solenoid assembly.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the creaser knife assembly, REP 13.18.
2. Remove the front cover assembly, REP 13.6.
3. Remove the stapler cover, Figure 1:
a. Remove the screw (1).
b. Remove the stapler cover (2).
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. Perform ADJ 13.2 Finisher LX Booklet Crease/Staple Position.
Figure 9 Set clamp shaft removal 18. Usually this level of compiler tray assembly removal is to facilitate removal of the front or
rear tamper motors, tamper home sensors or compiler tray no paper sensor. However, if
the compiler tray assembly is to be completely removed, it will be necessary to disconnect
all the connectors to the tamper motors, tamper home sensors and no paper sensor and
release the harnesses from the guides.
7. Attach the spring to the gear and slide the gear into position.
Figure 17 Set clamp holder springs Figure 18 Eject roll shaft installation
14. Perform the remainder of the replacement procedure in reverse of the removal procedure.
Figure 19 Eject roll shaft rear components
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the crease assembly, Figure 1:
a. Open the finisher front door.
b. Remove the guard (1).
c. Disconnect the cable (2).
NOTE: Pull out the cable tie (3) to obtain additional slack in the cable.
d. Remove the thumbscrew (4).
e. Pull out the crease assembly (5).
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the finisher rear upper cover, REP 13.7. 1. If installed, remove the booklet maker assembly, REP 13.31.
2. Disconnect PJ8988 on the finisher control PWB. 2. Remove the front cover assembly, REP 13.6.
3. Release the harness from the clamps. 3. Remove the rear upper cover, REP 13.7.
4. Remove the wires from the wire guide, remove two screws, then move the wire guide to 4. Remove the stacker tray, Figure 1:
one side. a. Remove four screws (1).
5. Use a 5.5 mm combination wrench to remove both screws from the motor mount. b. Remove the stacker tray (2).
6. Remove the stacker elevator motor.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Undock the finisher, REP 13.5. 1. Undock the finisher, REP 13.5.
2. Remove the booklet maker, REP 13.31. 2. Remove the booklet maker, REP 13.31.
3. Remove the rear upper cover, REP 13.7. 3. Remove the rear upper cover, REP 13.7.
4. Remove the eject motor, REP 13.25. 4. Prepare to remove the eject motor assembly, PL 13.27 Item 3.
5. Remove the eject belt, PL 13.29 Item 10. a. Disconnect the eject motor connector.
Replacement b. Remove the harness from the harness guide.
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. c. Disconnect both wire harness clamps.
d. Remove both screws from the harness guide, then move the harness guide aside.
e. Disconnect the spring.
5. Remove four screws, then eject motor assembly.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. If possible, record the current software level by either:
• Printing the configuration report, GP 14.
• From the user interface Home screen, touch Device, then About. Scroll down to view
the Software Version.
2. Remove the rear upper cover, REP 13.7.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. Check the machines current software level against the software level recorded prior to
installation of the new finisher PWB. If necessary, reload the software, GP 4.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the rear lower cover, REP 13.8.
2. Remove the finisher LVPS, Figure 1:
a. Disconnect both Connectors (1).
b. Remove four screws (2).
c. Remove the finisher LVPS (3).
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Undock the finisher, REP 13.5. 1. Remove the compiler tray, REP 13.17.
2. Remove the booklet maker, REP 13.31. 2. Place the compiler tray upside down on a work surface.
3. Remove the rear upper cover, REP 13.7. 3. Remove the tamper motor, Figure 1:
4. Remove the eject motor assembly, REP 13.22. a. Release the harness (1) from the harness guide.
5. Remove four screws, then the eject motor, PL 13.27 Item 4. b. Remove the screw (2), then the harness guide.
Replacement c. Disconnect the tamper motor connector (3).
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. d. Remove both screws, then the relevant tamper motor (4).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the compiler tray assembly, REP 13.17. 1. Remove the compiler tray assembly, REP 13.17.
2. Place the compiler tray upside down on a work surface. 2. Place the compiler tray upside down on a work surface.
3. Remove the front or rear tamper home sensor, Figure 1: 3. Remove the screw (1) that secures the bracket, Figure 1.
a. Disconnect the connector (1).
b. Remove the front or rear tamper home sensor (2).
NOTE: The removal of the rear tamper home sensor is shown in Figure 1.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Enter dC330, code 12-060 stacker motor up, to fully raise the stacker tray.
2. Remove the finisher front cover,REP 13.6.
3. Remove the rear upper cover, REP 13.7.
4. Remove the rear lower cover, REP 13.8.
5. Remove the stacker tray, REP 13.20.
6. Removing the carriage assembly, Figure 1:
a. Disconnect, then remove the spring (1).
b. Use a flat bladed screwdriver to release the belt clamp latch (2).aside and
c. Remove the stacker belt and carriage assembly.
NOTE: The carriage bearings (2 each assembly) are not fastened to the shafts.
Ensure the bearings are retained when the carriage assembly is removed.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
CAUTION
Ensure that the front and rear carriage assemblies are installed at the same height.
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the booklet PWB cover, REP 13.35.
2. Remove the booklet PWB, Figure 1:
a. Disconnect all connectors from the booklet PWB.
b. Remove four screws (1).
c. Remove the booklet PWB (2).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Prepare to remove the booklet maker assembly, Figure 1:
a. Unlatch the eject cover (1), then move it all the way to the left.
b. Remove the front and rear thumbscrews (2).
Figure 1 Preparation
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the booklet maker assembly from the finisher, REP 13.31.
2. Remove the screw (1), Figure 1.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the booklet maker assembly from the finisher, REP 13.31.
2. Remove the booklet PWB cover, REP 13.35.
3. Prepare to remove the booklet rear cover, Figure 1:
a. Remove both self-tapping screws (1).
b. Remove the booklet side cover (2).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Figure 1 Preparation
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the booklet front cover, REP 13.32. 1. Remove the booklet PWB cover, Figure 1:
2. Remove the booklet rear cover, REP 13.33. a. Remove both self-tapping screws (1).
3. Remove the booklet top cover, Figure 1: b. Remove both screws (2).
a. Remove four screws (1). c. Remove the booklet PWB cover (3).
b. Remove the booklet top cover (2).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the booklet maker from the finisher, REP 13.31. 1. Remove the booklet maker from the finisher, REP 13.31.
2. Remove the booklet maker left cover: 2. Remove the stapler guide, Figure 1:
a. Align the slots at the front and rear of the booklet maker left cover with the flats on a. Remove the screw (1).
the mounting pins. b. Remove the stapler guide (2).
b. Move the booklet maker left cover by allowing the flats on the mounting pins to slide
through the slots in the cover.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Figure 3 Preparation
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. Perform ADJ 13.2 Finisher LX Booklet Crease/Staple Position.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the front cover. 1. As necessary, remove the:
2. Remove the front cover, Figure 1: • Integrated finisher, REP 12.1.
a. Rotate the two strap (1) 90 degrees, then disconnect. • Office finisher LX, REP 13.5.
b. Press the stopper (2), then move the front cover (3) to the left. Remove the front • Horizontal transport, REP 13.1.
cover from the boss (4). 2. Remove the front cover, REP 28.1.
3. Remove the waste bottle. REP 90.6.
4. Remove the pillar left cover, PL 28.05 Item 13.
5. Remove the top cover, REP 28.4.
6. Remove the inner cover, Figure 1:
a. Remove the screws (1).
b. Remove the inner cover (2).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. If a finisher LX is installed, undock the finisher LX, REP 13.5. 1. As necessary, remove the:
2. If a finisher LX is installed, remove the vertical infill covers, PL 13.40. • Integrated finisher, REP 12.1.
3. Open the front cover. • Office finisher LX, REP 13.5.
4. Pull out tray 1. • Horizontal transport, REP 13.1.
5. Remove the right cover, Figure 1: 2. Open the front cover.
a. Remove two screws (1). 3. Remove the pillar left cover, PL 28.05 Item 13.
b. Remove the right cover (2). 4. Remove the exit front cover, PL 28.05 Item 10.
5. Remove the top cover, Figure 1:
a. Remove two screws (1).
b. Remove the top cover (2).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the upper rear cover, Figure 1:
a. Remove ten screws (1).
b. Remove the upper rear cover (2).
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. When installing the top cover, align the bosses on the rear of the top cover with the
mounting holes.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the upper rear cover, REP 28.5.
2. Remove the AC stopper bracket, PL 1.15 Item 5.
3. Remove the cover (1), disconnect all connectors (2), Figure 1.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Figure 1 Connector
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the upper rear cover, REP 28.5.
2. Remove the lower rear cover, REP 28.6.
3. Remove the right cover, REP 28.3.
4. Remove the ESS PWB chassis assembly, REP 3.2.
5. Remove the LVPS assembly, REP 1.4. Figure 2 Drive assembly connector
6. Remove the harness upper bracket PL 1.10 Item 6.
11. Remove ten screws (1) that secure the drive assembly, Figure 3.
7. Remove the drive PWB assembly, REP 1.5.
8. Release the hook (1) to move the FCC cable guide, FCC cables and wire harness (2),
Figure 1.
Replacement
Figure 4 Rear duct marking removal 1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. When installing the drive assembly, align each of the fours bosses on the assembly with
13. Release the hook (1), carefully move the drive assembly down and remove the drive the receptacles in the chassis, Figure 7.
assembly, Figure 5.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the upper rear cover, REP 28.5.
2. Remove the lower rear cover, REP 28.6.
3. Remove the LVPS assembly, REP 1.4.
4. Remove the fusing unit drive motor PWB, Figure 1.
a. Remove the connector (1).
b. Remove two screws (2).
c. Remove the fusing unit drive motor PWB (3).
Figure 8 FFC guide insertion
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the upper rear cover, REP 28.5. 1. Remove the upper rear cover, REP 28.5.
2. Remove the lower rear cover, REP 28.6. 2. Remove the lower rear cover, REP 28.6.
3. Remove the LVPS assembly, REP 1.4. 3. Remove the LVPS assembly, REP 1.4.
4. Remove the main motor PWB, Figure 1. 4. Remove the sub motor PWB, Figure 1.
a. Remove the connector (1). a. Remove the connector (1).
b. Remove two screws (2). b. Remove two screws (2).
c. Remove the main motor PWB (3). c. Remove the sub motor PWB (3).
Figure 1 Main motor PWB removal Figure 1 Sub motor PWB removal
Replacement Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. 1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the DADF. 1. Remove the document glass, REP 60.1.
2. Remove the right plate, PL 60.10 Item 11. 2. Remove the lens cover assembly, PL 60.10 Item 12.
3. Remove the document glass, PL 60.10 Item 9. 3. Move the APS sensor, Figure 1.
Replacement a. Remove two screws (1).
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. b. Release the harness from the retainers (2).
2. Before tightening the two screws, align the document glass in the direction of arrow A and c. Move the APS sensors (3).
the right plate in the direction of arrow B, Figure 1.
Figure 1 Alignment
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Take care during this procedure. Sharp edges may be present can cause injury.
NOTE: The edge of the IIT frame has a burr. Be careful when disconnect the carriage cable.
NOTE: The color of the front and rear carriage cables are different. The front cable is silver, the
rear cable is black.
NOTE: The installation of a new rear carriage cable is described in this procedure. The Figure 1 Front glass support
replacement procedure for the front carriage cable is the same.
6. Remove the CVT glass, Figure 2:
a. Remove the screw (1).
CAUTION b. Remove the front glass support (2).
Carriage cables must be replaced one at a time. Do not remove both front and rear cables at c. Remove the CVT glass (3).
the same time.
1. Open the DADF. NOTE: The CVT glass must be reinstalled with the mark toward the rear of the
machine. Refer to Figure 2.
2. Remove the document glass, REP 60.1.
3. Remove the UI assembly, REP 2.1.
4. Remove the left cover, PL 60.05 Item 1.
Mark
Replacement
Figure 3 Cable detachment 1. Insert the anchor ball of the carriage cable into the groove in the capstan, Figure 6.
Figure 4 Preparation
Color: Black
2.5 Turns
3 Turns
Color: Silver
Front
2.5 Turns
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
Do not touch the chip on the lamp assembly.
1. Open the DADF.
2. Remove the document glass, REP 60.1
3. Move the full rate carriage to the cutouts in the frame.
4. Disconnect the FFC LED cable assembly, Figure 1:
a. Move the connector housing catch (2) in the direction of the arrows.
b. Disconnect the FFC LED cable assembly. Figure 2 LED bracket removal
CAUTION
Do not touch the chip on the lamp assembly.
1. Remove the DADF, REP 5.1.
2. Remove the upper rear cover, REP 28.5.
3. Disconnect the FFC LED cable assembly, Figure 1:
a. Move the connector housing catch (2) in the direction of the arrows.
b. Disconnect the FFC LED cable assembly (1).
Figure 4 Screws
CAUTION
Be careful when lifting out the full rate carriage. It is still connected to the FFC cable and can-
not be fully removed from the scanner assembly.
8. Disconnect the FFC LED cable assembly from the guide, Figure 5.
Figure 2 Full rate carriage removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
Do not touch the light guide with bare hands.
1. Remove the DADF, REP 5.1.
2. Remove the document glass, REP 60.1.
3. Move the full rate carriage to the cutouts in the frame.
4. Remove the LED bracket, Figure 1:
a. Remove three screws (1).
b. Remove the LED bracket (2).
Figure 6 Cable assembly disconnection (3)
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. Perform ADJ 60.1 Full/Half Rate Carriage Position Adjustment.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. When installing the light guide, insert the boss into the locating hole in the full rate car-
riage.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
Do not touch the surface of the drum cartridge.
Because the removal procedure for the LPH assembly (Y, M, C, K) is the same, the following
describes only the procedure for the LPH assembly (K).
1. Open the front cover.
2. Open the LH transport assembly.
3. Remove the Y, M, C, K drum cartridges, REP 90.12
4. Remove the Y, M, C, K developer unit, REP 90.1
5. Remove the IBT belt unit, REP 90.7
6. Remove the inner cover, REP 28.2
7. LPH (Y) Only: Remove the right cover, REP 28.3.
8. LPH (Y) Only: Remove the HVPS, REP 1.1.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. CAUTION
2. When installing the LPH, insert the tab at the bottom of the LPH into the installation hole Observe ESD procedures during this procedure.
of the marking guide, Figure 7.
CAUTION
To prevent light fatigue, either wrap the removed drum cartridge in a sheet of black paper or
store it in a black bag.
CAUTION
Do not touch the surface of the drum cartridge.
1. Remove the upper rear cover, REP 28.5.
2. Remove the lower rear cover, REP 28.6.
Figure 7 Block
4. If the machine had an HDD assembly installed, remove both screws (1), then the HDD 6. Disconnect cables (1) from drive PWB, remove the harness clips (2), and remove the har-
bracket (2), Figure 3. ness from FFC guide, Figure 5.
8. Remove the ferrite core and FFC cables from the FFC guide.
9. Carefully pull each FFC cable through the ferrite core.
Figure 8 Container support
Reference: This shows the rear of the unit with FCC cables removed from ferrite core,
Figure 7. 18. Remove the screws that secure the LPH and marking guide, Figure 9.
a. Remove the screws that secure each LPH.
b. Remove two screws indicated with a triangle mark that secure the marking guide.
Figure 12 LPH
Figure 10 Marking guide
23. Push the LPH (Y) towards the direction of the arrow, and place it so the right side of LPH
20. Insert the FFC cable (1) and the wire harness (2) into the machine, Figure 11. (Y) is on the top, Figure 13.
25. Repeat for all FFC cables, removing in the order of Y, M, C, K, Figure 15.
Figure 16 FFC cable
3. When installing the LPH, insert the tab at the bottom of the LPH into the installation hole
of the marking guide, Figure 17.
5. When installing the FFC cable guide, insert the hooks into the installation holes, Figure
19.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove tray 1. 1. Remove the hinge rear cover, Figure 1:
2. Remove the tray 1 size sensor, Figure 1: a. Remove the screw (1).
a. Disconnect the connector (1). b. Remove the hinge rear cover (2).
b. Remove the screw (2).
c. Remove the tray 1 size sensor (3).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the HCF tray by pulling the tray forward. 1. Disconnect the HCF power cable from the machine.
2. Remove all paper from the HCF tray. 2. Pull the HCF away from the machine.
3. Using a small screwdriver, or other small, blunt instrument, release the stopper on each 3. Release the docking latch spring lever (1) on the right side of the docking base, Figure 1.
rail of the tray by inserting the screwdriver into the hole of the stopper and pulling the tray
toward you.
4. Remove the HCF tray by pulling the tray forward.
Replacement
1. Slide the two rails into the HCF housing.
2. Line up the rails of the tray with the adjoining rails of the HCF and push the tray into place.
3. Reload the paper.
Figure 3 Preparation
Figure 2 Tray cable pulley
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the HCF tray front cover, PL 70.50 Item 7.
2. Free movement of the front tray cable pulley, Figure 1.
a. Remove the E-ring (1) on the lift shaft.
b. Slide the bearing (2) to the rear on the lift shaft.
c. Front tray cable pulley (3).
Tray cable
Bottom plate
Figure 6 Replacement
Figure 2 Preparation
Figure 3 Releasing the cable ends
2. When reinstalling the HCF tray front cover, raise the gear on the indicator shaft so that it
meshes with the adjoining lift shaft gear.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Undock the HCF, REP 70.4.
2. Remove all paper from the HCF tray.
3. Move the HCF away from the machine.
4. Turn the HCF over onto its left side to expose the casters on the underside of the HCF.
5. Remove the relevant caster, PL 70.60 Item 2.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
CAUTION
Observe ESD procedures during this procedure.
1. If possible, record the current software level by either:
• Printing the configuration report, GP 14.
• From the user interface Home screen, touch Device, then About. Scroll down to view
the Software Version.
2. Undock the HCF, REP 70.4.
3. Remove the rear cover, PL 70.45 Item 10.
4. Disconnect all connectors from the HCF PWB.
5. Remove the HCF PWB, PL 70.60 Item 9.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. Check the machines current software level against the software level recorded prior to
installation of the new user interface assembly. If necessary, reload the software, GP 4.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the paper from tray 3.
2. Fully pull out tray 3. Remove the paper from tray 3. Lift out tray 3.
3. Remove the tray 3 front cover, PL 70.65 Item 18.
4. Release the front lift cables, Figure 1:
a. Remove the E-clip (1).
b. Release the front lift cables (2).
Figure 5 Pin
3. Ensure the brake (1) is correctly positioned against the tray frame, Figure 6.
Figure 6 Brake
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
Ensure the tray 4 transport assembly, PL 80.70 Item 11 is supported when removing tray 4.
1. Fully pull out tray 4. Remove the paper from tray 4. Lift out tray 4.
2. Remove the tray 4 transport assembly, PL 80.70 Item 11.
3. Remove the tray 4 front cover, PL 70.65 Item 3.
4. Turn tray 4 upside down.
5. Release the front lift cables, Figure 1:
a. Remove the E-clip (1).
b. Release the front lift cables (2).
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove tray 1.
2. Remove the tray 1 RAI cover, PL 70.05 Item 10.
Replacement
1. Install the RAI cover onto the new tray 1.
2. Install the new tray 1 assembly.
Figure 5 Pin
3. Ensure the brake (1) is correctly positioned against the tray frame, Figure 6.
Figure 6 Brake
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performin g tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Pull out tray 1.
2. Open the LH transport assembly.
3. Remove the bypass tray, REP 70.2.
4. Remove the bypass tray R cover, Figure 1:
a. Remove the screw (1).
b. Remove the bypass tray R cover (2).
Figure 2 Connectors
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: New feed, retard and nudger rolls must be installed at the same time.
1. Pull out tray 1.
2. Remove the tray 1 feed, retard and nudger rolls, Figure 1:
a. Slide the chute (1) forwards.
b. Release the clip, then remove the tray 1 feed, retard and nudger rolls (2).
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Figure 5 Tray 1 feeder assembly removal 2. If new tray 1 feed, retard and nudger rolls are installed, enter dC135 HFSI Counter. Reset
the HFSI counter 954-800.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. If a new tray 1 feeder assembly is installed, enter dC135 HFSI Counter. Reset the HFSI
counter 954-800.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Pull out tray 2. Remove the paper.
2. Remove tray 2.
3. Open the left cover assembly, PL 70.15 Item 12.
4. Remove the ESD cover, Figure 1:
a. Disengage the hook (1).
b. Remove the ESD cover (2).
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. If a new tray 2 feeder assembly is installed, enter dC135 HFSI Counter. Reset the HFSI
counter 954-801.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Pull out tray 2. Remove the paper.
NOTE: New feed, retard and nudger rolls must be installed at the same time.
2. Remove tray 2.
1. Pull out tray 1 and tray 2. Remove the paper.
3. Open the left cover assembly, PL 70.20 Item 11.
2. Remove tray 1 and tray 2.
4. Remove the ESD cover, Figure 1:
3. Open the left cover assembly, PL 70.15 Item 12.
a. Disengage the hook (1).
4. Remove the tray 2 feed, retard and nudger rolls (1TM), Figure 1:
b. Remove the ESD cover (2).
a. Slide the chute (1) forwards.
b. Release the clip, then remove the tray 2 feed, retard and nudger rolls (2).
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. If new tray 2 feed, retard and nudger rolls are installed, enter dC135 HFSI Counter. Reset
the HFSI counter 954-801.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Pull out tray 3. Remove the paper.
2. Remove tray 3.
3. Open the left cover assembly, PL 70.20 Item 11.
4. Remove the ESD cover, Figure 1:
a. Disengage the hook (1)
b. Remove the ESD cover (2).
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. If new tray 2 feeder assembly is installed, enter dC135 HFSI Counter. Reset the HFSI
counter 954-801.
Replacement
CAUTION
Ensure that the FDR 2T cover is installed onto the new tray 3 feeder assembly. Refer to Figure
3.
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. If new tray 3 feeder assembly is installed, enter dC135 HFSI Counter. Reset the HFSI
counter 954-802.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Pull out tray 4. Remove the paper.
2. Remove tray 4.
3. Open the left cover assembly, PL 70.20 Item 11.
4. Remove the ESD cover, Figure 1:
a. Disengage the hook (1)
b. Remove the ESD cover (2). Figure 2 Tray 4 feeder assembly removal
6. Remove the FDR 2T cover from the main tray 4 feeder, Figure 3.
a. Remove the screw (1).
b. Remove the FDR 2T cover (2). Retain the cover for installation onto the new tray 4
feeder assembly.
CAUTION
Observe ESD procedures during this procedure.
1. Remove the rear cover, Figure 2:
a. Remove four screws (1).
b. Remove the rear cover (2).
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the rear cover, Figure 1:
a. Remove four screws (1).
b. Remove the rear cover.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. If a new 3TM PWB is installed, enter dC131. Change the value of NVM ID 742-205 to '1'.
NOTE: New feed, retard and nudger rolls must be installed at the same time.
1. Pull out trays 2, 3 and 4. Remove the paper.
2. Remove trays 2, 3 and 4.
3. Open the left cover assembly, PL 70.20 Item 11.
4. Remove the tray 2, 3 or 4 feed, retard and nudger rolls, Figure 1:
a. Slide the chute (1) forwards.
b. Release the clip, then remove the tray 2, 3 or 4 feed, retard and nudger rolls (2).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. If new rolls are installed, enter dC135 HFSI Counter. Reset the HFSI counters that follow:
• Tray 2 Chain-Link: 954-801
• Tray 3 Chain-Link: 954-802
• Tray 4 Chain-Link: 954-803
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: The instructions for recording the NVM value specified in this procedure are also
included with the new STM PWB.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. If a new STM PWB is installed, enter dC131. Change the value of NVM location 742-003
to the value recorded at the beginning of this procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the rear cover, Figure 1:
a. Remove the docking screw (1).
b. Remove the docking bracket (2).
c. Remove two screws (3).
d. Remove the rear cover (4).
Figure 2 STM takeaway motor removal
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: New feed, retard and nudger rolls must be installed at the same time. NOTE: New feed and nudger rolls and a retard pad must be installed at the same time. Refer
to REP 80.17.
1. Pull out tray 1 and tray 2. Remove the paper.
2. Remove tray 1 and tray 2. 1. Remove the bypass tray, REP 70.2.
3. Open the left cover assembly, PL 70.25 Item 2. 2. Remove the upper frame, Figure 1:
4. Remove the tray 2 feed, retard and nudger rolls (1TM), Figure 1: a. Remove the spring (1).
a. Slide the chute (1) forwards. b. Remove two crews (2).
b. Release the clip, then remove the tray 2 feed, retard and nudger rolls (2). c. Remove the upper frame (3).
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. If new tray 2 feed, retard and nudger rolls are installed, enter dC135 HFSI Counter. Reset
the HFSI counter 954-801.
4. Release the shaft, then remove the shaft in the direction of the arrow, Figure 3. 6. Remove the bypass tray feed clutch, Figure 5:
a. Release the hook, then remove the gear (1).
b. Remove the E-clip (2).
c. Remove the bypass tray feed clutch from the shaft (3).
Figure 7 Shaft
Figure 9 Feed clutch alignment
3. If new bypass tray feed and nudger rolls are installed, enter dC135 HFSI Counter. Reset
the HFSI counter 954-805.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: A new retard pad and feed and nudger rolls must be installed at the same time. Refer
to REP 80.16.
4. Release three hooks (1) and three bosses (2) from the installation holes to open the
bypass tray lower cover, Figure 3.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the bypass tray, REP 70.2.
2. Pull out tray 1. Remove the screw (1) that secures the hinge front cover, Figure 1.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. If new bypass tray retard pad is installed, enter dC135 HFSI Counter. Reset the HFSI
counter 954-805.
Figure 3 Connector
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the bypass tray, REP 70.2.
2. Remove the L/H cover, REP 80.18.
3. Remove the connector cover, Figure 1:
a. Remove the screw (1).
b. Remove the connector cover (2).
Figure 5 Alignment
CAUTION
When reinstalled the LH cover, do not let the rear harness guide (1) contact the bracket. Refer
to Figure 6.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the drum cartridges, REP 90.12.
2. Remove the front cover, REP 28.1.
3. Remove the inner cover, REP 28.2.
4. Remove the bypass tray, REP 70.2.
5. Remove the LH cover, REP 80.18.
6. Remove the registration transport assembly, REP 80.19.
Figure 2 Connector removal
7. Remove the drive assembly, REP 40.1.
5. Remove the registration transport assembly, Figure 3: 8. Remove the registration clutch assembly, Figure 1:
a. Remove the screw (1). a. Release the harness from the guide (1).
b. Disconnect the connector (2).
CAUTION c. Remove the E-clip (3).
Take care not to damage the paper guide when removing the registration transport d. Remove the registration clutch gear (4).
assembly. Damage to the paper guide may result in paper jams. e. Remove the registration clutch assembly (5).
b. Move the registration transport assembly (2) to the rear, then forward, (as shown by
direction of the arrows) and remove.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. When installing the registration clutch assembly, align the cutout with the harness guide
tab, Figure 5.
Cutout
Figure 5 Alignment
CAUTION
WARNING Do not over tighten the HCF Feeder screws.
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord 3. Reinstall the two securing screws.
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Move the HCF away form the machine.
2. Open the feeder top cover, PL 70.55 Item 7.
3. Remove two screws (1) that secure the HCF feeder to the rail, Figure 1.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the HCF feeder, REP 80.21.
2. Place the feeder on a flat surface. Release the green lever to open the upper feeder
assembly.
3. Remove the retard lever spring, Figure 1:
a. Remove the lower chute (1).
b. Remove the plastic cover (2).
c. Remove the retard roll (3).
d. Remove the E-rings on the lever and spring.
e. Remove the lever (4).
NOTE: Note how the spring extension fits into the lever.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. Ensure that the plastic pads on the lower chute fit in the track before pushing it in.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Undock the HCF, REP 70.4. 1. Remove the TTM rear cover, PL 70.95 Item 8.
2. Remove rear cover, PL 70.45 Item 10. 2. Remove the takeaway motor 2, REP 80.37.
3. Disconnect the connector from the motor. 3. Remove the TTM drive belt, PL 70.85 Item 10.
NOTE: Be careful when removing the motor as it is meshed to a hidden gear. Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
4. While supporting the motor with one hand, remove two screws then the HCF feed/lift
2. Ensure that the drive belt (1) is installed as shown in Figure 1.
motor (1), Figure 1.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the tray 4 feeder assembly, REP 80.35. 1. Remove the lower (tray 3 and 4) takeaway roll, REP 80.41.
2. Turn the tray 4 feeder assembly upside down. 2. Remove the TTM chute, Figure 1:
3. Remove the lower feed chute, Figure 1: a. Remove two screws (1).
a. Remove two screws (1). b. Move the TTM chute (2) towards the rear, then remove the TTM chute.
b. Remove the lower feed chute (2).
NOTE: The TTM chute is secured in the centre by a clip feature.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the tray 4 feeder assembly, REP 80.35.
2. Remove the upper feed chute, Figure 1: CAUTION
a. Remove two screws (1). Ensure that the tray 4 transport assembly, PL 80.70 Item 11 is supported when removing the
b. Remove the lower feed chute (2). tray 4 assembly.
1. Fully pull out tray 4. Lift out the tray 4 assembly, PL 70.65 Item 1.
2. Remove the tray 4 transport assembly from the tray 4 assembly, Figure 1:
a. Remove two screws (1).
b. Remove the tray 4 transport assembly (2).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Pull out tray 2. Remove the paper.
2. Remove tray 2.
3. Open the left cover assembly, PL 70.70 Item 7.
4. Remove the ESD cover (1), Figure 1:
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Figure 2 Connectors
Figure 4 Tray 2 feeder assembly removal
6. Remove the upper door catch (1), Figure 3.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. If new tray 2 feeder assembly is installed, enter dC135 HFSI Counter. Reset the HFSI
counter 954-801.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Pull out tray 3. Remove the paper.
2. Lift out tray 3.
3. Open the left cover assembly, PL 70.70 Item 7.
4. Remove the ESD cover (1) Figure 1:
Figure 2 Connectors
Replacement
CAUTION
Ensure that the feeder cover is installed onto the new tray 3 feeder assembly. Refer to Figure
6.
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. If new tray 3 feeder assembly is installed, enter dC135 HFSI Counter. Reset the HFSI
counter 954-802.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Pull out tray 2, 3 and 4. Remove the paper.
2. Lift out tray 3 and 4. Remove tray 2.
3. Remove the support bracket (1), Figure 1.
Figure 2 Preparation
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the upper (tray 2) takeaway roll, REP 80.41.
2. Remove two screws (1), Figure 1.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. If new tray 4 feeder assembly is installed, enter dC135 HFSI Counter. Reset the HFSI Figure 1 Screw removal
counter 954-803.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the TTM rear cover, PL 70.95 Item 8.
2. Remove the takeaway motor, Figure 1:
a. Unhook the spring (1).
b. Disconnect the PJ and release the harness (2).
c. Remove three screws (3).
d. Remove takeaway motor 2 (4).
Replacement
Figure 3 Sensor removal
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement 2. Ensure that the drive belt is correctly installed, refer to REP 80.28.
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: New feed, retard and nudger rolls must be installed at the same time. NOTE: New feed, retard and nudger rolls must be installed at the same time.
1. Pull out trays 2, 3 and 4. Remove the paper. 1. Pull out trays 2, 3 and 4. Remove the paper.
2. Remove trays 2, 3 and 4. 2. Remove trays 2, 3 and 4.
3. Open the left cover assembly, PL 70.70 Item 7. 3. Open the left cover assembly, PL 70.70 Item 7.
4. Remove the tray 2 or 3 feed, retard and nudger rolls, Figure 1: 4. Remove the tray 4 feed, retard and nudger rolls, Figure 1:
a. Slide the chute (1) forwards. a. Slide the chute (1) forwards.
b. Release the clip, then remove the tray 2 or 3 feed, retard and nudger rolls (2). b. Release the clip, then remove the tray 4 feed, retard and nudger rolls (2).
Replacement
Figure 1 Roll removal
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement 2. If new rolls are installed, enter dC135 HFSI Counter. Reset the HFSI counter that follows:
• Tray 4 Chain-Link: 954-803
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. If new rolls are installed, enter dC135 HFSI Counter. Reset the HFSI counters that follow:
• Tray 2 Chain-Link: 954-801
• Tray 3 Chain-Link: 954-802
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Pull out tray 3. Remove the paper. Perform the relevant procedure:
2. Remove the bracket assembly, PL 70.85 Item 9. • Upper (Tray 2) Takeaway Roll
3. Remove the transfer gear, PL 70.85 Item 8 from the bracket. • Lower (Tray 3 and 4) Takeaway Roll
Replacement Upper (Tray 2) Takeaway Roll
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. 1. Pull out trays 2, 3 and 4. Remove the paper.
2. Remove trays 2, 3 and 4.
3. Remove the tray 2 feeder assembly, REP 80.33.
4. Remove the rear cover, PL 70.95 Item 8.
5. Remove the takeaway motor assembly,PL 70.85 Item 1.
6. Remove two rear screws (1), Figure 1.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement
Figure 5 Gear removal The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
4. Remove the KL-clip (1), then the release the bearing (2), Figure 6.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
Figure 2 TTM PWB removal
Observe ESD procedures during this procedure.
1. Remove the TTM rear cover, PL 70.95 Item 8. Replacement
2. Remove the TTM PWB, Figure 2:
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
a. Disconnect seven connectors.
2. If a new TTM PWB is installed, enter dC131. Change the value of NVM ID 742-205 to '2'.
b. Remove six screws.
c. Remove the TTM PWB (1). Figure 2.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
To prevent light fatigue, either wrap the removed drum cartridge in a sheet of black paper or
store it in a black bag.
CAUTION
Do not touch the surface of the drum cartridge.
1. Prepare a sheet of black paper or a black bag.
2. Open the front cover.
3. Remove the waste bottle. REP 90.6.
4. Turn the lever of the color to be replaced in the direction of the arrow.
5. Remove the drum cartridge of the color to be replaced, Figure 1. Figure 2 Cover harness removal
a. Remove the thumbscrew (1).
b. Remove the drum cartridge (2).
CAUTION
When removing the developer unit, make sure to lift the developer unit from the rear and be
careful so as to not damage the IBT Belt.
8. Remove the developer unit, Figure 3.
a. Disconnect the connector (1).
b. Remove the screw (2).
c. Turn and hold the lever (3) and remove the developer unit.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. When installing the developer unit, align the developer unit rib to the main unit guide, Fig-
ure 4.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the Y and M toner cartridges, PL 90.05.
2. Remove the upper rear cover, REP 28.5.
3. Remove the lower rear cover, REP 28.6.
4. Remove the right cover, REP 28.3.
5. Remove the ESS PWB chassis assembly, REP 3.2.
6. Remove the LVPS assembly, REP 1.4.
7. Remove the harness upper bracket PL 1.10 Item 6.
8. Remove the drive PWB assembly, REP 1.5.
9. Release the wire harness (2) of dispenser drive (YM) from the clamps (1), Figure 1.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the C and K toner cartridges, PL 90.05.
2. Remove the upper rear cover, REP 28.5.
3. Remove the lower rear cover, REP 28.6.
4. Remove the right cover, REP 28.3.
5. Remove the ESS PWB chassis assembly, REP 3.2.
6. Remove the LVPS assembly, REP 1.4.
7. Remove the harness upper bracket PL 1.10 Item 6. Figure 2 Harness removal
8. Remove the drive PWB assembly, REP 1.5. 13. Remove the dispenser drive (CK), Figure 3.
9. Remove the rear duct A, REP 10.4. a. Disconnect the connector (1).
10. Remove two screws (1) then the drive PWB bracket, Figure 1. b. Remove the screws (2).
c. Remove the dispenser drive (CK) (3).
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
To prevent light fatigue, either wrap the removed drum cartridge in a sheet of black paper or
store it in a black bag.
NOTE: Because the removal procedure for Dispenser (Y, M, C, K) is the same, the following
describes only the procedure for Dispenser (K).
NOTE: Place the drop cloth or newspapers at the servicing area to keep the site clean.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
To prevent light fatigue, either wrap the removed drum cartridge in a sheet of black paper or
store it in a black bag.
NOTE: Place the drop cloth or newspapers at the servicing area to keep the site clean.
3. Cover the pipe opening of developer rear cover with paper and tape (1), Figure 2.
Figure 10 Seals
Replacement
Figure 8 Upper SUB cover assembly 1. Install the developer front cover, Figure 11.
Figure 12 Spring
3. Remove the paper and tape that closed the pipe opening of the developer rear cover.
4. Install the developer unit, Figure 13.
• Align the developer unit rib to the main unit guide.
Figure 13 Alignment
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the front cover.
2. Turn the retract handle (1) in a counterclockwise direction, Figure 1. CAUTION
3. Push down the two levers (2) and remove the waste bottle (3). Do not touch the IBT belt surface.
1. Open the front cover.
2. Remove the waste bottle, REP 90.6.
3. Open the LH transport assembly.
4. Loosen the screws (1) that secure the IBT belt unit, Figure 1.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
3. If a new IBT belt unit has been installed, enter dC135 HFSI Counter. Reset the HFSI
counter 954-820.
4. Enter dC330 code 042-011 to initialize the 1st BTR.
5. Perform dC675 Registration Control Setup Cycle.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the LH transport assembly.
2. Disengage the hooks (1) on front and rear, then remove the BTR assembly (2), Figure 1.
Replacement
1. To install, carry out the removal steps in reverse order.
2. If a new 2nd BTR roll has been installed, enter dC135 HFSI Counter. Reset the HFSI
counter 954-821.
3. Perform dC675 Registration Control Setup Cycle.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
To prevent light fatigue, either wrap the removed drum cartridge in a sheet of black paper or
store it in a black bag.
NOTE: Place the drop cloth or newspapers at the servicing area to keep the site clean.
CAUTION
Do not touch the sensor unit and the bracket positioning sections (highlighted) of the MOB
ADC assembly with your hands. Refer to Figure 3.
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
Do not touch the IBT belt surface.
NOTE: Place the drop cloth or newspapers at the servicing area to keep the site clean.
5. Remove two screws (1) and remove the blade assembly (2), Figure 2.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord
from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity
can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
Do not touch the IBT belt surface.
NOTE: Close the main unit cover when the IBT belt unit is removed to protect the drum from
light-induced fatigue.
NOTE: Place the drop cloth or newspapers at the servicing area to keep the site clean.
1. Open the front cover.
2. Remove the IBT belt unit, REP 90.7. Figure 2 Handle holder front screw
3. Remove the belt cleaner blade, REP 90.10.
6. Remove two screws (1) and remove the IBT belt unit bottom guide, Figure 3.
4. Remove the screw (1) securing the handle holder at the rear, Figure 1.
Figure 8 IBT belt unit Figure 10 Rear holder and tension roll removal
12. Remove two screws (1) that secure the rear holder, Figure 9. Reference: This shows the removed rear holder and tension roll, Figure 11.
Figure 9 Rear holder screws Figure 11 Rear holder and tension roll
Replacement 3. When installing the rear holder and the tension roll, insert the shaft of the tension roll to
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. the bearing on the IBT belt unit side, Figure 14.
2. Install so the IBT belt mark is on the rear side, Figure 13.
5. Before returning the front/rear tension plate to the original state, turn the IBT belt to make
the IBT belt even, Figure 16.
6. If a new IBT belt has been installed, enter dC135 HFSI Counter. Reset the HFSI counter
954-820.
7. Enter dC330 code 042-011 to initialize the 1st BTR.
8. Perform dC675 Registration Control Setup Cycle.
CAUTION
To prevent light fatigue, either wrap the removed drum cartridge in a sheet of black paper or
store it in a black bag.
CAUTION
Do not touch the surface of the drum cartridge.
1. Prepare a sheet of black paper or a black bag.
2. Open the front cover.
3. Remove the waste bottle. REP 90.6.
4. Turn the lever of the color to be replaced in the direction of the arrow.
5. Remove the drum cartridge of the color to be replaced, Figure 1.
a. Remove the thumbscrew (1).
b. Remove the drum cartridge (2).
6. Wrap the removed drum cartridge by using a sheet of black paper or store it in a black
bag.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. Perform dC950 ATC Sensor Setup.
Preparation
NOTE: For a description of the print/copy orientation definitions, refer to GP 31 Print/Copy Ori-
entation Definitions.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Clean the CVT glass. Refer to ADJ 60.5 Optics Cleaning Procedure.
2. Check that the document width guides are adjusted correctly.
3. Check the document path for obstructions or foreign objects.
Scale
4. Perform the Skew Check.
Skew Check
1. Enter dC612. Print internal test pattern 128. Figure 1 Skew adjustment
2. Make 5 copies of the test pattern from the DADF.
3. Check for skew. Refer to IQS 5 Skew.
NOTE: Skew is always measured on the lead edge, irrespective of paper orientation.
NOTE: Each mark on the scale represents movement of 1mm (0.04 inch).
Initial Actions
NOTE: For a description of the print/copy orientation definitions, refer to GP 31 Print/Copy Ori-
entation Definitions.
Before performing this procedure, perform the procedures that follow:
1. dC126 System Registration.
2. ADJ 60.3 IIT Side Edge Registration.
3. ADJ 5.1 DADF Lead Edge Skew.
Figure 3 Direction B
2. If required, NVM values 715-056 to 715-072 can be changed to correct side edge regis-
tration for each individual document size. Refer to Table 1.
3. Repeat the Side 1 Check. If the side 1 side edge registration is good, perform the Side 2
Check.
715-065 214.9 to 215.9mm Letter SEF, Legal SEF, 5.5x8.5" LEF, 8.46x12.4"
SEF, 8.5x13" SEF
715-067 254 to 257mm B4 SEF, B5 LEF, 8x10" LEF
715-069 266.7 to 267mm 16K LEF, 8K LEF, 8x10.5" LEF
715-071 279.4mm Letter LEF, 11x15" SEF, 11x17" SEF
715-073 297mm A4 LEF, A3 SEF
2. If required, NVM values 715-057 to 715-073 can be changed to correct side edge regis-
tration for each individual document size. Refer to Refer to Table 2.
3. Repeat the Side 2 Check.
2. Repeat the Side 1 Check. If the side 1 lead edge registration is good, apply the same
change to the NVM values that follow:
Grid A
• 711-002 DADF lead registration adjustment (side 1)
• 711-003 DADF lead registration adjustment (side 1)
• 711-004 DADF lead registration adjustment (side 1)
3. Perform the Side 2 Check.
Side 2 Check
1. Place the test pattern 82E2010 (A4) or 82E2020 (8.5 x11 inch) face down in the DADF
input tray. Ensure that the document guides are correctly adjusted.
2. Make two duplex (2 to 1 sided) copies.
3. Use the grids A and B on the copy, Figure 1, measure the lead edge displacement. Check
that the lead edge registration error is within +/- 2.0 mm (0.079 inch).
4. If the measurement is not within the specified range, perform the Side 2 Adjustment.
Side 2 Adjustment
1. Enter dC131. Change NVM value 711-141 to correct side 2 lead edge registration. If the
measurement is:
• Too large, increase the NVM value.
• too small, decrease the NVM value.
2. Repeat the Side 2 Check. If the side 2 lead edge registration is good, apply the same
change to the NVM values that follow:
• 711-022 DADF lead registration adjustment (side 2)
• 711-023 DADF lead registration adjustment (side 2)
• 711-024 DADF lead registration adjustment (side 2)
Grid B
4. If the measurement is not within the specified range, perform the Side 1 Adjustment. If the
measurement is within the specified range go to the Side 2 Check.
NOTE: This adjustment can also be performed by the customer. NOTE: This adjustment can also be performed by the customer.
Procedure Procedure
NOTE: For a description of the print/copy orientation definitions, refer to GP 31 Print/Copy Ori- NOTE: For a description of the print/copy orientation definitions, refer to GP 31 Print/Copy Ori-
entation Definitions. entation Definitions.
1. Enter Customer Administrator Tools, GP 23. 1. Enter Customer Administrator Tools, GP 23.
2. Touch Device, then Support. 2. Touch Device, then Support.
3. Touch Hole Punch Position. 3. Touch Fold Position.
4. Follow the on screen instructions. 4. Follow the on screen instructions.
5. Exit Customer Administrator Tools, GP 23. 5. Exit Customer Administrator Tools, GP 23.
Adjustment
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: Adjust the position of full/half rate carriage at the front and rear separately. Only the
procedure for the rear is described here. The procedure for the front is the same. Set screws
1. Open DADF.
2. Remove the document glass, REP 60.1.
Set screws
NOTE: The second set screw will not be accessible at this time.
Figure 6 Carriage setting
Rear
Set screw
Set screw
Check
CAUTION
Only perform this procedure if absolutely necessary. IIT lead registration affects the precision
of document size detection.
NOTE: For a description of the print/copy orientation definitions, refer to GP 31 Print/Copy Ori-
entation Definitions.
1. Ensure that the IOT lead edge registration is correct. Refer to dC126 System Registra-
tion.
2. Make two, 100% copies of test pattern 82E8220 from the document glass.
3. On the 2nd copy, check that the distance from the lead edge to the top of Step 3 on the
LE2 scale is 10mm +/- 2.1mm (0.4 inch +/- 0.1 inch), Figure 1.
Lead edge
10mm +/- 2.1mm
(0.4 inch +/- 0.1 inch)
4. If the value is not within the specified range, perform the Adjustment.
NOTE: For a description of the print/copy orientation definitions, refer to GP 31 Print/Copy Ori-
entation Definitions.
1. Ensure that the IOT side registration is correct. Refer to dC126 System Registration.
2. Make two, 100% copies of test pattern 82E8220 from the document glass.
3. On the 2nd copy, check that the distance from the lead edge to the top of Step 3 on the
SE2 and SE3 scales is 10mm +/- 1.6mm (0.4 inch +/- 0.06 inch), Figure 1.
Lead edge
4. If the value is not within the specified range, perform the Adjustment.
NOTE: For a description of the print/copy orientation definitions, refer to GP 31 Print/Copy Ori-
entation Definitions.
Check
1. Make two, 100% copies of test pattern 82E8220 from the document glass.
2. Check the 2nd copy:
a. To check the cross process direction magnification: measure the 200mm line run-
ning from near LE1 to near LE3. Check that the dimension is 200mm +/- 1mm (7.9
inches +/- 0.04 inch). Refer to Figure 1.
NOTE: This adjustment must only be performed if directed to from an Image Quality RAP, or if Check
the optics cavity was opened to install a new component and contamination can be seen on
1. Enter dC945 IIT Calibration.
the optics components.
2. Perform the Optical Axis Correction procedure.
Procedure 3. On the result screen, if OK is displayed, no further action is necessary. If NG is displayed,
perform the Adjustment. Refer to Table 1.
Procedure
NOTE: For a description of the print/copy orientation definitions, refer to GP 31 Print/Copy Ori-
entation Definitions.
Check NOTE: This adjustment is only available when the machine determines that the density level
has degraded. This adjustment can also be performed by the customer.
NOTE: For a description of the print/copy orientation definitions, refer to GP 31 Print/Copy Ori-
entation Definitions. Procedure
1. Ensure that the IOT lead registration and side registration is correct. Refer to dC126 Sys- 1. Enter Customer Administrator Tools, GP 23.
tem Registration. 2. Touch Device, then Supplies.
2. Open the DADF. 3. Touch Drum Cartridge.
3. Make a black copy. 4. Touch Marking Refresh.
4. Check that the margins on the copy are 4mm (0.16 inch) at the lead edge and 2mm (0.08 5. Exit Customer Administrator Tools, GP 23.
inch) at the trail edge and both sides.
5. If the value is not within the specified range, perform the Adjustment.
Adjustment
1. Adjust the NVM values such that the measured value is 4mm (0.16 inch) at the lead edge
and 2mm (0.08 inch) at the trail edge and both sides. Refer to Table 1.
NOTE: This adjustment can also be performed by the customer. NOTE: This adjustment can also be performed by the customer.
Procedure Procedure
NOTE: For a description of the print/copy orientation definitions, refer to GP 31 Print/Copy Ori- NOTE: For a description of the print/copy orientation definitions, refer to GP 31 Print/Copy Ori-
entation Definitions. entation Definitions.
1. Enter Customer Administration Tools, GP 23. 1. Enter Customer Administration Tools, GP 23.
2. Touch Device, then Support. 2. Touch Device, then Support.
3. Touch Color Calibration - Automatic. 3. Touch Color Calibration - Advanced.
4. Follow the on screen instructions. 4. Follow the on screen instructions.
5. Exit Customer Administrator Tools, GP 23. 5. Exit Customer Administrator Tools, GP 23.
PL 80 - Paper Transportation
PL 80.05 Tray 1 Feeder .................................................................................................. 5-114
PL 80.10 Tray 1 Feeder Assembly (1 of 2) ..................................................................... 5-115
PL 80.11 Tray 1 Feeder Assembly (2 of 2) ..................................................................... 5-116
PL 80.15 1TM Feeder ..................................................................................................... 5-117
PL 80.20 Tray 2, 3 and 4 Feeder Assembly (1 of 2) ....................................................... 5-118
PL 80.25 Tray 2, 3 and 4 Feeder Assembly (2 of 2) ....................................................... 5-119
PL 80.30 3TM Feeders ................................................................................................... 5-120
PL 80.35 STM Feeder..................................................................................................... 5-121
PL 80.40 LH Transport Components .............................................................................. 5-122
GP 40 to 41
GP 40 Glossary of Terms, Acronyms and Abbreviations ................................................ 6-53
GP 41 Foreign Device Interface Setup ........................................................................... 6-57
dC118 to dC131
dC118 Jam Counter ........................................................................................................ 6-61
dC120 Failure Counter.................................................................................................... 6-61
dC122 Shutdown History ................................................................................................ 6-62
dC125 Active Faults ........................................................................................................ 6-62
dC126 System Registration Adjustment ......................................................................... 6-63
dC131 NVM Read/Write.................................................................................................. 6-66
NOTE: A video of this procedure is available on the EDOC. The video is accessible from the
Library menu on the Service Interface.
Procedure
Four methods are available to download the machine software:
1. Software Loading via the Special Boot Menu
2. Software Loading via the Embedded Web Server
3. Software Download via the USB Port
4. Software Download via the Network Port (Port 9100)
Software Loading via the Special Boot Menu
NOTE: A video of this procedure is available on the EDOC. The video is accessible from the
Library menu on the Service Interface.
CAUTION
Do not switch off the printer until the reboot is complete. The printer will reboot after the down-
load is complete.
6. After the reboot, a Software Upgrade Report will print. Remove the USB memory device.
Software Loading via the Embedded Web Server
There are three options available for updating the software via the Embedded Web Page:
• Check Now
• Periodic Updates
• Updates with File Specified
Check Now
CAUTION
Do not switch off the machine until the reboot is complete. The machine will reboot after the
download is complete.
8. When the update is complete, the Result window will open. Touch complete. The
machine will reboot, and a Software Upgrade Report will be printed.
Software Download via the Network Port (Port 9100)
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Download the appropriate firmware download manager tool (FWDLMgr.exe) and firm-
ware (.bin) to an appropriate file location on the PWS. Refer to Obtaining Machine Soft-
ware.
2. Switch off the machine, GP 10.
This procedure describes how to check the motors that follow: Six Wire Stepper Motor
• Two Wire DC Motors. NOTE: A stepper motor with an internal open circuit may appear to be fully functional under
• Four Wire Stepper Motor. dC330 component control. However, under normal operation it will run with intermittent failure.
• Six Wire Stepper Motor. Use the standard digital meter to check that the resistance of the stepper motor coils are simi-
lar.
Initial Actions
• Disconnect PJF (Flag 5). Check the +24V supply and the motor on pulses when the com-
ponent control code for the motor is entered.
WARNING • Disconnect PJD (Flag 4). Check the +24V, +5V and 0V supplies.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do • Check the clock pulses (Flag 4).
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause • Check that the signal on PJD pin 13 (Flag 4) changes when the component control code
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. for the motor is entered.
1. Check that the motor is free to rotate. • Check the wiring and the connectors for the motor circuit.
2. Check that all the motor’s mechanisms are clean, free to move and lubricated correctly.
3. Enter the component control code for the motor. Refer to dC330. Run the motor for 30
seconds. If the motor shows signs of, or can be heard to slow down, then the motor is
defective. Replace the motor.
4. Perform the appropriate procedure:
• Two Wire DC Motors.
• Four Wire Stepper Motor.
• Six Wire Stepper Motor.
NOTE: The voltages, PJ numbers, pin numbers and PWB names shown are an example
only.
NOTE: In cases where the motor may be driven forward or backward, the same 2 feed wires
are used, but the voltages on them are reversed, to reverse the motor direction. Such motors
may have 2 component control codes, for forward and reverse. A typical application is a tray lift
motor with a tray-up and a tray-down direction.
• Disconnect PJB (Flag 2). Check that +24V is measured when the component control
code for the motor is entered.
• Disconnect PJA (Flag 1). Check for +24V on the LVPS.
• Disconnect PJC (Flag 3). Check that the signal changes on the ESS PWB when the com-
ponent control code for the motor is entered.
• Check the wiring and the connectors for the motor circuit.
Four Wire Stepper Motor
NOTE: A stepper motor with an internal open circuit may appear to be fully functional under
dC330 component control. However, under normal operation it will run with intermittent failure.
Use the standard digital meter to check that the resistance of the stepper motor coils are simi-
lar.
• Disconnect PJH (Flag 6). Check the motor on pulses on the harness when the component
control code for the motor is entered.
• Disconnect PJJ (Flag 6). Check the motor on pulses on the harness when the component
control code for the motor is entered.
NOTE: The voltages, PJ numbers, pin numbers and PWB names shown are an example only.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Ensure that the sensor is installed correctly.
2. Clean the sensor and the area around the sensor.
3. If a flag actuator is installed, check that it has free movement.
4. Check that the paper path is clear.
5. If the sensor actuates by a surface that reflects, check that the surface is clean. Also
ensure that there is not an obstruction between the sensor and the surface.
6. If the sensor actuates by an encoder disc, ensure the holes or gaps in the disc are aligned
correctly with the sensor.
Sensor Action
In the upper sensor in Figure 1, when light from the LED is allowed to fall on the photo-sensi-
tive transistor, the sensing line, PJA, pin 2, is low. When light from the LED is blocked by the
flag, the sensing line is high.
In the lower sensor in Figure 1, when light from the LED is reflected by the paper onto the
photo-sensitive transistor, the sensing line, PJE, pin 2 is low. When no paper is present, no
light falls on the transistor and the sensing line is high.
Figure 1 Wiring diagram
Quick Sensor Check
Enter the component control code for the sensor. Refer to dC330. Actuate the sensor. If the
display changes, the sensor operates correctly. If the display does not change, perform the
procedure.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. For a clutch, check that the mechanical components are clean, free to move and are lubri-
cated correctly
2. For a solenoid, check that the armature and associated mechanical components are free
to move.
Procedure
NOTE: The voltages, PJ numbers, pin numbers and PWB names shown are an example only.
NOTE: When a solenoid is energized in diagnostics, armature movement is seen. When a
clutch is energized in diagnostics, the sound of the clutch action is heard. If possible, energize Figure 1 Wiring diagram
the motor connected to the clutch to confirm when the clutch is energized.
• Check that the signal changes on the ESS PWB (Flag 1) when the component control
code for the clutch or solenoid is entered.
• Disconnect PJC (Flag 2). Check that +24V is measured when the component control
code for the clutch or solenoid is entered.
• Disconnect PJD (Flag 3). Check for +24V on the LVPS.
• Check the wiring and the connectors for the clutch or solenoid circuit.
NOTE: The circuit in Figure 1 shows an interlock switch actuated by the closing of a door.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Manually check that the switch operates. Ensure that the magnet or other actuator has enough
mechanical movement to operate the switch.
NOTE: The voltages, PJ numbers, pin numbers and PWB names shown are an example only.
Procedure
• Disconnect PJA (Flag 1). Check the electrical operation of the switch.
• Disconnect PJB (Flag 1). Check for +5V and 0V on the IOT PWB.
• Check the wiring and the connectors for the switch circuit.
WARNING
Do not use the power button as a safety disconnect device. The power button is not a
disconnect device. Disconnect the power cord from the supply to isolate the equipment.
Refer to:
• Switch Off Procedure
• Quick Restart
• Switch On Procedure
• Sleep Mode
Switch Off Procedure
CAUTION
Do not disconnect the power cord or interrupt the electricity supply before the power down is
complete unless advised. The data and software can become damaged.
1. Press the Power button on the UI. The Power Down Options window will display.
2. Touch Power Off.
3. Open the front cover, PL 28.05 Item 5. Switch off the main power switch, PL 1.05 Item 3.
4. When the machine has switched off, remove the power cord PL 1.15 Item 11, from the
customer’s power supply outlet.
Quick Restart
The quick restart causes the system to reset the software of the ESS PWB, the drive PWB and
the UI.
1. Press the Power button on the UI. The Power Down Options window will display.
2. Select the Quick Restart button on the UI touch screen.
Switch On Procedure
1. After the machine has been switched off, wait a minimum of 2 minutes before the
machine is switched on.
2. After a service call, ensure that all service tools are removed from the machine.
3. Connect the power cord from the customer’s power supply outlet to the machine. Ensure
the AC bracket assembly is installed, PL 1.15 Item 4.
4. Switch on the main power switch, PL 1.05 Item 3.
5. Press the Power button on the UI.
6. The machine will perform a power on self test (POST). The POST checks that the hard-
ware resources are available to run the operating system. If a POST fault is detected, the
machine is prevented from booting. The fault is communicated via LEDs on the ESS
PWB. Refer to the OF1 POST Error RAP.
Procedure Procedure
When removing heavy modules from the machine, the instructions that follow must be
observed:
1. Ensure that a suitable stable surface to support the module after removal is located in WARNING
close proximity to the machine. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 10. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
NOTE: Other parts of the machine are not a suitable stable surface. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
2. Ensure that the height of the support surface is between 750mm and 1000mm (30 inches
and 39 inches).
CAUTION
3. Ensure that there are no hazards or obstacles between the machine and the support sur-
Only use lubricants as directed. Incorrect use of lubricants could seriously affect the perfor-
face.
mance of the machine.
4. If instructed to remove the module toward the rear of the machine and only 1 person is
Take the precautions that follow when performing machine lubrication:
available, the module must be removed while standing at the rear of the machine. If 2
people are available, the module may be removed while standing at the front of the • Wear disposable gloves.
machine. • Only use lubricants that are specified in the Parts List.
5. Two people are required if the module is to be lifted on to the floor or lifted from the floor. • Only lubricate parts of the machine as directed in the relevant RAPs, Repairs, Adjust-
ments and General Procedures.
• Apply only the smallest amount of lubricant, sufficient to lubricate the parts. To prevent
contamination, remove any surplus lubricant before the machine is run.
• Take great care not to contaminate other parts of the machine with the lubricant.
Use this procedure to establish a network connection between the PWS and printer, create a Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
copy of network configuration settings and then distribute these settings to multiple devices on Gateway/Router 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.1
the network. This cloning process can also be used to backup and restore network settings lost
during a software reload. If the PWS and printer share similar, but unique IP address, continue. If not, use the Set a
Static IP Address on the PWS to set the PWS IP address.
NOTE: To establish a direct Ethernet connection between the PWS and printer requires the
6. After verifying the IP addresses are correctly configured, PING the printer:
printer’s driver installation CD-ROM, a crossover cable, and the PWS.
a. In the Command window (where the blinking cursor is) type the word PING. Press
Depending on the printer, a Windows 7 (W7) driver might not be available on the printer’s the space bar once and enter the printer’s IP address and press Enter. As an exam-
driver installation CD-ROM. If not, download the driver from Xerox.com under the Support and
ple: ping 192.168.0.2.
Drivers page. W7 has two kernal types, 32 and 64-bit. If installation the wrong driver is
b. If the printer responds to the PING command, it replies four times. This should not
attempted, Windows displays an error to indicate the driver is incorrect. To check the kernal
type, click on Start, in the right column, right click on Computer and select Properties, the ker- take more than two or three seconds.
nal type will be listed as System Type. c. If the PING command times out, or responds with “host unreachable”, check the IP
addresses that were entered. If the IP address is correct, contact 2nd level support.
Procedure 7. If the PING command replies, exit the Command window (type “exit” at the prompt and
Refer to the relevant procedure: press Enter). This test verifies the Ethernet connection is good.
• Establishing a LAN Connection 8. Install the printer driver and setup the printer as a local printer. Select connect to the
• Creating the Clone File printer using “other” port type. From the dialog drop down select Standard TCP/IP port.
• Using the Clone File 9. For the printer name or IP address, enter the printer’s IP address (192.168.0.2 in this
example).
• Set a Static IP Address on the PWS
10. When the driver installation finishes, Select Yes at the Print Test Print dialog box.
• PWS Browser Proxy Server Setting
Establishing a LAN Connection NOTE: If the test page does not print, the customer could have Accounting enabled (if the
Use these steps to establish a Local Area Network (LAN) connection between the PWS and device supports it) requiring that a special code is submitted with the print job before the
printer prints.
printer using a crossover cable.
11. After the test print is completed, open a web browser on the PWS.
NOTE: Record the original data for every change. It may be necessary to reset the IP address,
depending on PWS usage and local network practice. 12. In the Address Bar (in place of a web site address or URL), enter the printer’s IP address
(192.168.0.2 in this example).
1. Print a Configuration Report, GP 14. Note the printer’s IP address.
13. If the connection is working correctly, the web page of the printer will be displayed.
2. Connect the crossover cable between the PWS and printer.
NOTE: If the printer’s webpage cannot be opened, verify that Web Services are enabled
3. Open a Command window (CMD) on the PWS:
on the configuration page. If the the web browser is set to use a Proxy address for the
• Select Start and in the Search box above the Start button, type CMD, then press
internet connection, it will not be possible to open the printer’s webpage as there will be
Enter. no connection to that proxy server while directly connected to the printer via the crossover
4. Type ipconfig at the prompt, record the current network settings displayed. Restore Ethernet cable. Refer to PWS Browser Proxy Server Setting for instructions on Internet
these settings when the LAN connection is no longer needed. Explorer proxy configuration.
NOTE: Use the IPv4 address for the Local Area Connection, not the address listed under Creating the Clone File
Wireless Ethernet Connection (if enabled in the laptop).
NOTE: This procedure can be performed from any PC connected to the network or the PWS
5. Check the IP addresses of the PWS and printer. If the PWS has been connected to the
connected to the machine using an Ethernet crossover cable. The only requirement on the PC
same subnet, the PWS and printer address should share the same values for the first
is an Internet Browser.
three and have a different value for the forth number. Refer to Table 1 for an example.
1. Open Internet Explorer
Table 1 Example LAN settings 2. Enter the machine’s IP address in the Address line and select Go.
Printer PWS / Laptop 3. When the Internet Services window opens, login to Admin mode, GP 23. Click on the
Home tab, then the Cloning link.
IP Address 192.168.0.2 192.168.0.5
4. Select individual parameters to clone from the device or Select/Clear All.
For W7:
1. Open the Control Panel.
2. Select Network Sharing Center.
3. Select Change Adaptor Settings in the upper left corner of the Control Panel.
4. Right-click on Local Area Connection, then select Properties.
5. On the Networking tab (for local area connection), click on Internet Protocol Version 4
(TCP/IPv4), then select Properties.
6. Select Use the following IP address, then enter the IP address and subnet mask.
Refer to the configuration report then:
• Set the IP address of the laptop one number higher than the device. For example, if
the IP address of the device is 192.168.196.112, set the IP address of the laptop to
192.168.196.113.
• Set the Subnet mask of the laptop to the same as the Subnet mask of the device.
7. Click OK twice and exit Network Connections and return to Creating the Clone File.
For W10:
1. Click Start and select Settings.
2. Select Network and Internet.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. From the Home Screen, touch Device.
2. Touch About.
3. Scroll to the bottom of the list, then touch Information Pages.
4. Select the desired report, then touch Print.
Configuration Report
The Configuration Report lists the current state of system configuration parameters including
installed options and network settings.
Supplies Usage
The Supplies Usage report includes the current status of printer consumables and routine
maintenance items. Installation dates and replacement part numbers are listed.
Demonstration Print
This report shows a brief synopsis of the device.
Startup Page
This report lists device type, software versions, enabled protocols and mobile connectivity.
7R96721 Xerox Digital C5 Envelope Envelope Heavy 2A 9x6.4 Misfeed jam may occur under high temperature/humid-
ity condition or with envelopes with low stiffness.
7R96718 Xerox Digital DL Envelope Envelope Heavy 2A 8.7x4.3 Misfeed jam may occur under high temperature/humid-
ity condition or with envelopes with low stiffness.
3R90340 Xerox Digital Colour Colotech+ Gloss Coated 140gsm Lightweight Coated 1 A3
glossy card-
stock
3R90342 Xerox Digital Colour Colotech+ Gloss Coated 170gsm Glossy card- Coated 2 A4
stock
3R90343 Xerox Digital Colour Colotech+ Gloss Coated 170gsm Glossy card- Coated 2 A3
stock
3R90345 Xerox Digital Colour Colotech+ Gloss Coated 210gsm Glossy card- Coated 2 A4
stock
3R90346 Xerox Digital Colour Colotech+ Gloss Coated 210gsm Glossy card- Coated 2 A3
stock
3R90348 Xerox Digital Colour Colotech+ Gloss Coated 250gsm Heavyweight Coated 2 A4 Environmental conditions may require that this product
glossy card- be fed one sheet at a time from trays 1-4.
stock Tray 5 (bypass) cannot be used for media heavier than
216gsm).
3R90349 Xerox Digital Colour Colotech+ Gloss Coated 250gsm Heavyweight Coated 2 A3 When job is printed in low temperature and low humid-
glossy card- ity environment, poor transfer of toner may be
stock observed. If poor transfer is observed, change 2nd
transfer voltage offset.
3R90356 Xerox Digital Colour Colotech+ Silk Coated 120gsm Lightweight Coated 1 A3
glossy card-
stock
3R90358 Xerox Digital Colour Colotech+ Silk Coated 140gsm Lightweight Coated 1 A4
glossy card-
stock
3R90359 Xerox Digital Colour Colotech+ Silk Coated 140gsm Lightweight Coated 1 A3
glossy card-
stock
3R90361 Xerox Digital Colour Colotech+ Silk Coated 170gsm Glossy card- Coated 2 A4
stock
3R90362 Xerox Digital Colour Colotech+ Silk Coated 170gsm Glossy card- Coated 2 A3
stock
3R90364 Xerox Digital Colour Colotech+ Silk Coated 210gsm Glossy card- Coated 2 A4
stock
3R90365 Xerox Digital Colour Colotech+ Silk Coated 210gsm Glossy card- Coated 2 A3
stock
3R90367 Xerox Digital Colour Colotech+ Silk Coated 250gsm Heavyweight Coated 2 A4 Environmental conditions may require that this product
glossy card- be fed one sheet at a time from trays 1-4.
stock Tray 5 (bypass) cannot be used for media heavier than
216gsm.)
3R90368 Xerox Digital Colour Colotech+ Silk Coated 250gsm Heavyweight Coated 2 A3 When job is printed in low temperature and low humid-
glossy card- ity environment, poor transfer of toner may be
stock observed. If poor transfer is observed, change 2nd
transfer voltage offset
3R97686 Xerox Colotech+ Supergloss 250gsm Heavyweight Coated 2 A4 Environmental conditions may require that this product
(Coated 1 side) glossy card- be fed one sheet at a time from trays 1-4.
stock If misfeed still occurs when feeding one sheet at a
time, load paper curled upward.
3R97687 Xerox Colotech+ Supergloss 250gsm Heavyweight Coated 2 A3 Tray 5 (bypass) cannot be used for media heavier than
(Coated 1 side) glossy card- 216gsm.)
stock
3R93872 Xerox Colour Copier Laser Labels Heavyweight Label 2 A4 1-up Labels once fed cannot be used.
labels Tray 5 (bypass) only. Excessive jams due to curl when
fed from trays 1-4.
3R95813 Xerox Colour Copier Laser Labels Heavyweight Label 2 A4 4-up Low humidity environment (J/C zones) inhibited due to
labels excessive media curl.
Poor stacking at continuous running in A/C/J-zone.
3R93874 Xerox Colour Copier Laser Labels Heavyweight Label 2 A4 8-up
labels Removing the output one by one is recommended.
3R97344 Xerox Color Laser Dura Paper Label Labels Label 1 A4 1-up Labels once fed cannot be used.
Smears may be observed in BW mode.
3R96177 Xerox High Speed Heavyweight Label 2 A4 16-up Labels once fed cannot be used.
Removable Labels labels Jams due to excessive curl may occur in A/C/J zones.
Environmental conditions may require that this product
3R96178 Xerox High Speed Heavyweight Label 2 A4 24-up be fed one sheet at a time from Tray 5 (bypass).
Removable Labels(A4.) labels
3R97516 Xerox Colour Laser Gloss CD labels Glossy card- Coated 2 A4 2-up Tray 5 (bypass) inhibited due to excessive jams.
stock Loading from trays 1-4 recommended. Environmental
conditions may require that this product be fed one
sheet at a time.
(If misfeed still occurs when feeding one sheet at a
time, load paper curled upward.)
3R96281 Xerox High Speed Laser Labels Heavyweight Label 2 A4 16-up Labels once fed cannot be used.
labels Smears may be observed in BW mode.
3R2641 Xerox Vitality Multipurpose Printer Paper 20lb Plain 8.5x11 3 hole Previous Name - Xerox Business 4200
3R11541 Xerox Bold Digital Printing Paper 90gsm/24lb Bond Plain F 8.5x11 3-hole Previous Name - Xerox Color Xpressions Select
3R11542 Xerox Bold Digital Printing Paper 90gsm/24lb Bond Plain F 8.5x14 Previous Name - Xerox Color Xpressions Select
3R02531 Xerox Vitality Multipurpose Printer Paper 90gsm/24lb Bond Plain F 8.5x11 Previous Name - Xerox Business 4200
3R03317 Xerox Vitality Multipurpose Printer Paper 90gsm/24lb Bond Plain F 8.5x11 3 hole Previous Name - Xerox Business 4200
3R03871 Xerox Vitality Multipurpose Printer Paper 90gsm/24lb Bond Plain F 11x17 Previous Name - Xerox Business 4200
3R6296 Xerox® Vitality™ Multipurpose Printer Paper, 75gsm/20lb Recycled Plain A 8.5x11 Previous Name - Xerox Business Recycled Paper
30% Recycled
3R6297 Xerox® Vitality™ Multipurpose Printer Paper, 75gsm/20lb Recycled Plain A 8.5x11 3-hole Previous Name - Xerox Business Recycled Paper
30% Recycled
3R6298 Xerox® Vitality™ Multipurpose Printer Paper, 75gsm/20lb Recycled Plain A 8.5x14 Previous Name - Xerox Business Recycled Paper
30% Recycled
3R6299 Xerox® Vitality™ Multipurpose Printer Paper, 75gsm/20lb Recycled Plain A 11x17 Previous Name - Xerox Business Recycled Paper
30% Recycled
3R11376 Xerox® Vitality™ Multipurpose Printer Paper, 75gsm/20lb Recycled Plain A 8.5x11
100% Recycled
3R11765 Xerox Bold Digital Printing Paper 120gsm/32lb Lightweight Heavy 1A 17x11
cardstock
3R11767 Xerox Bold Digital Printing Paper 163gsm/60lb Lightweight Heavy 1A 8.5x11
cardstock
3R11768 Xerox Bold Digital Printing Paper 163gsm/60lb Lightweight Heavy 1A 17x11
cardstock
3R11770 Xerox Bold Digital Printing Paper 215gsm/80lb Cardstock Heavy 2A 8.5x11
3R11771 Xerox Bold Digital Printing Paper 215gsm/80lb Cardstock Heavy 2A 17x11
3R11800 Xerox® Bold™ Digital Printing Paper, 20% 105gsm/28lb Bond Plain F 8.5x11 Previous Name - Xerox Color Xpressions Planet 20
Recycled
3R11801 Xerox® Bold™ Digital Printing Paper, 20% 105gsm/28lb Bond Plain F 17x11 Previous Name - Xerox Color Xpressions Planet 20
Recycled
3R11803 Xerox® Bold™ Digital Printing Paper, 20% 175gsm/65lb Cardstock Heavy 2A 8.5x11 Previous Name - Xerox Color Xpressions Planet 20
Recycled
3R11804 Xerox® Bold™ Digital Printing Paper, 20% 175gsm/65lb Cardstock Heavy 2A 17x11 Previous Name - Xerox Color Xpressions Planet 20
Recycled
3R11806 Xerox® Bold™ Digital Printing Paper, 20% 215gsm/80lb Cardstock Heavy 2A 8.5x11 Previous Name - Xerox Color Xpressions Planet 20
Recycled
3R11807 Xerox® Bold™ Digital Printing Paper, 20% 215gsm/80lb Cardstock Heavy 2A 17x11 Previous Name - Xerox Color Xpressions Planet 20
Recycled
3R11815 Xerox® Bold™ Digital Printing Paper, 100% 105gsm /28lb Recycled Plain A 8.5x11 Previous Name - Xerox Planet 100
Recycled
3R11747 Xerox Vitality Index Paper 163gsm/90lb Lightweight Heavy 1A 8.5x11 Previous Name - Xerox 90# Index Stock
Index cardstock
3R11748 Xerox Vitality Index Paper 163gsm/90lb Lightweight Heavy 1A 11x17 Previous Name - Xerox 90# Index Stock
Index cardstock
Monarch 75 ?90gsm Envelopes Heavy 2A 3.9x7.5 Misfeed jam may occur under high temperature/humid-
ity condition or with envelopes with low stiffness.
Com10 76 ?90gsm Envelopes Heavy 2A 4.1x9.5 Misfeed jam may occur under high temperature/humid-
ity condition or with envelopes with low stiffness.
1636 Strathmore Writing Bright White Move Mon- 24lb Envelope Extra-Heavy-
arch Envelope weight
3R11470 Xerox® Bold™ Coated Satin Digital Printing 120gsm/80lb Lightweight Coated 1 8.5x11 Silk Text Environmental conditions may require that this product
Paper glossy card- be fed one sheet at a time from trays 1-4 or tray 5
stock(*) (bypass).
120gsm/140gsm only
3R11471 Xerox® Bold™ Coated Satin Digital Printing 120gsm/80lb Lightweight Coated 1 17x11 Silk Text When job is printed in low temperature and low humid-
Paper glossy card- ity environment, poor transfer of toner may be
stock(*) observed. If poor transfer is observed, change 2nd
transfer voltage offset.
3R11474 Xerox® Bold™ Coated Satin Digital Printing 140gsm/ Lightweight Coated 1 8.5x11 Silk Text
Paper 100lb glossy card-
stock(*)
3R11475 Xerox® Bold™ Coated Satin Digital Printing 140gsm/ Lightweight Coated 1 17x11 Silk Text
Paper 100lb glossy card-
stock(*)
3R11478 Xerox® Bold™ Coated Satin Digital Printing 210gsm/80lb Glossy card- Coated 2 8.5x11 Silk Cover
Paper stock
3R11479 Xerox® Bold™ Coated Satin Digital Printing 210gsm/80lb Glossy card- Coated 2 17x11 Silk Cover
Paper stock
3R11451 Xerox® Bold™ Coated Gloss Digital Printing 210gsm/80lb Lightweight Coated 1 17x11 Gloss Text
Paper glossy card-
stock(*)
3R11454 Xerox® Bold™ Coated Gloss Digital Printing 140gsm/ Lightweight Coated 1 8.5x11 Gloss Text
Paper 100lb glossy card-
stock(*)
3R11455 Xerox® Bold™ Coated Gloss Digital Printing 140gsm/ Lightweight Coated 1 17x11 Gloss Text
Paper 100lb glossy card-
stock(*)
3R11458 Xerox® Bold™ Coated Gloss Digital Printing 210gsm/80lb Glossy card- Coated 2 8.5x11 Gloss Cover
Paper stock
3R11459 Xerox® Bold™ Coated Gloss Digital Printing 210gsm/80lb Glossy card- Coated 2 17x11 Gloss Cover
Paper stock
3R11503 Xerox® Bold™ Coated Gloss Digital Printing 210gsm/80lb Lightweight Coated 1 17x11 Gloss Text Environmental conditions may require that this product
Paper glossy card- be fed one sheet at a time from trays 1-4 or tray 5
stock (bypass).
3R11506 Xerox® Bold™ Coated Gloss Digital Printing 210gsm/80lb Glossy card- Coated 2 17x11 Gloss Cover
Paper stock
3R11680 Xerox® Bold™ Super Gloss Cover 8PT / 170gsm Lightweight Coated 1 8.5x11 Tray 5 (bypass) inhibited due to excessive jams.
glossy card- Environmental conditions may require that this product
stock (*) be fed one sheet at a time from trays 1-4.
3R11681 Xerox® Bold™ Super Gloss Cover 8PT / 170gsm Lightweight Coated 1 17x11
glossy card-
stock (*)
3R11683 Xerox® Bold™ Super Gloss Cover 10pt / 219 Heavyweight Coated 1 8.5x11
gsm glossy card-
stock
3R11684 Xerox® Bold™ Super Gloss Cover 10pt / 219 Heavyweight Coated 1 17x11
gsm glossy card-
stock
3R11875 Xerox® Vitality™ Coated Printing Paper 120gsm/80lb Lightweight Coated 1 17x11
Gloss Text glossy card-
stock
3R11880 Xerox® Vitality™ Coated Printing Paper 140gsm/ Lightweight Coated 1 17x11
Gloss 100lb Text glossy card-
stock
3R11885 Xerox® Vitality™ Coated Printing Paper 210gsm/80lb Glossy card- Coated 2 17x11
Gloss Cover stock
3R11690 Xerox® Vitality™ Coated Printing Paper 120gsm/80lb Lightweight Coated 1 17x11
Satin Text glossy card-
stock
3R11695 Xerox® Vitality™ Coated Printing Paper 140gsm/ Lightweight Coated 1 17x11
Satin 100lb Text glossy card-
stock
3R11855 Xerox® Vitality™ Coated Printing Paper 210gsm/80lb Glossy card- Coated 2 17x11
Satin Cover stock
3R04476 Revolution Label - High Speed Labels Label 8.5x11 1- up Previous Name - Xerox Monochrome High Speed
Label
3R03139 Revolution Label - High Speed Labels Label 8.5x11 33- up Previous Name - Xerox Monochrome High Speed
Label
3R12740 Xerox® Revolution™ Label – Gloss Coated Heavyweight Label 2 8.5x11 10-up
Labels labels
3R12741 Xerox® Revolution™ Label – Gloss Coated Heavyweight Label 2 8.5x11 30-up
Labels labels
3R12738 Xerox Digital Color Glossy Labels Heavyweight Label 2 8.5x11 CD Rom
labels
3R5771 Xerox® Revolution™ Label – Matte Coated Heavyweight Label 2 8.5x11 1- up Labels once fed cannot be used.
Labels labels Loading from trays 1-4 recommended. Environmental
conditions may require that this product be fed one
3R5773 Xerox® Revolution™ Label – Matte Coated Heavyweight Label 2 8.5x11 4-up sheet at a time.
Labels labels Image defect may be observed around the edge of the
label pieces.
3R6332 Xerox® Revolution™ Label – Matte Coated Heavyweight Label 2 8.5x11 10-up If image defects are observed in low temperature/
Labels labels humidity condition, the voltage should be adjusted by
2nd transfer user offset.
3R6333 Xerox® Revolution™ Label – Matte Coated Heavyweight Label 2 8.5x11 30-up
Labels labels
3R6330 Xerox® Revolution™ Label – Matte Coated Heavyweight Label 2 8.5x11 CD Rom
Labels labels 2-up
3R12373 Xerox® Revolution™ Label – Matte Coated Heavyweight Label 2 17x11 CD Rom
Labels labels 6-up
3R12739 Xerox® Revolution™ Label – Gloss Coated Heavyweight Label 2 17x11 CD Rom Tray 5 (bypass) inhibited due to excessive jams.
Labels labels 6-up Loading from trays 1-4 recommended. Environmental
conditions may require that this product be fed one
sheet at a time.
(If misfeed still occurs when feeding one sheet at a
time, load paper curled upward.)
3R11503 Xerox® Bold™ Coated Gloss Digital Printing 210gsm/80lb Lightweight Coated 1 17x11 Gloss Text Environmental conditions may require that this product
Paper glossy card- be fed one sheet at a time from trays 1-4 or tray 5
stock (bypass).
3R11506 Xerox® Bold™ Coated Gloss Digital Printing 210gsm/80lb Glossy card- Coated 2 17x11 Gloss Cover
Paper stock
3R11681 Xerox® Bold™ Super Gloss Cover 8PT / 170gsm Lightweight Coated 1 17x11
glossy card-
stock (*)
3R11683 Xerox® Bold™ Super Gloss Cover 10pt / 219 Heavyweight Coated 1 8.5x11
gsm glossy card-
stock
3R11684 Xerox® Bold™ Super Gloss Cover 10pt / 219 Heavyweight Coated 1 17x11
gsm glossy card-
stock
3R11686 Xerox® Bold™ Super Gloss Cover 12PT/ Heavyweight Coated 2 8.5x11 Environmental conditions may require that this product
247gsm glossy card- be fed one sheet at a time from trays 1-4.
stock Tray 5 (bypass) cannot be used for media heavier than
216gsm.)
3R11687 Xerox® Bold™ Super Gloss Cover 12PT/ Heavyweight Coated 2 17x11
247gsm glossy card-
stock
3R11875 Xerox® Vitality™ Coated Printing Paper 120gsm/80lb Lightweight Coated 1 17x11
Gloss Text glossy card-
stock
3R11880 Xerox® Vitality™ Coated Printing Paper 140gsm/ Lightweight Coated 1 17x11
Gloss 100lb Text glossy card-
stock
3R11885 Xerox® Vitality™ Coated Printing Paper 210gsm/80lb Glossy card- Coated 2 17x11
Gloss Cover stock
3R11690 Xerox® Vitality™ Coated Printing Paper 120gsm/80lb Lightweight Coated 1 17x11
Satin Text glossy card-
stock
3R11855 Xerox® Vitality™ Coated Printing Paper 210gsm/80lb Glossy card- Coated 2 17x11
Satin Cover stock
3R04476 Revolution Label - High Speed Labels Label 8.5x11 1- up Previous Name - Xerox Monochrome High Speed
Label
3R03139 Revolution Label - High Speed Labels Label 8.5x11 33- up Previous Name - Xerox Monochrome High Speed
Label
3R12736 Xerox® Revolution™ Label – Gloss Coated Heavyweight Label 2 8.5x11 1- up Labels once fed cannot be used.
Labels labels Tray 5 (bypass) inhibited due to excessive jams.
Environmental conditions may require that this product
3R12737 Xerox® Revolution™ Label – Gloss Coated Heavyweight Label 2 8.5x11 4-up be fed one sheet at a time from trays 1-4.
Labels labels
3R12740 Xerox® Revolution™ Label – Gloss Coated Heavyweight Label 2 8.5x11 10-up
Labels labels
3R12741 Xerox® Revolution™ Label – Gloss Coated Heavyweight Label 2 8.5x11 30-up
Labels labels
3R12738 Xerox Digital Color Glossy Labels Heavyweight Label 2 8.5x11 CD Rom
labels
3R5771 Xerox® Revolution™ Label – Matte Coated Heavyweight Label 2 8.5x11 1- up Labels once fed cannot be used.
Labels labels Loading from trays 1-4 recommended. Environmental
conditions may require that this product be fed one
sheet at a time.
Image defect may be observed around the edge of the
label pieces.
If image defects are observed in low temperature/
humidity condition, the voltage should be adjusted by
2nd transfer user offset.
3R5773 Xerox® Revolution™ Label – Matte Coated Heavyweight Label 2 8.5x11 4-up
Labels labels
3R6333 Xerox® Revolution™ Label – Matte Coated Heavyweight Label 2 8.5x11 30-up
Labels labels
3R6330 Xerox® Revolution™ Label – Matte Coated Heavyweight Label 2 8.5x11 CD Rom
Labels labels 2-up
3R12373 Xerox® Revolution™ Label – Matte Coated Heavyweight Label 2 17x11 CD Rom
Labels labels 6-up
3R12739 Xerox® Revolution™ Label – Gloss Coated Heavyweight Label 2 17x11 CD Rom Tray 5 (bypass) inhibited due to excessive jams.
Labels labels 6-up Loading from trays 1-4 recommended. Environmental
conditions may require that this product be fed one
sheet at a time.
(If misfeed still occurs when feeding one sheet at a
time, load paper curled upward.)
Front
Operation Modes
Refer to Table 3 and Table 4.
– Table 1 contains the maximum value in decibels of noise that can be generated by Procedure
the C7030F. Audit Log
– Table 2 contains the maximum value in decibels of noise that can be generated by To obtain the Audit Log:
the C7000.
1. Obtain the machine’s IP address by printing a configuration report. Refer to GP 14 Print-
ing Reports.
Table 1 Maximum noise limits for C7030F
2. Access the web UI by entering the IP address into a web browser on a PC on the same
Black and White Mode Full Color Mode network as the machine.
Item PPM IOT Full System IOT Full System 3. Log in to the web UI as an administrator. Refer to GP 23 Customer Administration Tools.
4. Ensure HTTP - SSL/TLS is enabled:
Standby (dBA) 20 19.4 Int Fin: 18.8 19.4 Int Fin: 18.8
Fin LX: 20.6 Fin LX: 20.6 a. Click Connectivity.
Run continuous (dBA) 46.2 Int Fin: 52.8 19.5 Int Fin: 53.0 b. Click HTTP.
Fin LX: 52.8 Fin LX: 52.9 c. Enable HTTP (SSL).
Standby (dBA) 25 19.9 Int Fin: 18.7 19.9 Int Fin: 18.7 d. Click OK. You will be prompted to restart the machine, click Restart Now.
Fin LX: 19.3 Fin LX: 19.3 5. When the machine restarts, log back in as an administrator, then click System.
Run continuous (dBA) 47.6 Int Fin: 53.3 19.9 Int Fin: 53.3 6. Click Logs.
Fin LX: 52.9 Fin LX: 52.9 7. Click Audit Log.
Standby (dBA) 30 24.7 Int Fin: 22.1 24.7 Int Fin: 22.1 8. Click Enable.
Fin LX: 20.6 Fin LX: 20.6
9. Click Export. The auditlog.txt file is downloaded via the web browser.
Run continuous (dBA) 48.4 Int Fin: 54.8 49.4 Int Fin: 54.9
Device Log
Fin LX: 54.6 Fin LX: 54.6
To obtain the Device Log:
Table 2 Maximum noise limits for C7000 1. Obtain the machine’s IP address by printing a configuration report. Refer to GP 14 Print-
ing Reports.
Black and White Mode Full Color Mode
2. Access the web UI by entering the IP address into a web browser on a PC on the same
Item PPM IOT Full System IOT Full System network as the machine.
Standby (dBA) 35 16.4 Int Fin: 16.2 16.4 Int Fin: 16.2 3. Log in to the web UI as an administrator. Refer to GP 23 Customer Administration Tools.
Run continuous (dBA) 49.7 Int Fin: 55.6 50.1 Int Fin: 55.8 4. Click System.
5. Click Logs.
Storage 6. Click Device Log.
• Altitude: 0 to 3100 metres (0 to 10170 feet). 7. Click Accept. The devicelog.dat file is downloaded via the web browser.
The RoHS Directive restricts the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and elec- Procedure
tronic equipment. It applies to equipment placed in the European Union (EU) market. The 1. Switch off the machine, GP 10.
directive takes effect from 1st July 2006.
2. Simultaneously press then hold down the Home and Power buttons until the device pow-
ers on and SPECIAL BOOT MENU appears, Figure 1.
NOTE: Currently these restrictions are only for the European Union (EU) market and some
associated countries. For more information go to www.Xerox.com. However, Xerox has man- 3. Simultaneously touch the letters A in SPECIAL, B in BOOT and the Home button. Do not
dated that all Xerox® VersaLink® C7000/C7020/C7025/C7030 machines must be maintained hold any of the three locations, just touch/press then release simultaneously, Figure 1.
as RoHS compliant.
All Xerox® VersaLink® C7000/C7020/C7025/C7030 machines are RoHS compliant at time of 4. At the keypad screen enter code number, 6789#. The first SPECIAL BOOT MENU screen
manufacture. will display.
Procedure
CAUTION
Do not switch off the device until the reboot is complete. The device will reboot after the down-
CAUTION load is complete.
Failure to comply with RoHS guidelines can result in product recalls, imprisonment, fines or 5. Scroll through the SPECIAL BOOT MENU screens to select the appropriate function,
penalties. refer to Table 1. Follow the on screen instructions. The device may reboot, then print a
Use only spares that are listed in the Xerox® VersaLink® C7000/C7020/C7025/C7030 Spare report.
Parts List. Do not use spare parts from other similar machines, even if the parts look identical.
All Xerox® VersaLink® C7000/C7020/C7025/C7030 machines are RoHS compliant at time of Table 1 Next level of menu
manufacture and must be maintained as RoHS compliant. Function Display Notes
DOWNLOAD --BOOT MODE-- Machine starts in Firmware Download Mode.
MODE DOWNLOAD MODE Refer to GP 4.
ARE YOU SURE?
YES
NO
LONGDIAG --BOOT MODE-- Performs a more detailed check than the
MODE LONGDIAG MODE usual device diagnostic items at machine
ARE YOU SURE? start. If a fault code is displayed, perform the
YES relevant procedure.
NO
CAUTION
All customer configured settings will be
deleted. To restore the customer configured
settings, a clone file is required. Refer to GP
13.
Call Closeout
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Touch Admin in the top left corner of the UI.
2. Touch Logout.
How to Enter Admin Mode via the EWS
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Type the device IP address into a web browser.
2. Select Log in, top left corner.
3. The User Accounts screen is displayed. Select admin.
4. The admin screen is displayed. Enter the password ‘1111’ (default setting).
NOTE: If the admin password is not 1111, ask the customer for the current password. If
the admin password is unknown, perform GP 29 System Administrator Password Reset.
CAUTION
Before changing the value of a setting ensure the original value is recorded. All the origi-
nal values will need to be restored to the PWS at the end of the procedure.
a. Open a command window on the PWS:
• Select Start and in the Search box above the Start button, type CMD, then
press Enter.
NOTE: If the Windows key is enabled (the key located in the lower left corner with
the Microsoft logo), hold the Windows key down, press R and release both keys to
open the Command window.
b. Type ipconfig at the command prompt, then record the Local Area Connection: IPv4
Address and Subnet Mask.
4. Configure the LAN connection of the PWS to enable communication with the device. Go
to the relevant procedure:
• Windows 7.
• Windows 10.
7. Click on OK to close the properties dialog box, then OK to close the second properties
dialog box.
8. Close the Local Area Connection Status dialog box.
9. Connect the ethernet crossover cable to the device, then continue with your procedure.
NOTE: The dongle is supplied as part of the initialization kit. The dongle sets the machine XE
speed, billing plan and billing impression mode (BIM). Follow the standard product replacement process (DOA/TEX) for the relevant initialization kit
number.
NOTE: The dongle should be stored in tray 1, beneath the RAI cover, PL 70.05 Item 10.
To provide information about the process to follow when a customer requires a billing plan 700 777 PagePack Region Code 0 = Worldwide/Neutral
change. 1 = DMO/Sold
2 = NA/XE Sold
General Information 3 to 7 = Invalid
NOTE: The plan conversion pin code is valid for approximately 500 additional impres-
sions after being generated.
6. From the Home screen, scroll down to Supplies, then select Details. Scroll down,
beneath Options, select Supplies Plan.
7. The Supplies Plan window opens. Select either Supplies Plan Activation or Plan Con-
version as necessary. Enter the six digit pin code that was provided.
8. Select Apply.
NOTE: If converting from Metered to Sold or PagePack to Sold, an appropriate Sold toner
cartridge must be installed immediately after the conversion process or the device will dis-
play an incompatible toner error message.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Click on the attached BUS Link. 1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
2. Follow the instructions on EUREKA Tip ETI 1394055. 2. Touch Device.
3. Touch Apps, then Fax.
4. Touch Fax Protocol Report or Fax Activity Report.
5. Touch Close to return to the Diagnostics screen.
6. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
Definitions
Refer to Figure 1. Be aware of the points that follow:
• Inboard edge - can also be described as the top edge or side edge.
• In process direction - can also be described as the slow scan direction.
• Cross process direction - can also be described as the fast scan direction.
Inboard
edge
Lead edge
Outboard
edge
Cross
process In process
direction direction
Trail edge
Where possible unit designations as appear in ISO 1000 (International Organization for Stan- Term Description
dardization) and Xerox Standard MN2-905 have been used. All measurements appear in ISO CIS Contact Image Sensor
units followed by any conversion in brackets e.g.; 22.5mm (0.885 inches) CL Copy Lighter. A copy density setting
CQ Copy Quality
Refer to Table 1.
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
Table 1 Abbreviations CRU Customer Replaceable Unit
Term Description CRUM Customer Replaceable Unit Monitor
CSE Customer Service Engineer
1TM One Tray Module
CVT Constant Velocity Transport
3TM Three Tray Module
CWIS CentreWare Internet Services (also known as Web UI)
AAA Authentication, Authorisation and Accounting
DADF Dual Auto Document Feeder
ABS Automatic Background Suppression.
dB Decibel (applies to sound pressure level units)
AC Alternating Current
dC Diagnostic code
ACAST Anti Counterfeiting Activities Support/Strategy Team
DC Device Controller, generic term for any module that acts as a image han-
ACL Alternating Current Live
dling device e.g., SIP. Digital Copier
ACN Alternating Current Neutral
DC Direct Current
AGC Automatic Gain Control
DCN Disconnect
AHA Advanced Hardware Architecture
DCS Digital Command Signal
AMPV Average Monthly Print Volume
DDNS Dynamic Domain Name System
ANSAM Answer Tone, Amplitude Modulated
DH Document Handler
APS Auto Paper Selection
DHCP Dynamic Host Config Protocol (similar to BootP)
ARP Address Resolution Protocol. Converts an IP address to a MAC address.
DIMM Dual In-line Memory Module
See RARP.
DIP Dual In-line Package (switch)
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
DIS Digital Identification Signal
B Bels (applies to sound power level units)
DLM Dynamically Loadable Module
Binding Part of the communication between modules.
DM Document Manager
BM Booklet Maker
DMA Direct Memory Access
BootP Boot Protocol. AN IP protocol for automatically assigning IP addresses.
DMO Developing Markets Operations
BPS Bits Per Second
DMO-E Developing Markets Operations East
BS Behavior Specification
DMO-W Developing Markets Operations West
BT Busy Tone
DPI Dots per inch
BCR Bias Charge Roll
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
BTR Bias Transfer Roll
DST Daylight Saving Time
C Celsius
DT Dial Tone
CAT Customer Admin Tool
DTMF Dual Tone Multiple Frequency
CBC Customer Business Center
DTS Detack Saw
CCD Charged Coupled Device
Dust Off Routine to return machine to pre-install state
CCM Copy Controller Module
DVMA Direct Virtual Memory Access
CCS Copy Controller Service
EH&S Environmental Health and Safety
CentreWare CentreWare internet services is the embedded HTTP server application
that is available on network enabled machines. It enables access to print- EJS Easy Java Simulation
ing, faxing and scanning over the internet. ELT Extract, Load, Transform
CIPS Common Image Path Software Embedded Fax A fax system included in a system device
DIP Switches:
3,4, 5, 7 ON
J1
1, 2, 6, 8, 9, 10 OFF
P2
NOTE: Only permit the connection of a CRD Additive type device to a Xerox® device NOTE: For further FDI service information on:
with a speed capability of >70 ppm/cpm. The connection of a CRD Subtractive type • NVM Settings.
device to a Xerox® >70 ppm/cpm device can cause issues with the customer's ability to • Harnesses.
collect funds properly. • Trouble Shooting.
5. Connect the Cost Recovery Device (CRD) to P2 on the FDI adaptor, Figure 1. • Fault Codes.
6. Switch on the machine, GP 10. • Test Tools.
Refer to the document “Bear FDI Setting per Product V1.22.00.pdf “ in GSN library
#14131.
6. On the “Convenience Login” screen enter the IP Address 11.1.1.1 (NOTE: the IP address
does not need to function), then select OK.
7. Accept the Restart prompt.
8. Login as an administrator, GP 23.
9. From the left side menu select Permissions.
10. In the top on screen menu select Accounting Methods.
11. In the list under the heading “Accounting Methods” within the Auxiliary Device tab touch
Select.
12. Select the appropriate Device Type and What to Track, then select OK.
13. Accept the Restart prompt.
14. After the device reboots, switch off the machine, GP 10.
15. Install the FDI adapter, go to the FDI Installation Procedure.
FDI Removal Procedure
1. Enter dC131. Ensure the NVM locations that follow are set to “0”.
• 850-001.
• 850-007.
2. Switch off the machine, GP 10.
3. Disconnect the FDI adaptor from the Xerox® device.
4. Switch on the Machine, GP 10.
5. Check dC125 Active Faults. If FDI faults are listed, perform the appropriate RAP.
Procedure Procedure
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1. 1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
2. Touch dC118 Jam Counter. 2. Touch dC120 Failure Counter.
NOTE: There will be a delay while the machine retrieves the jam counter data. NOTE: There will be a delay while the machine retrieves the fault counter data.
3. A list of jams that have occurred is displayed. 3. A list of faults that have occurred on the machine is displayed.
4. Touch Close to return to the Diagnostics screen. 4. Touch Close to return to the Diagnostics screen.
5. Exit diagnostics, GP 1. 5. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
NOTE: This routine only works correctly for A3 and 11x17 inch paper. If setting system regis-
tration for A4 and 8.5x11 inch paper, perform ADJ 60.7 Image Position. Ensure there is A3 or
11x17 inch paper available in one of the paper trays.
Purpose
NOTE: For a description of the print/copy orientation definitions, refer to GP 31 Print/Copy Ori-
entation Definitions.
To measure and adjust the lead edge and side edge image to paper registration of the image
output terminal by performing the routines that follow:
1. Slow Scan% (in the process direction) (measuring position: Lss - side 1 and 2. this is
between the Sa line and the Sb line).
2. Side 1 / Side 2 Registration (measuring position: A, B, C and D - side 1 and 2). This
adjustment is to align the side 2 image with the side 1 image, only the side 2 image is
affected.
3. Lead Registration (measuring position: B - side 1 and 2).
4. Side Registration (measuring position: A - side 1 and 2).
Perform the adjustments in the order that follows:
1. Lead Registration on side 1 - this will adjust measurement B. Refer to IQS 7 Registration
and Figure 1.
2. Slow Scan% - this will adjust side 1 measurement Lss. Refer to IQS 2 Magnification and
Figure 1.
3. Lead Registration on side 2 - this will adjust measurement B. Refer to IQS 7 Registration
and Figure 2.
4. Side Registration on side 1 - this will adjust measurement A. Refer to IQS 7 Registration
and Figure 1.
5. Side Registration on side 2 - this will adjust measurement A. Refer to IQS 7 Registration
and Figure 2.
6. Side 1 / Side 2 Registration - this will adjust the position of the side 2 image in relation to
the side 1 image. Holding the test pattern up to a bright light, the side 1 and side 2 images
should align.
Procedure
NOTE: This procedure uses side registration as an example. When performing other adjust-
ments, use the appropriate location on the test pattern. Refer to Purpose.
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
2. Touch dC126 System Registration.
3. Touch Paper Supply. Select the tray to adjust.
4. Touch Print. The test pattern will be printed, Figure 1 and Figure 2.
5. Compare the registration of the image on side 1 and side two of the print with the specifi- 4. Touch +/- to enter the measured value of position A for side 1.
cation in IQS 7 Registration. Compare the magnification of the image on side 1 and side 2
of the print with the specification in IQS 2 Magnification. If any measurement does not NOTE: Touch A to open a keypad on which to enter the value.
meet the specifications, go to Registration Adjustment. 5. Touch Side Registration, then Adjusted Side (Side 2).
Registration Adjustment 6. Touch +/- to enter the measured value of position A for side 2.
1. This procedure uses side registration as an example. When performing other adjust-
NOTE: Touch B to open a keypad on which to enter the value.
ments, use the appropriate location on the test pattern. Refer to Purpose.
7. After inputting the values for side 1 and side 2, touch Adjust to save the settings.
NOTE: The Sa and Sb locations marked on the test pattern indicate the distance from the
test pattern image to the edge of the paper. 8. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
2. On the printed test pattern, measure the distance (in millimeters) at point Sa from the line
to the edge of the paper on side 1 and side 2. Refer to Figure 1 and Figure 2.
3. Touch Side Registration, then Adjusted Side (Side 1).
Description
Each NVM item is identified using an NVM chain link number in the form XXX-XXX.
Procedure
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
2. Touch dC131 NVM Read/Write.
3. To read NVM, enter the required chain link number. The current value will be displayed.
4. To write NVM:
a. Enter the required chain link number.
b. Touch Change.
c. Enter a new value.
d. Touch OK.
e. The new value will be displayed in the Current Value box.
5. Touch Close to return to the Diagnostics screen.
6. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
NOTE: The Edoc CD must be in the CD drive to use the link below.
4. Touch Start.
5. Follow the UI messages to initialize the NVM.
6. Touch Close to return to the Diagnostics screen.
7. Enter dC131. Ensure NVM value 790-900 is set to 1. If the NVM value was changed,
switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 10. Verify that the Embedded Web Server is
working.
8. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
CAUTION
Check the component control tables for components that will damage the machine if run
together.
3. Touch Chain-Link.
4. Enter the relevant Chain-Link number.
5. Touch OK.
6. Touch Start. The component will operate and the screen will display the information that
follows:
• Chain-Link number of the component.
• Input or output code clarification.
• The component status.
• Operation counter.
7. Toggle Cyclic Motion to repeat the operation.
8. Touch Stop All to stop component operation.
9. Touch Close to return to the Diagnostics screen.
10. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
012-265 Stack Height Sensor 2 Stack height sensor 2 (Q12-265) High/Low 062-251 APS Sensor1 APS sensor 1 (Q62-251) High = document
present
012-271 Punch Home Sensor Punch home sensor (Q12-271) High/Low
062-253 APS Sensor3 APS sensor 3(Q62-253) High = document
012-274 Punch Encoder Sensor Punch encoder sensor (Q12-274) High/Low
present
012-275 Punch Box Set Sensor Punch box set sensor (Q12-275) High/Low
062-300 Platen I/L Switch Platen I/L sensor (Q62-300) Low = DADF
012-277 Puncher Detect Puncher detect (Q12-277) High/Low closed
012-300 Eject Cover Switch Eject cover switch (S12-300) High/Low 062-301 Angle Sensor Angle sensor (Q62-301) Low = DADF
012-302 Fin. Front Door Intlk Finisher front door interlock switch High/Low closed
Switch (S12-302)
012-303 H-Transport Open Sen- H-transport open sensor (Q12-303) High/Low Table 6 Input codes 071 to 078
sor Code Displayed Name Description General
013-101 Folder Home Sensor Folder home sensor (Q13-101) High/Low
071-101 #1 No Paper Sensor Tray 1 no paper sensor (Q71-101) High = Paper
013-107 Booklet Front Low Sta- Booklet front low staple switch (S13- High = Staple slow empty
ple Switch 107)
071-102 #1 Level Sensor Tray 1 level sensor (Q71-102) High = top of stack
013-108 Booklet Rear Low Sta- Booklet rear low staple switch (S13- High = Staple slow
sensed
ple Switch 108)
071-104 #1 Tray Paper Size Tray 1 paper size switch (S71-104) High = Tray out
013-141 Booklet Front Staple Booklet front staple home switch High/Low
Switch
Home Switch (S13-141)
071-105 #1 Pre Feed Sensor Tray 1 pre feed sensor (Q71-105) High = paper
013-142 Booklet Rear Staple Booklet rear staple home switch High/Low detected
Home Switch (S12-142)
072-101 #2 No Paper Sensor Tray 2 no paper sensor (Q72-101) High = Paper
013-143 Booklet Stapler Move Booklet stapler move position sen- High/Low
empty
Position Sensor sor (S13-143)
072-102 #2 Level Sensor Tray 2 level sensor (Q72-102) High = top of stack
013-144 Booklet Stapler Move Booklet stapler move home sensor High/Low
sensed
Home Sensor (S13-144)
072-103 #2 Feed Out Sensor Tray 2 feed out sensor (Q72-103) High = Paper
013-160 Folder Detect Folder detect High/Low Detected
013-161 Booklet Detect Booklet detect High/Low 072-104 #2 Tray Paper Size Sen- Tray 2 paper size sensor (Q72-104) -
013-300 Booklet Cover Open Booklet cover open switch (S13- High/Low sor Digital
Switch 300)
073-101 #3 No Paper Sensor Tray 3 no paper sensor (Q73-101) High = Paper
013-301 Booklet Safety Switch Booklet safety switches High/Low empty
073-102 #3 Level Sensor Tray 3 level sensor (Q73-102) High = top of stack
Table 4 Input codes 042 sensed
Code Displayed Name Description General 073-103 #3 Feed Out Sensor Tray 3 feed out sensor (Q73-103) High = Paper
Detected
042-200 YMC Link Sensor YMC link sensor (Q42-200) High/Low
073-104 #3 Tray Paper Size Sen- Tray 3 paper size sensor (Q73-104) -
042-250 Fusing Exhaust Fan Fail Detects using exhaust fan fail. -
sor Digital
042-251 Marking Fan FAIL Detects marking fan fail. -
074-101 #4 No Paper Sensor Tray 4 no paper sensor (Q74-101) High = Paper
empty
074-102 #4 Level Sensor Tray 4 level sensor (Q74-102) High = top of stack
sensed
041-001 AllSub integrated mode Drum, dispense, waste toner box - Code Displayed Name Description General
auger and fuser exit 1 noise detec- 061-001 LPH forced ON (all- Switches on the print head assembly On/off
tion processing. solid) (all beta pattern).
041-002 Drum abnormal sound Drum abnormal sound detection - 061-002 LPH forced ON (Cin Switches on the print head assembly On/off
detection mode processing. 50%) (Cin 50%).
041-003 Dispense noise detec- Dispense abnormal sound detection - 061-003 LPH forced ON (thyris- Switches on the print head assembly On/off
tion mode processing. tor transfer) (performs thyristor transfer only.
041-004 Waste toner box auger Waste toner box auger and fuser - 062-002 IIT Exposure Lamp Switches on the exposure Lamp. 3 On/off
and fuser exit 1 noise exit 1 noise detection processing. minute timeout.
detection mode 062-005 IIT Scan Motor (Scan Runs the scan motor (MOT62-005) -
042-001 Main Motor (175mm/s) Runs the main motor (MOT42-001) On/off direction) to drive the scan carriage 50mm (2
at 175mm/s. inches) in the scan direction.
074-002 #4 Feed Motor 2-phase Runs the tray 4 feed/lift motor On/off 078-094 HCF1 T/A Motor Runs the HCF T/A motor (MOT78- On/off
093) at high speed.
(CCW 2) Lift Up Direc- (MOT74-001) at tray lift speed in the
tion lift direction.
Table 14 Output Codes 091 to 094
074-003 #4 Feed Motor 1-2- Runs the tray 4 feed/lift motor On/off
phase (CW 1-2) Feed (MOT74 -001) at paper feed speed Code Displayed Name Description General
Direction in the feed direction (1-2 phase con-
091-001 BCR Y DC Energizes the BCR DC Y bias volt- On/off
trol) age.
075-001 MSI Feed Clutch Energizes the bypass tray feed On/off 091-002 BCR M DC Energizes the BCR DC M bias volt- On/off
clutch (CL75-001).
age.
CAUTION Procedure
Do not perform this routine if installing a new ESS PWBA. 1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
2. Touch dC500 Blank Page Threshold Value.
3. Follow the UI messages.
CAUTION
4. Touch Start.
To avoid the loss of NVM data, perform this routine before performing dC301 NVM Backup
5. A single side is then scanned and the threshold value coefficient is displayed and set.
Restore.
6. Touch Close to return to the Diagnostics screen.
Procedure
7. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
2. Touch dC363 Backup and Restore NVM Values.
3. Touch either Back Up Files or Restore Files, then touch Start.
4. Refer to the Backup / Restore NVM confirmation screen, then touch Yes to continue.
5. Wait for the process to complete, then touch Close.
6. Touch Close to return to the Diagnostics screen.
7. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
Procedure NOTE: All test prints should be printed long edge feed.
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1. Procedure
2. Touch dC527 DADF Independent Operation.
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
3. Follow the UI messages.
2. Touch dC612 Print Test Pattern.
4. Touch Start.
3. Select the test pattern required. Refer to IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP. Select from the
5. Follow the UI messages, then touch Confirm. available options for the required test pattern:
6. Touch Close to return to the Diagnostics screen. • Pattern number
7. Exit diagnostics, GP 1. • Quantity
• Paper Supply
• Cin%
• Screen
• Output destination
• 1 sided or 2 Sided
4. Touch the Start button.
5. Touch the Close button to return to the diagnostics screen.
6. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
Pattern Numbers and Images
NOTE: If the settings for a test pattern are incorrect, an error message is displayed and the
test pattern will not be printed. In this case, ensure the settings match the requirements listed
in IQ1 Internal Test Patterns, then repeat the test print.
Procedure
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
2. Touch dC675 Registration Control Setup Cycle. Readings for all four colors are displayed
on the screen. Scroll down to view more readings
3. Touch Start, the Registration Control Setup Cycle Processing message displays.
4. Wait for the process to complete, then touch Close.
5. Touch Close to return to the Diagnostics screen.
6. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
CAUTION
Only use one of the specified Xerox papers listed in Table 1. The use of non-specified Xerox
papers may cause the IIT to be calibrated incorrectly.
1. Perform ADJ 60.5 Optics Cleaning Procedure.
2. Enter dC131, then read NVM location 715-106.
3. Refer to Table 1, then depending on the available paper position 10 sheets on the docu-
ment glass, then set the NVM 715-106 value to 5, 6, 7 or 8.
NOTE: In order to adjust the white reference the NVM 715-106 value needs to be set
according to Table 1.
If the NVM 715-106 value displayed is something other than 5, 6, 7, 8 or 0, the scanner
NVM is corrupt and needs to be initialized. Enter dC301, select area IISS - IIT/IPS (Scan-
ner NVM), then touch Start and follow the UI messages to initialize the scanner NVM.
4. Exit dC131.
Procedure
CAUTION
Do not select Optical Axis Correction unless the CCD Assembly has been replaced or you are
specifically instructed to perform Optical Axis Correction by some other procedure. If it is nec-
essary to perform the Optical Axis Correction, go to (ADJ 60.6).
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
2. Touch dC945 IIT Calibration.
3. Select White Reference Adjustment - Side 1, then follow the on screen instructions.
4. After the White Reference Adjustment - Side 1 routine has completed, position test pat-
tern 82E13120 on the platen glass, color pattern face down and lead edge on the left, with
the 10 sheets of Xerox specified paper on top.
5. Select CCD Calibration Side 1, then follow the on screen instructions.
Procedure Procedure
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1. 1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
2. Touch dC980 Altitude Adjustment. 2. Touch dC981 Marking Data Print.
3. Touch the relevant altitude for the machine location. 3. Touch Start, the Marking Data document is printed.
4. Touch OK. 4. Touch Close.
5. Touch Close to return to the Diagnostics screen.
6. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
Procedure Procedure
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1. 1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
2. Touch dC991 Toner Density Adjustment. 2. Touch dC1215 Transfer Voltage Adjustment.
3. Observe numbers for TC Target and TC Value for each color. Only make adjustments if 3. Follow the on screen instructions.
difference is greater than 30. To exit at this point, touch Close to return to the Diagnostics 4. Touch Close.
screen.
5. Touch Close to return to the Diagnostics screen.
4. To proceed with adjustment, touch Number of Sheets.
6. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
5. For one color only, touch - or + to choose a number of sheets to be printed.
NOTE: Negative numbers are permitted. For example entering -6 will result in 6 sheets
being printed. The toner density will reduce for each sheet. If +6 is entered, toner density
will increase for each sheet.
NOTE: If negative numbers were inputted, the first print will have a high density, with each
subsequent print will have a slightly lower density. If positive numbers were inputted, the
first print will have a low density, with each subsequent print will have a slightly higher
density.
7. Observe numbers for TC Target and TC Value. Make further adjustments if necessary.
8. Touch Close to return to the Diagnostics screen.
9. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
Wiring Diagrams
Wiring Diagrams.............................................................................................................. 7-29
13. HCF (2 of 2), Figure 36. P/J14 Figure 15 4 Main power switch
14. Horizontal transport, Figure 29. P/J14 Figure 4 3 UI I/F PWB
15. Integrated office finisher (1 of 3), Figure 26. J16 Figure 14 11 Finisher outlet (BLK)
16. Integrated office finisher (2 of 3), Figure 27. J17 Figure 14 18 Finisher outlet (WHT)
17. Integrated office finisher (3 of 3), Figure 28. J18 Figure 14 13 Inlet GFI breaker (WHT)
18. LVPS, Figure 12. J51 Figure 14 14 Inlet GFI breaker (GN/YL)
19. Machine rear, Figure 14. J52 Figure 14 12 Finisher Outlet (GN/YL)
28. Tray module (1TM) (2 of 2), Figure 19. P/J60 Figure 35 7 HCF
29. Tray module (3TM) (1 of 2), Figure 20. P/J61 Figure 35 5 HCF
Figure 1 DADF 1 of 2
Figure 35 HCF (1 of 2)
Figure 36 HCF (2 of 2)
Introduction
Refer to the wiring diagrams that follow:
• IOT/IIT ACH, Wiring Diagram 1.
• IOT/IIT ACN, Wiring Diagram 2.
• IOT/IIT +3.3VDC (1 of 2), Wiring Diagram 3.
• IOT/IIT +3.3VDC (2 of 2), Wiring Diagram 4.
• IOT/IIT +3.3V RTN (1 of 2), Wiring Diagram 5.
• IOT/IIT +3.3V RTN (2 of 2), Wiring Diagram 6.
• IOT/IIT +5VDC (1 of 3), Wiring Diagram 7.
• IOT/IIT +5VDC (2 of 3), Wiring Diagram 8.
• IOT/IIT +5VDC (2 of 3), Wiring Diagram 9.
• IOT/IIT +5V RTN (1 of 3), Wiring Diagram 10.
• IOT/IIT +5V RTN (2 of 3), Wiring Diagram 11.
• IOT/IIT +5V RTN (3 of 3), Wiring Diagram 12.
• IOT/IIT +24VDC (1 of 2), Wiring Diagram 13.
• IOT/IIT +24VDC (2 of 2), Wiring Diagram 14.
• IOT/IIT +24V RTN, Wiring Diagram 15.
• DADF +5VDC, Wiring Diagram 16.
• DADF +24VDC, Wiring Diagram 17.
• DADF DC COM, Wiring Diagram 18.
• Integrated office finisher +5VDC, Wiring Diagram 19.
• Integrated office finisher +24VDC, Wiring Diagram 20.
• Integrated office finisher DC RTN, Wiring Diagram 21.
• Office finisher LX +5VDC, Wiring Diagram 22.
• Office finisher LX +24VDC, Wiring Diagram 23.
• Office finisher LX DC RTN, Wiring Diagram 24.
• HCF +24VDC, Wiring Diagram 25.
• HCF +5VDC, Wiring Diagram 26.
• HCF DC COM, Wiring Diagram 27.
C7025 with tray 1 and 1TM C7030 with tray 1 and TTM
Closing the main power switch supplies AC power to the low voltage power supply, from which
it is distributed throughout the machine, Figure 1, item 1. The AC power is converted into
+5VDC standby power which is supplied to the ESS PWB (and Fax if installed). The ESS PWB
supplies 5VDC power to the UI power button, Figure 1, item 2.
With only the main power switch on there is no generation of either +5V power or +24V power.
This cannot occur until the power button on the UI is pressed.
The ESS PWB monitors the UI power button. When the UI power button is pressed the ESS
PWB detects the change in status and enables the low voltage power supply to begin produc-
ing and distributing both the +5VDC and +24VDC power required for operation.
NOTE: The illustration shows the multi function device variant. Power switch locations on the
printer only variants are in the same location.
HVPS PWB
LVPS PWB
Figure 3 HVPS PWB
IOT States
Refer to Table 2 for the IOT systems are in the following states in each mode.
Table 2 States
Low Power
Running Mode Ready Mode Mode Sleep Mode
Fusing System Maintaining Maintaining Maintaining at low Stop state
(Fusing Unit) operating standby temperature Front cover
temperature temperature interlock
Marking system Operating state Stop state Stop state Stop state
(Transfer,
Developer, etc.)
Exposure System Operating state Stop state Stop state Stop state
(LPH)
Fusing Fan Low Speed Temperature Temperature Stop state Figure 4 Front cover and left cover interlocks
Rotation or High control in Stop or control in Stop or
Speed Rotation Rotate (slow) Rotate (slow) The left cover interlock switch is wired in series with the front cover interlock switch. These
by Temperature switches are supplied with +5VDC power from the LVPS. The drive PWB monitors their status.
Control
Marking Fan Stop or Rotation Temperature Temperature Stop state When the L/H cover interlock switch opens, fault code 077-301 left hand cover open sets and
by Temperature control in Stop or control in Stop or the drive PWB de-energizes the interlock relay located on the LVPS. Simultaneously, the fault
Control (Low Rotate (slow) Rotate (slow) code and a message to close the front cover display on the UI. With the interlock relay de-
Speed/High energized, the supply of +24VDC power is removed from the drive PWB and the devices it
Speed supplies and/or controls (tray module PWB, motors, clutches, solenoids, fans, xerographics).
Refer to BSD 1.8 Power Interlock Switching (1 of 3) and Figure 4.
ESS (Reference) Operating state Standby Standby Ready to
receive
NOTE: C7020/C7025/C7030 multi function device is shown. C7000 printer is the same.
The UI speaker generates synchronised operational sounds for the UI. The UI speaker is
attached to the side of the main device.
NOTE: The UI assembly, PL 2.05 Item 7 is replaced as a single item. The components within
the UI are not accessible.
The ESS PWB is contained in a chassis. The chassis contains the ESS PWB and HDD, along
with mechanical parts and harnesses. Refer to Figure 1.
Refer to:
ESS PWB
• BSD 3.1 PWB Communications (ESS PWB to Drive PWB)
• BSD 3.2 PWB Communications (ESS PWB/Drive PWB to STM)
• BSD 3.3 PWB Communications (ESS PWB/Drive PWB to 1TM/3TM/TTM)
• BSD 3.4 PWB Communications (ESS PWB to UI)
• BSD 3.5 PWB Communications (ESS PWB to DADF) Figure 1 ESS PWB
• BSD 3.6 PWB Communications (ESS PWB/Drive PWB to Finisher)
• BSD 3.7 Accessory
• BSD 3.8 Electric Billing
• BSD 3.9 ESS
Refer to:
• BSD 3.1 PWB Communications (ESS PWB to Drive PWB)
A/B type USB port • BSD 3.2 PWB Communications (ESS PWB/Drive PWB to STM)
• BSD 3.3 PWB Communications (ESS PWB/Drive PWB to 1TM/3TM/TTM)
WiFi dongle • BSD 3.6 PWB Communications (ESS PWB/Drive PWB to Finisher)
USB • BSD 4.1 Main Drive Control
• BSD 4.2 Sub Drive Control
HDMI
Network Accessory
Drive PWB
Main Drives
The main drive assembly PL 40.10 Item 1, is located to the rear of the machine behind the
LVPS, PL 1.10 Item 1. Refer to Figure 1.
Fuser motor
Main motor
Main drive
assembly
Sub motor
Figure 1 DADF
NOTE: The tray APS sensors should not be confused with the APS sensors in the paper path.
Refer to APS Sensors.
When a document stack of different sizes is set, the document size is detected according to the
combination of the maximum width and length of the documents. Refer to Figure 4.
NOTE: The APS sensors should not be confused with the tray APS sensors. Refer to Tray
APS Sensors and Size Sensors.
Nudger roll
Takeaway clutch
and takeaway roll
Feed roll
DADF PWB
Figure 9 DADF PWB Figure 10 Exit roll and nip release solenoid
The image of the document is reflected by the mirrors on the full and half rate carriages to the
lens assembly. The image is focused by the lens onto the charge-coupled device (CCD). The
CCD array converts the optical information to electrical analog levels that represent the red,
green, and blue components of the original image. The CCD array uses a series of red, green
and blue filters to separate the reflected image data into its R, G, and B components. Refer to
Figure 1.
NOTE: Figure 1 shows the IIT after removal of the lens cover assembly, PL 60.10 Item 12.
Figure 1 IIT
The light guide and diffuser convert the light from the LED array into a uniform pattern that
closely parallels the output from a fluorescent lamp. Refer to Figure 4.
The benefits of this design include uniform and stable light output at lower energy cost,
reduced heat output, and faster start up.
The scan speed varies according to the reduction or enlargement ratio that has been selected. The stationary half rate and full rate mirrors are used in the usual way to reflect the image
A slow scan produces an enlarged image and a fast scan produces a small image. Electronic through the lens to the CCD.
processing is used to change the image size in the front- to-back (fast scan) direction when
reduction or enlargement is selected. Refer to Figure 5. In all copy modes, the document is only scanned once regardless of the number of copies
required. Refer to Figure 6.
To determine a document's width, the exposure lamp is switched on momentarily, the docu-
ment is illuminated, and the CCD image sensor detects the width (fast scan direction) to the
nearest millimeter. A document's length (slow scan direction) is detected by the APS sensors 1
and 3. Refer to Figure 8.
A look-up table is used to determine the size of the document. Refer to Table 1.
APS sensor 3
Example: The scanner differentiates between an A4 LEF and an A3 SEF document because NOTE: The NVM setting for 715-305 determines whether the machine will detect 13" or 14" in
only the A3 SEF document is detected by the APS sensors. the slow scan direction.
The IIT has two APS sensors which enable it to distinguish between 8.5x11 inch SEF, 8.5x13 Table 1 Paper sizes
inch SEF, and 8.5x14 inch SEF. Refer to Figure 9. Document size Width (mm) Length (mm) DMO-W XE/DMO-E XC
A5 SEF 148 210 Y Y N
A5 LEF 210 148 Y Y N
5.5” x 8.5” LEF 215.9 139.7 Y N Y
5.5” x 8.5” SEF 139.7 215.9 N N Y
B5 SEF 182 257 Y N N
B5 LEF 257 182 Y N N
A4 SEF 210 297 Y Y N
A4 LEF 297 210 Y Y Y
8.5” x 11” SEF 215.9 279.4 Y N Y
8.5” x 11” LEF 279.4 215.9 Y Y Y
8.5” x 13” SEF 215.9 330.2 Y Y N
8.5” x 14” 215.9 355.9 Y N Y
B4 SEF 257 364 Y N N
A3 SEF 297 420 Y Y Y
11” x 17” SEF 279.4 431.8 Y Y Y
Executive LEF 266.7 184.2 N Y Y
A6 SEF 105 148 Y Y N
Post card LEF 152.4 101.6 Y Y Y
B6 SEF 128.5 182 Y Y N
Figure 9 Document size sensing
Next, the exposure lamp turns on and the IIT collects and applies white change correction
data.
The full rate carriage now moves to the start position, where it waits a specified time. When the
wait time elapses, the full rate carriage moves across the image area.
The exposure lamp turns off at the end of the scan, and the full rate carriage returns to the
white reference strip position. Refer to Figure 11.
Configurations
There are three basic Xerox® VersaLink® C7020/C7025/C7030 and the C7000 machine paper
supply configurations, Figure 1:
• Desktop machine with paper tray 1, PL 70.05.
• Stacked machine with paper tray 1 and 1 tray module (1TM), PL 70.15.
• Stacked machine with paper tray 1 and tandem tray module (TTM), PL 70.65.
STM Tray 2
Tray 4
Tray 3
3TM
Tray 5 (Bypass tray)
All the Xerox® VersaLink® C7020/C7025/C7030 and the C7000 machine configurations fea-
ture a bypass tray (Tray 5), PL 70.30. The VersaLink® C7020/C7025/C7030 can also be con-
figured with an optional high capacity feeder (HCF), PL 70.45 and Figure 3.
During paper feeding the tray level sensor is continuously monitored. When the signal tray
level sensor signal off is detected, the control logic determines that it cannot feed the next
sheet. The feed/lift motor, that is rotating CW during feed, then begins rotating CCW a prede-
termined time after the end of the feed operation. Thereby, recommencing elevation of the
paper stack to the paper feed position, then the feed cycle begins again, Figure 6.
Tray 1 level
Tray 1 no paper sensor Feed/lift motor
sensor
Gear train
Envelope tray
Supported Media
Refer to GP 15 for the paper and media size specifications of the various paper trays.
Feed roll
Paper Tray Elevation and Feeding: Trays 1, 2, 3 and 4
NOTE: The elevation mechanism is similar trays 3 and 4 of the TTM but on different on the
HCF.
Refer to the relevant sections: Lift shaft
Bottom plate
• Tandem Tray Module (TTM): Tray 3 components.
Nudger roll
• Tandem Tray Module (TTM): Tray 4 Components.
• High Capacity Feeder (HCF) (Tray 6).
Paper trays 1, 2, 3 and 4 all have similar paper elevator systems that lift the paper stack into Figure 6 Tray control components
the paper feed position. The paper feed side of a hinged bottom plate is raised by a lift shaft
until the paper stack is at the correct height to feed the top sheet of paper, Figure 6. The tray
drops mechanically when the tray is opened as the gears disengage.
Feed/lift motor
NOTE: The paper size detection system is different on HCF and trays 3 and 4 of the TTM.
Refer to the relevant sections:
• Tandem Tray Module (TTM): Tray 3 components.
• Tandem Tray Module (TTM): Tray 4 Components.
• High Capacity Feeder (HCF) (Tray 6).
Paper size detection is similar for trays 1, 2, 3 and 4. Adjustment of the paper tray front and
rear side and end guides into contact with the paper stack enables the size of the paper to be
calculated. Figure 9. An actuator located at the rear of the tray, moves with the side guides, Size sensor actuator
actuating one or more of the 5 switches which comprise the paper size switch, Figure 10. The
combination of on and off signals from the paper size switches changes its output voltage. This
output voltage is then converted from an analog to a digital value that is monitored by a PWB. Figure 10 Paper size sensor actuator
The digital value indicates the size of the paper.
Paper size detection is performed at power on and every 0.1 second thereafter. However, the
paper size sensor for a tray that has begun to feed paper is not monitored.
If a tray selected on the UI does not contain paper of the selected size, the machine will not
print using that tray. If an analog to digital value that is not appropriate for the size of paper in a
specific tray is detected the machine will not print using that tray.
NOTE: Although Figure 9 depicts the tray 1 paper size sensor, the location of the sensor in
relation to the paper tray is typical for paper trays 2, 3 and 4.
NOTE: The no paper detection system is different on HCF and trays 3 and 4 of the TTM. The machine informs the user of the amount of paper in each tray (trays 1 through 4 and 6) at
five levels: 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, and 0%.
Refer to the relevant sections:
• Tandem Tray Module (TTM): Tray 3 components. The calculation of the amount of paper in a paper tray by the control logic is dependent on the
• Tandem Tray Module (TTM): Tray 4 Components. time that elapses during elevation of the paper stack. Based on the time taken from when the
• High Capacity Feeder (HCF) (Tray 6). tray feed/lift motor begins to drive the lift plate, until the paper stack triggers the tray level sen-
sor on.
Refer to Figure 11. The no paper sensor detects if there is paper in the paper tray. The no
paper sensors monitor every 0.01 second while the machine is in operation and at standby. Paper Tray Specifications: Trays 1 and 2
When the last sheet feeds from the tray, the no paper sensor actuator drops into an opening in
The IOT is equipped with paper tray 1. The STM, 1TM, 3TM and TTM each provide for a paper
the paper tray bottom plate and unblocks the no paper sensor. This signals to the control logic
tray 2 within their configurations.
that the tray is empty and to display a tray empty message on the UI.
Trays 1 and 2 each hold about 500 sheets of A4 or 8.5 x 11 inch paper.
If it is determined that a tray has no paper, the machine prohibits that tray from being used. If
no paper is detected during feed, the machine will finish with the paper that is being fed and The signals from the tray 1 and tray 2 paper size switches indicates the size of the paper
then stop. However, if the machine is in auto tray switch (ATS) mode and the same size of
loaded in each tray, refer to Paper Size Detection: Trays 1, 2, 3 and 4.
paper is found in another tray, the machine will start to feed paper from that tray.
For detailed media information refer to GP 15 Paper and Media Size Specifications.
Tray 2
Tray 4
Tray 3
Tray 3 no paper
sensor
The tray 3 size actuator is a thin,
clear film sheet with cutouts; tray
4 is similar.
Lift shaft
Stack height is maintained in the same way as trays 1, and 2, refer to Paper Size Detection:
Trays 1, 2, 3 and 4.
When the last sheet feeds from the tray, the tray 4 no paper sensor actuator drops into an
opening in the paper tray elevator unblocking the tray 4 no paper sensor. This signals the con-
trol logic that the tray is empty and to display a (tray empty) message on the UI, Figure 16.
The tray 4 paper size sensor is identical to the tray 3 paper size sensor, Figure 15. Moving the
side rear, PL 70.67 Item 2, and side front, PL 70.67 Item 3, guides provides the control logic
with the paper size information that it displays on the UI. Paper sizes are checked and sent
from the TTM PWB, PL 70.90 Item 1 to the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
Lifting the paper stack is accomplished through a cable and pulley system. When the tray is
loaded and pushed into the machine, thereby actuating the paper size sensor, the control logic
commands the tray 4 feed/lift motor to rotate in a clockwise direction. The motor provides drive
to the cable and pulley system, raising the stack. When the stack actuates the tray 4 level sen-
sor, the motor stops, with the paper stack now in the feed position, Figure 16.
For detailed media information refer to GP 15 Paper and Media Size Specifications. When media is placed in the bypass tray the paper stopper is locked in the down position pre-
venting media entering the paper path and the nudger roll is in a none media contact raised
Tray 5 (Bypass tray): Components position, Figure 18.
Bypass tray no paper sensor - The bypass tray no paper sensor detects the presence of
media. If the detected length of the media is greater than the size selected on the control panel
or not within a range from 88.9 to 297mm, the machine stops, Figure 17.
An actuator attached to the upper frame, PL 70.35 Item 4, blocks the bypass tray no paper
sensor when there is no media in tray 5. As paper is loaded in tray 5, the lead edge of the stack
moves the actuator, unblocking the sensor. The bypass tray no paper sensor signal is moni- Figure 18 Bypass tray
tored by the drive PWB, PL 1.10 Item 3.
When energized, the bypass tray feed clutch transfers drive from the drive gear 22T to the
shaft of the feed roll. In turn the feed gear 30T, PL 70.40 Item 19, transfers motion to the
nudger roll, PL 70.40 Item 16, via the idler gear, PL 70.40 Item 14, and nudger rear 37T, PL
70.40 Item 15.
For detailed media information refer to GP 15 Paper and Media Size Specifications.
When the HCF tray is pulled out to load paper, the lift gear is separated from the drive gear and When the HCF tray is pushed in and actuates the HCF tray in sensor, Figure 21, the following
the tray is free to fall to the bottom position. A torque limiter on the lift shaft slows the fall of the sequence of events occurs, refer to Figure 22:
paper tray to prevent damage to feeder components. 1. The nudger roll is lowered.
2. The HCF feed/lift motor switches on and rotates CCW to lift the tray through a pulley and
Size sensing is determined by the HCF size sensor (A) and the HCF size sensor (B). The cable arrangement.
paper tray guides actuate the size sensors, Figure 21 and Table 1.
3. Lift continues until the paper stack reaches and lifts the nudger roll, deactuating the HCF
level sensor.
4. The HCF feed/lift motor switches off.
HCF size sensor
B, (A4)
HCF size sensor
A, (letter)
The control logic calculates the amount of paper that remains in the HCF tray by the time it
takes for the paper stack to deactuate the HCF level sensor, Figure 22. The value is then dis-
played on the UI for operator information. Refer to Table 2 for the time/quantity relationship.
If the HCF is empty, the HCF no paper sensor will actuate, and a Tray Empty message will dis-
play, Figure 22.
Tray
The purpose of the paper transport system is to take a sheet of media from any of the various
paper trays and then deliver that media un-skewed to the point of xerographic transfer. Refer to
Xerographics for details on the xerographic process and Fusing/Copy Transportation for details
on fusing and post fuser copy transportation.
Figure 1 shows the paper path, drive components and sensors of the Xerox® VersaLink®
C7020/B7025/C7030 and C7000 machine, configured with a 3 tray module (3TM).
Refer to Block Schematic Diagrams (BSDs) chain 8 for paper transport component wiring and
interconnection details.
Jam Examples
• Fault 072-105 registration sensor jam (tray 2) indicates that registration sensor failed to
turn ON in a specified amount of time after the registration clutch initialized during paper
feeding from tray 2.
• Fault 077-902 exit 2 sensor jam indicates that paper remains at exit 2 sensor while the
machine is powered on and stopped and has its interlocks closed.
NOTE: The following describes typical functions performed by various paper path sensors; it is
not an exhaustive list.
Refer to Figure 1.
• Tray 1 pre feed sensor - provide misfeed and jam detection for trays 1.
• Tray 2 feed out sensor- this sensor detects the lead and trail edges of sheets fed from tray
2 as they pass the takeaway roll; also used for tray 2 misfeed and jam detection.
• Bypass no paper sensor - The bypass no paper sensor detects paper presence in the
bypass tray.
• Registration sensor - monitors the registration unit for the presence of paper. Its signal, in
conjunction with the registration clutch on signal, indicates media jams, i.e., if the registra-
tion clutch on signal has occurred and the sensor fails to stay on a specified time, a jam
downstream from the sensor or in the duplex path is indicated. The control logic also uses
the signal from the registration sensor (registration sensor off) in the control of duplex
transport operations, bypass feed start timing, and tray 1 feed start timing.
• Duplex sensor - The duplex sensor monitors the duplex path. A duplex path sensor on
jam occurs when the sensor fails to turn on a specified time after the exit 2 motor reverses
rotation to feed the sheet into the duplex area. A jam in the duplex area may be indicated
by the sensor remaining on. Figure 2 Tray 1 Takeaway and registration roll drive
The gear train linkage from each of the takeaway motors to the takeaway rolls varies for each
paper supply modules. Refer to the following section for details on post feed paper transporta-
tion to registration nip rolls:
The figures that follow show the respective takeaway motor to takeaway roll 2 configurations:
• Tray 2 STM, Figure 4.
• Tray 2 1TM, Figure 5.
• Tray 2, 3 and 4, Figure 6.
When feeding from tray 3 or tray 4 of a 3TM, the takeaway motors of all the above paper trays
are energized and drive their associated takeaway rolls, Figure 5. At the same time the tray 3
or 4 feeder is activated and paper is fed from the feeder onto the associated takeaway roll (3 or
4). Trays 3 and tray 4 have no feed out sensors. The takeaway motors for trays 1, 2, 3 and 4
will stop when the registration sensor detects the lead edge of the final sheet in a print job.
TAKEAWAY ROLL REGISTRATION CHUTE Refer to Paper Tray Elevation and Feeding: Trays 1, 2, 3 and 4 in the Paper Supply and Feed
section of this PTO for detailed paper feed information.
Refer to Paper Tray Elevation and Feeding: Trays 1, 2, 3 and 4 in the Paper Supply and Feed
section of this PTO for detailed paper feed information.
Figure 4 STM
TAKEAWAY ROLL 2
Refer to Paper Tray Elevation and Feeding: Trays 1, 2, 3 and 4 in the Paper Supply and Feed
section of this PTO for detailed paper feed information.
When tray 3 or tray 4 is selected tray 1 takeaway roll is driven by the main drive motor, tray 2
TAKEAWAY ROLL 2 takeaway roll is driven by the takeaway motor 1. Takeaway roll 3, PL 80.65 Item 17, and the
tray 4 transport roll, PL 80.70 Item 14, of the TTM are driven via their respective gear trains
and a drive belt, PL 70.85 Item 10, linked to takeaway motor 2 (MOT77-035), PL 70.85 Item 2
and Figure 7. At the same time the tray 3 or 4 feeder is activated and paper is fed from the
TAKEAWAY ROLL 3
feeder onto takeaway roll 3. Paper feed from tray 4 is transported past the tray 4 feed out sen-
sor to the tray 3 takeaway roll via the tray 4 transport assembly, PL 80.70 Item 11.
The paper continue transportation to the registration nip rolls via takeaway rolls 1 and 2. The
TAKEAWAY ROLL 4
takeaway motors for trays 1, 2, 3 and 4 will stop when the registration sensor detects the lead
edge of the final sheet in a print job.
TAKEAWAY ROLL 2
TAKEAWAY ROLL 3
Figure 7 TTM
Refer to Bypass tray (Tray 5) in the Paper Supply and Feed section of this PTO for detailed
information on paper feed from the bypass tray.
Takeaway motor
Feed roll
NOTE: The print engine employs the “Write Black” xerography principle; when developing
the image, the discharged areas of the photoreceptor drum attract toner.
IBT unit
Toner cartridges
The print engine uses the following components in the xerographic process.
Drum cartridges and
• Toner cartridge (customer replaceable unit). developer units
• Toner dispenser assembly.
• Developer unit.
• Drum cartridge (customer replaceable unit).
• IBT unit. (containing the transfer belt and 1st BTR) Figure 1 Main xerographic components
• LED Print Head (LPH).
• 2nd BTR (customer replaceable unit).
• HVPS.
Figure 1 shows the main xerographic components as viewed from the front of the machine,
with the waste toner bottle removed.
Toner cartridge
Dispenser Drum
The drum cartridge is equipped with customer replaceable unit monitor (CRUM). A CRUM
monitors and stores information about the customer replaceable unit (CRU). The information
stored in the CRUM is used to:
• Monitor CRU usage (total number of copies/prints)
• Indicate how near the CRU is to the end of its life.
• Prevent the installation and use of an unauthorized or incorrect CRU (CRUM checks for
Xerox trademark on the CRU)
• Indicate that a new CRU has been installed
The CRUM consists of two components - a CRUM reader and a CRUM PWB. The CRUM
PWB is mounted at the rear of the drum cartridge. Refer to Figure 6.
Figure 8 Drum cartridge electrical contact Figure 9 Drum cartridge guide contact
Developer unit
A developer bias voltage that is applied to the developer roll controls the development process
and gives cleaner background areas. The developer bias voltage is modified based on the
user's selections on the UI. Darker images require a greater amount of negative charge to be
applied than lighter images. Refer to Figure 17 and Figure 18.
Mechanical drive for the IBT units is provided by the main motor, PL 40.10 Item 10, via the
drive assembly PL 40.10 Item 1.
Developer roll
Backup roll (BUR)
IBT drive roll
Supply auger
2nd Transfer
The toner image is transferred from the IBT unit transfer belt to the surface of the paper using
the 2nd bias transfer roll (2nd BTR). The 2nd BTR is constructed of a metal shaft surrounded
by a soft, conductive urethane roll which has a positive charge. As the transfer belt and paper
pass between the 2nd BTR and Back Up Roll (BUR), the positive charge of the 2nd BTR
attracts the negatively charged toner to the paper.
Drum
The IBT cleaner assembly, PL 90.45 Item 2, employs a cleaning blade and an auger to strip
the belt and transport the used toner to the waste toner bottle. Trickle outlet shutters
Waste toner full sensor
window
The ATC sensor (mounted to the drum cartridge, PL 90.20 Item 1) monitors the toner concen-
tration inside the drum cartridge.
The MOB and ADC sensors (mounted in the MOB ADC assembly at the front left of the IOT,
PL 90.40 Item 6), monitors the toner concentration on the transfer belt.
Process control uses the information from the above sources to:
• Alter the BCR voltage as required
Registration roll
• Alter the LPH light intensity
• Control the toner dispense rate
When the power is ON, the environmental sensor values are continuously monitored to mea-
sure the temperature and humidity in the machine. The environmental sensor is mounted on
the inside rear of the IOT, PL 90.20 Item 13.
Each of the four ATC sensors checks the toner concentration while the developer roll is being
driven. The method is as follows:
• The ATC sensor output is read at predetermined intervals.
• The read values, excluding some of the highest and lowest, are averaged.
• The difference between maximum and minimum values is calculated.
• The average read value is corrected to determine the ATC output value (current toner
concentration).
After an ATC sensor check, the ATC target value is calculated. To calculate the ATC target
value, the temperature and humidity correction values calculated from the environment sensor
value in the machine and the developing material deterioration correction value calculated from
the cumulative drum rotation time are added to the standard ATC target value. Refer to Figure
25.
ATC sensor
The ADC Patch is generated at specified times, such as at Power ON, at recovery from Sleep
Mode, at the start, during, and at the end of a job. If the measured density of the ADC patch is
lighter than the target, the machine controls the drum charging potential, developer bias, and
LPH light quantity to bring the density closer to the ADC target.
ATC Dispensing
The dispense time is calculated from the toner concentration in the developing unit. The differ-
ence between the ATC target value and the ATC output value is calculated. From this differ-
ence, the ATC dispense time is calculated.
The dispense time is calculated from the number of pixels in image data. From each print, the
pixels per page are counted. From the ICDC count, the dispense time per sheet is calculated.
The dispense motor is driven for the dispense time calculated from ATC and ICDC.
NOTE: There are no spare parts in the fuser assembly. The fuser is replaced as an assembly.
Refer to Figure 1.
Fuser
Figure 1 Fuser
Fusing works using a free belt nip fusing mechanism consisting of a heat roll, and with a fusing
belt in place of a pressure roll. The heat roll consists of a thin steel tube coated with teflon to
control the build-up of static and an anti-wear agent. The heat roll and fuser belt are in constant
contact during fusing, Figure 2. The stripper blade physically removes the paper from the heat
roll during processing. The heat roll receives drive from the main motor through a system of
gears. The fusing belt is driven by the friction applied from the heat roll.
Main heater rod The drive PWB controls fusing temperature as required by the temperature control logic.
P/J504
Fuser NC sensor
Thermostats
P2
The fuser may require more frequent replacement if any of the following usage factors exist:
• Area coverage exceeds 5%
• Paper larger than letter size is commonly printed
• Printing short-edge feed
• Printing on specialty media
Print Quantity Counter (Counter 1):
Fuser counter 1 increments each time the fuser exit sensor turns OFF.
Each A4 LEF fed sheet is counted as 10 HFSI counts. When the HFSI counter (chain-link 954-
850) reaches a value of 1,000,000 (100,000 x 10), the CSE will be notified on the HFSI counter
UI diagnostics screen that the fuser should be replaced. Note that the machine and fuser will
continue to run if the fuser is not replaced at this time.
The fuser assembly will also age/degrade due to extended usage time. The ON time HFSI
counter (chain-link 954-851) keeps track of machine ON time in seconds. When this HFSI
reaches a count of 18,000,000 seconds (approximately 208 days), the CSE will be notified on
Fuser connector the HFSI counter UI diagnostics screen that the fuser should be replaced. Note that the
machine and fuser will continue to run if the fuser is not replaced at this time.
After installing a new fuser, the HFSI counters are reset automatically. Refer to Figure 6.
The drive PWB logic uses the inputs from the sensors to control the fusing temperature by
switching the heat rods on and off as required, refer to BSD 10.2 Fusing Heat Control (1 of 2).
The thermostats, located near the center and the front of the heat roll, provide over tempera-
ture protection. When the surface temperature of the heat roll exceeds a predetermined value,
the thermostat opens, de-energizing the fuser relay and cutting off the current to the heat rods,
refer to BSD 10.2 Fusing Heat Control (1 of 2), Figure 7.
Fuser
Fuser NC sensor
Thermostats
Fuser fan
Integrated finisher
Booklet maker
Office finisher LX
Horizontal transport
The exit 1 OCT solenoid moves the exit 1 roller toward the front or rear to offset the sheet or
Based on the configuration of the system, exit 1 directs prints to either the:
set. The exit 1 OCT full stack sensor monitors the position of the exit 1 roller.
• Output catch tray
• Horizontal transport when an office finisher LX is installed Drive for the exit 1 roller is obtained from the main motor through a system of gears. Refer to
• Integrated office finisher Figure 12.
Refer to Figure 11.
NOTE: Because there is no face up tray option, there is neither a face up solenoid nor an exit
2 gate. Prints travel from the exit 1 area to exit 2 through baffles.
Figure 13 Exit 2
Large-sized paper: (paper with a lead edge length of more than 297mm such as 8.5x14 (SEF)
or A3 (SEF)) - 30 sheets (24lb/90 gsm or less) or equivalent. Paper quantity for stapling can be
changed in NVM. (10 to 50 sheets)
Mixed sizes of paper: Sheets of paper of the same width can be stapled, however, if even one
sheet of paper that is equivalent to a large size is included in a set, the value for large size
paper is used as the limiting quantity. There is no stapling option available for mixed sizes of
paper of different widths.
Refer to Figure 2 for paper sizes for the integrated office finisher.
NOTE: If 150 or more small-sized sheets of paper are stacked and then paper with a lead
edge length of 360mm or more is output, it may be stacked with its lead edge curled.
NOTE: In the case of a stack of ten or fewer sheets of paper, the stack tray may be judged as
having no paper.
+24VDC output from the IOT is supplied to the finisher PWB. The finisher PWB generates Integrated Office Finisher: Power and Control / Interlocks
+5VDC from +24VDC and it supplies +5VDC to various finisher components. In addition,
+24VDC from the finisher PWB goes through the finisher top cover Interlock +24V switch and The finisher front interlock switch is a dual pole switch that is wired in series with the top cover
the finisher front Interlock switch, then returns to a relay on the finisher. When these interlock interlock +24VDC switch on pole A. Pole B uses +5VDC to detect whether the front cover is
switches are both ON, the relay is energized and +24VDC is supplied to various finisher com- open or closed. When this switch opens it interrupts the supply of +24VDC.
ponents. Refer to Figure 3.
The finisher top cover interlock switch +24VDC interrupts the supply of +24VDC when open.
The finisher top cover interlock sensor is a +5VDC photo sensor that detects whether the top
cover is open or closed. Refer to Figure 4.
When the power saving function is used (refer to Standby Power) and the machine is in the
Low Power mode or Sleep mode, the LVPS in the IOT is turned off to shut off the +24VDC
power supplied to the finisher. Refer to Figure 3.
Rear tamper ho me sensor - This sensor detects the rear tamper position. High (blocked) = at During the tamping operation the tampers are moved, thereby aligning sheets of paper trans-
home ported into the compile tray into a registered set. During the offset operation the paper sets are
shifted, front and rear. The tampers also hold the paper set during the stapling operation.
Front tamper motor - This stepper motor moves the front tamper. When the motor rotates for-
ward (CW), the front tamper moves toward the rear of the compile tray. Figure 6 shows the tamper positions when the width of the output paper is 182mm or more.
Rear tamper motor - This stepper motor moves the rear tamper. When the motor rotates for-
ward (CW), the rear tamper moves toward the rear of the compile tray.
Refer to Figure 5.
After the output of the first set of paper, the front tamper moves to the rear offset position.
When the second set of paper reaches the compile tray the tamping operation repeats. Refer
to Figure 7.
The ENT roll and exit roll rotate to transport paper from the IOT to the compile tray. At the same Set Clamp Home Sensor - This photo sensor detects that the set clamp shaft is in the home
time, the paddles of the main paddle shaft assembly and sub paddle shaft assembly rotate to position. HIGH (blocked) = at home position
position the paper in the compile tray.
Set Clamp Motor - This stepper motor rotates in the reverse (CCW) direction only to drive the
The paddles of the sub paddle shaft do not normally contact paper. At a specified time after set clamp shaft in the forward direction.
paper passes the compile exit sensor, the sub paddle solenoid is turned ON and the sub pad-
dle shaft assembly is lowered to contact the paper. Once the paper has been held in the com- Eject Home Sensor - This photo sensor detects that the eject belt is in the home position. In
pile tray, the sub paddle solenoid is turned OFF and the sub paddle shaft assembly is raised. the home position the belt guide is moved back. LOW (not blocked) = at home
Refer to Figure 9.
Eject Motor - This stepper motor drives the eject belt in the forward (CW) direction to transport
paper to the stack tray and rotates in reverse to move the eject belt to home.
Once the sets of paper have been output, the eject motor rotates in the reverse direction The home position of the set clamp shaft is such that the paddles hold paper. In this position
(CCW) to return the eject belts to the home position. Refer to Figure 11. the set clamp home sensor is not blocked. When the set clamp shaft is driven from its home
position, the set clamp home sensor is blocked and the shaft will rotate until it returns to the
home position. Refer to Figure 12.
Table 1 shows the relationship between the states of stacker stack sensor 1 and stacker stack
sensor 2 and the amount of paper in the stack tray (stack tray height).
The finisher LX can collate, stack, staple, and hole punch up to 2000 sheets or 200 sets of
90gsm or 20lb paper. For paper sizes greater than A4 SEF, the maximum number of sets is
limited to 100. Refer to Figure 1.
Booklet
maker
Horizontal
transport
Office finisher LX
Figure 1 Overview
The horizontal transport assembly has its own drives, rollers, sensors, and interlocks and is
powered and controlled by the finisher.
The top cover can be opened for jam clearance. Refer to Figure 4.
NOTE: If a booklet maker also is installed, the hole punch is installed in the horizontal trans-
port.
The H-transport open sensor senses when the top cover is raised and disconnects the 24V
supply from the horizontal transport assembly.
The H-transport open sensor can be viewed from the underside of the horizontal transport.
Refer to Figure 5.
The entrance sensor is an optical sensor which is triggered when the light it emits is reflected Drive is provided to the transport rolls by the transport motor through a system of gears and
by the sheet of paper. belts. Refer to Figure 7.
As paper is fed from exit 1 into the horizontal transport, the entrance sensor detects this.
If, after a preset amount of time, the entrance sensor does not de-actuate, this indicates a
paper jam and an error message is displayed on the UI. Refer to Figure 6.
NOTE: The internal components and operation of the horizontal transport shown at the right
are identical to the unit that installs on the Xerox® VersaLink® C7020/C7025/C7030 machines;
only the cover color is different.
The LVPS receives 110/240VAC supply from the GFI via the power cord and provides +24V to
the finisher PWB. Refer to Figure 8.
Encoder
Encoder sensor
Drive is provided to these components by the transport motor and a system of gears and pul-
leys. Refer to Figure 15 and Figure 16.
Entrance roller
The entrance sensor is actuated by the lead edge of the paper entering the finisher from the
horizontal transport. This signals the paper feed process to begin.
The compiler exit sensor is used to ensure that paper successfully moves through the paper
path. If the compiler exit sensor is not actuated within a pre-set time of the entrance sensor
being actuated, a paper jam condition is signalled and an error message appears. Refer to Fig-
ure 17.
Transport motor
Finisher entrance
sensor
The sub-paddle assembly consists of a set of sub-paddles, an eject chute, and a solenoid. The rotation of the sub paddles actively drives the paper against the compiler backstops where
drive is provided by the transport motor. Refer to Figure 18. the paper is tamped, stapled (if required), and ejected.
The sub paddles rotate constantly and only come into contact with the paper when the solenoid
is actuated. Refer to Figure 19, Figure 20 and Figure 21.
Sub-paddles
Solenoid
Exit chute
Rear tamping
paddle
Main exit drive gear
Eject motor
Rear tamper
Rear tamper
motor Figure 23 Main exit drive
home sensor
The exit cam roll, driven by the main exit drive gear, moves the retaining chassis into the raised
or lowered position by actuating the retaining chassis lever.
The lower exit roll is driven by the exit roll gears through the main exit drive gear. Paper is
moved from the compiler tray to the stacker tray when the upper exit roll is lowered onto the
lower exit roll. Refer to Figure 24.
Eject roller
Clamp arm
The eject roll is driven by the exit roll gears through the main exit drive gear.
Paper is moved from the compiler tray to the stacker tray when the eject pinch roll is lowered
onto the eject roll. Refer to Figure 25.
This action is reversed by a change in direction of the main exit drive gear. Refer to Figure 26.
Eject clamp
home sensor
Set clamps
Set clamp shaft
Stack height
sensor 2
Set clamp
Quadrant gear actuator
The crease assembly is powered and controlled by the finisher PWB. Refer to Figure 31.
Booklet maker
Booklet PWB
Interlock - Booklet Stapler Cover Switch These Interlocks prevent the booklet maker from operating when either the front or rear covers
The booklet stapler cover switch is actuated when the side cover is opened. When actuated, all are obstructed, i.e., raised, or when the booklet maker is incorrectly mounted. Refer to Figure
+ 24V supplies are removed from the booklet maker. Refer to Figure 32. 33.
Figure 32 Booklet stapler cover switch Figure 33 Front and rear safety switches
When Interlocks are open, power is removed and an error message displays on the UI. Refer Each staple assembly contains a staple module and an exit sub chute. The staple units are
to Figure 34. mounted on a carriage rail. Refer to Figure 35 and Figure 36.
Exit sub-chute The position of the stapler assemblies is controlled by the booklet stapler move home sensor
and booklet stapler move position sensor which monitor the position of the rack gears. Refer to
Figure 37.
Carriage rail
Figure 36 Components
Crease
Folder blade
knife
motor
Crease assembly
When the paper is in the correct position within the paper chute, the paper momentarily stops
feeding and the crease blade is raised and lowered. Paper feed now resumes. Refer to Figure
40.
Stapler unit
Chute
Stapler mount
Rail
Crease blade
The end positional tab is used to indicate the correct position along the base frame for single
stapling.
The front and rear positional tabs are used to indicate the correct position along the base frame
for double stapling. Refer to Figure 43.
Front positional
tab
End positional
Figure 42 Stapler mount movement tab
Stapler Cartridge
The staple units contain a staple cartridge CRU, staple clinch motor, cam and a staple drive
mechanism.
When required, the staple clinch motor is energized to drive the cam.
One full rotation of the cam causes the staple drive mechanism to drive and clinch a staple,
stored in the staple cartridge CRU, through the paper set. Refer to PL 13.20.
When the motor rotates in a clockwise direction it operates the two inner punch cams and in a
counter-clockwise direction it operates all four (XE) or three (USSG, XCL) punch cams. Refer
to Figure 45.
Punches
The rotation of the encoder is monitored by the encoder sensor which is an optical sensor that
reflects light onto the encoder. Refer to Figure 46.
Encoder sensor
Encoder
The rotation of the encoder wheel causes the apertures to pass through the encoder sensor
wheel, allowing light to pass. This triggers the sensor, which indicates that the hole punch has
rotated one cycle. Refer to Figure 47.
Punch box
The 1 or 3-line fax module contains the fax modem(s) and fax speaker and is installed at the
rear of the printer adjacent to the ESS PWB, Figure 1. The line 1 fax PWB, PL 20.05 Item 10, is
fitted with a single fax modem. For the 3-line fax option, the line 2 and 3 fax PWBs, PL 20.05
Item 15 are connected to the line 1 fax PWB via the riser PWB, PL 20.05 Item 16. The line 1
fax PWB is connected directly to the ESS PWB and is controlled by software running on the
ESS PWB. Refer to BSD 20.1 Fax. The fax module also features a port to accommodate an
optional telephone handset.
Fax over IP (VoIP Fax) is a purchasable option, installed via the USB port, which allows the
printer to send and receive faxes over an IP based network using session Initiation Protocol
(SIP) and Voice over IP (VoIP) protocols and services. The Fax over IP enabled printer can
send and receive faxes from a variety of analog and digital devices.
Product Description
*Model No. or Product Name:
List damaged and affected part(s) of the machine by description and part number:
Customer Identification
*Customer Name: *Name of Customer Contact Person:
Fax:
* Required information is preceeded by asterisk, title shown in red, with a tan wash background
Details of Incident
*Description Of Incident: (Check all that apply)
Smoke
Describe quantity and duration of smoke:
Other, describe:
MANDATORY DESCRIPTION (above): Provide a detailed description of all valid factors that may have
contributed to the incident. Hardware involved in the incident should be preserved and retained for further
investigation should investigation be deemed necessary by EH&S.
LIST INCIDENT DESCRIPTIONS AND SUPPORT DIAGRAMS/DATA INCLUDED OR ATTACHED:
*Did external emergency response provider(s) such as a fire department, ambulance, etc. respond?
No Yes Identify: (i.e., source, names of individuals)
Apparent cause of incident (identify part that is suspected to be responsible for the incident)
* Required information is preceeded by asterisk, title shown in red with a tan wash background
JOB TITLE:
DATE:
PRODUCT AND PUBLICATION TITLE: PUBLICATION REVISION DATE: SOFTWARE REVISION LEVEL: